Futaba 7C manual | Futaba 9C manual | Futaba 9Z FAQ | About digital servos | GV-1 manual | Bergen Intrepid Gasser Manual | ElectriFly Triton Charger | Zenoah G260 Instruction Manual | Zenoah G260 Service Manual | Jr_Propo Voyager E Electric Heli

If you have come to this page from a search engine, chances are you are interested in one of the PDF documents that has donated its text to the page. If you have the bandwidth to spare you may be interested first in seeing the main technical library page that has the PDF documents.

Futaba 7C

7CA / 7CHP

7 CHANNEL RADIO CONTROL SYSTEM

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Technical updates and additional programming examples available at: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\7c-faq.html

Entire Contents © Copyright 2003 1M23N13606

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Additional Technical Help, Support and Service . . . . .3

Application, Export and Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Meaning of Special Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Safety Precautions (do not operate without reading) . .5

Introduction to the 7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Contents and Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Transmitter Controls &

Switch Identification/Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Charging the Ni-Cd Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Stick Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Radio Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .16

Range Checking & Aircraft Frequencies . . . . . . . . . .17

Transmitter Displays and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Warning and Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

AIRPLANE FUNCTIONS

Map of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Quick Guide to Setting up a 4-channel Airplane . . . .22

ACRO BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

MODEL Submenu: MODELSEL. , COPY and NAME . .25

Parameter(PARA.) Submenu: RESET,TYPE,MODUL,

CH5 & CH7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Servo REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

End Point (E. POINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Idle Management: THR-CUT

Dual Rates and Exponential ( D/R,EXP) .. . . . . . . .34

TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Fail Safe (F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . .42

Wing types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

(FLAPRN) Flaperon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

(FL-TRIM) Flap Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

ELEVON (see tail types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Tail types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

ELEVON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

V-TAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

SNAP ROLL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Mixes: definitions and types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

ELE-FLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Air Brake (A.BRAKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

FLP-ELE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

AIL-RUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Prog. Mixes (P-MIX1-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Other Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

HELICOPTER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Table of contents and reference info for helicopters . .57

Getting Started with a Basic Helicopter . . . . . . . . . .58

HELI-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . .61

MODEL TYPE (PARA. submenu) . . . . . . . . . .61

SWASH AFR (swashplate surface direction and

travel correction) (not in H1) .... . . . . . . . . . .63

Setting up the Normal Flight Condition . . . . . . .65

TH-CUT (specialized settings for helicopter specific

models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

HELI-SPECIFIC ADVANCEMENU FUNCTIONS. . .67

Throttle Hold (TH-HOLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

TH-CRV, PI -CRV and Revolution Mix(REVO) . ....68

Idle-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Trims/offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Hovering setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Gyros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this point,

any time we are using a featureís specialized name or

abbreviation, as seen on the screen of the 7C, that name,

feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on the radio's

screen, including capitalization, and shown in a DIFFERENT

TYPE STYLE for clarity. Any time we mention a specific

control on the radio itself, such as moving SWITCH A, KNOB

VR, or the THROTTLE STICK, those words will be

displayed as they are here.

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing a Futaba® 7C series digital proportional R/C system. This system is extremely versatile and may

be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the best use of your system and to fly safely, please read this

manual carefully. If you have any difficulties while using your system, please consult the manual, our online Frequently

Asked Questions (on the web pages referenced below), your hobby dealer, or the Futaba Service Center.

Owner's Manual and Additional Technical Help

This manual has been carefully written to be as helpful to you, the new owner, as possible. There are many pages of setup

procedures and examples. However, it need not be your sole resource of setup guidelines for your 7C. For example, pages

22-24 include setup instructions for a basic 4-channel airplane. The Frequently Asked Questions web page referenced

below includes this type of step-by-step setup instructions for a variety of other model types, including multi-engine,

complex gear installation, 7-servo aerobatic models, 140 degree CCPM, etc.

Due to unforeseen changes in production procedures, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during your hobby's "off

season" to ensure safe operation.

IN NORTH AMERICA

Please feel free to contact the Futaba Service Center for assistance in operation, use and programming. Please be sure to

regularly visit the 7C Frequently Asked Questions web site at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html. This page includes

extensive programming, use, set up and safety information on the 7C radio system and is updated regularly. Any technical

updates and US manual corrections will be available on this web page. If you do not find the answers to your questions there,

please see the end of our F.A.Q. area for information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient response.

Donít have Internet access? Internet access is available at no charge at most public libraries, schools, and other public

resources. We find internet support to be a fabulous reference for many modelers as items can be printed and saved for future

reference, and can be accessed at any hour of the day, night, weekend or holiday. If you do not wish to access the internet for

information, however, don' t worry. Our support teams are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you.

FOR SERVICE ONLY: FOR SUPPORT :

Hobby Services (U.S. only) (PROGRAMMING AND USER QUESTIONS)

3002N, Apollo Drive, Suite 1 Please start here for answers to most questions:

Champaign, IL 61822 U.S.A. www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html

(217)398-0007

www.hobbyservices.com

FACSIMILE: 217-398-7721

PHONE: 217-398-8970 option 4

OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA

Please contact your Futaba importer in your region of the world to assist you with any questions, problems or service needs.

Please recognize that all information in this manual, and all support availability, is based upon the systems sold in North

America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region' s support center for assistance.

3

Application, Export, and Modification

1. This product may be used for model airplane or surface (boat, car, robot) use, if on the correct frequency. It is not

intended for use in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is

subject to regulations of the Ministry of Radio/Telecommunications and is restricted under Japanese law to such purposes.

2. Exportation precautions:

(a) When this product is exported from the country of manufacture, its use is to be approved by the laws governing the

country of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If this product is then re-exported to other

countries, it may be subject to restrictions on such export. Prior approval of the appropriate government authorities may

be required. If you have purchased this product from an exporter outside your country, and not the authorized Futaba

distributor in your country, please contact the seller immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met.

(b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations, and an application

for export approval must be submitted. In the US, use of 72MHz (aircraft only), 75MHz (ground models only) and 27MHz

(both) frequency bands are strictly regulated by the FCC. This equipment must not be utilized to operate equipment other than

radio controlled models. Similarly, other frequencies (except 50MHz, forHAMoperators) must not be used to operate models.

3. Modification, adjustment, and replacement of parts: Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modification, adjustment, and

replacement of parts on this product. Any such changes may void the warranty.

Compliance Information Statement (for U.S.A.)

This device, trade name Futaba Corporation of America, model number R138DP and R127DF comply with part 15

of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The responsible party of this device compliance is;

Futaba Corporation of America

2865 Wall Triana Highway, Huntsville, Alabama 35824, U.S.A.

TEL (256) 461 - 7348

The RBRC™ SEAL on the nickel-cadmium battery contained in Futaba products indicates that Futaba

Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect and recycle these

batteries at the end of their useful lives, when taken out of service within the United States. The RBRC™

program provides a convenient alternative to placing used nickel-cadmium batteries into the trash or municipal

waste system, which is illegal in some areas.

(for USA)

You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please call

1-800-8-BATTERY for information on Ni-Cd battery recycling in your area. Futaba Corporation of Americaís involvement

in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and conserving natural resources.

NOTE: Our instruction manuals encourage our customers to return spent batteries to a local recycling center in order to

keep a healthy environment.

RBRC is a trademark of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation.

4

Meaning of Special Markings

Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks:

DANGER - Procedures which may lead to dangerous conditions and cause death/serious injury if not carried out properly.

WARNING - Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury to the user if not

carried out properly, or procedures where the probability of superficial injury or physical damage is high.

CAUTION - Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to the user is small, but there is a danger of injury, or

physical damage, if not carried out properly.

= Prohibited = Mandatory

Warning: Always keep electrical components away from small children.

FLYING SAFETY

To ensure the safety of yourself and others, please observe the following precautions:

Have regular maintenance performed. Although your 7C protects the model memories with non-volatile EEPROM

memory (which does not require periodic replacement) and not a battery, it still should have regular checkups for wear

and tear. We recommend sending your system to the Futaba Service Center annually during your non-flying-season

for a complete checkup and service.

Ni-Cd Battery

Charge the batteries! (See Charging the Ni-Cd batteries, p. 14, for details.) Always recharge the transmitter and

receiver batteries for at least 15 hours before each flying session. A low battery will soon die, causing loss of control

and a crash. When you begin your flying session, reset your 7C's built-in timer, and during the session pay attention

to the duration of usage.

Stop flying long before your batteries become low on charge. Do not rely on your radioís low battery warning

systems, intended only as a precaution, to tell you when to recharge. Always check your transmitter and

receiver batteries prior to each flight.

Where to Fly

We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs and fields by asking

your nearest hobby dealer, or in the US by contacting the Academy of Model Aeronautics.

You can also contact the national Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA), which has more than 2,500 chartered clubs across the

country. Through any one of them, instructor training programs and insured newcomer training are available. Contact the AMA

at the address or toll-free phone number below.

Academy of Model Aeronautics

5151 East Memorial Drive

Muncie, IN 47302-9252

Tele. (800) 435-9262

Fax (765) 741-0057

or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org

5

Always pay particular attention to the flying field's rules, as well as the presence and location of spectators, the

wind direction, and any obstacles on the field. Be very careful flying in areas near power lines, tall buildings, or

communication facilities as there may be radio interference in their vicinity.

If you must fly away from a club field, be sure there are no other modelers flying within a three-to-five-mile range, or youmay

lose control of your aircraft or cause someone else to lose control.

At the flying field

Before flying, be sure that the frequency you intend to fly with is not in use, and secure any frequency control

device (pin, tag, etc.) for that frequency before turning on your transmitter. It is never possible to fly two or more

models on the same frequency at the same time. Even though there are different types of modulation (AM, FM,

PCM), only one model may be flown on a single frequency at any one time.

To prevent possible damage to your radio gear, turn the power switches on and off in the proper sequence:

1. Pull throttle stick to idle position, or otherwise disarm your motor/engine.

2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen.

3. Confirm the proper model memory has been selected.

4. Fully extend the transmitter antenna.

5. Turn on your receiver power.

6. Test all controls. If a servo operates abnormally, donít attempt to fly until you determine the cause of the problem.

(For PCM systems only: Test to ensure that the FailSafe settings are correct by waiting at least 2 minutes after

adjusting and then turning the transmitter off and confirming the proper surface/throttle movements. Turn the

transmitter back on.)

7. Start your engine.

8. Complete a full range check (see p. 17).

9. After flying, bring your throttle stick to idle position, engage any kill switches or otherwise disarm your motor/engine.

10. Turn off receiver power.

11. Turn off transmitter power.

If you do not turn on your system in this order, you may damage your servos or control surfaces, flood your engine, or in the

case of electric-powered or gasoline-powered models, the engine may unexpectedly turn on and cause a severe injury.

While you are getting ready to fly, if you place your transmitter on the ground, be sure that the wind won't tip

it over. If it is knocked over, the throttle stick may be accidentally moved, causing the engine to speed up. Also,

damage to your transmitter may occur.

Before taxiing, be sure to extend the transmitter antenna to its full length.

A collapsed antenna will reduce your flying range and cause a loss of control. It is a good idea to avoid pointing the transmitter

antenna directly at the model, since the signal is weakest in that direction.

Don't fly in the rain! Water or moisture may enter the transmitter through the antenna or stick openings and cause erratic

operation or loss of control. If you must fly in wet weather during a contest, be sure to cover your transmitter with a plastic

bag or waterproof barrier. Never fly if lightning is expected.

6

A QUICK INTRODUCTION TO THE 7C SYSTEM

TRANSMITTER:

• Large graphic liquid-crystal display panel with 4 buttons and an easy set up turn-and-press Dial for quick, easy setup.

•All transmitters include all 2 aircraft types with specialized programming for each, including:

• Airplane (ACRO)

• V-TAIL • Twin Aileron Servos (FLAPRN )

• ELEVON

• Air Brake

• Snap Roll

• Helicopter (6 swashplate types, including CCPM, see page 61)

• 2 Idle Ups • Throttle and Pitch Curves per Condition

• Revo. Mixing • Gyro Mixing including Separate Settings per Condition

• BASIC menu for quick, easy set up of less complex models.

• ADVANCE menu for more complex, unique setups.

• Four electronic TRIM LEVERS for rapid yet precise trim adjustment - no remembering to "store trims" between models

and no more "bumped trims" during transport.

• TH-CUT (ACRO/HELI) (engine shut off) setups to allow precise engine control for taxi and landings.

• 10 complete model memories

• New stick design with improved feel, adjustable length and tension.

• Triple rates available by setting dual rates to 3-position switches.

• Six SWITCHES DIAL and 1 ; assignable in some applications.

• Trainer system includes the "functional" (F ) setting, which allows the student to use the 7C's mixing, helicopter, and

other programming functions even with a 4-channel buddy box. (Optional trainer cord required.)

• Transmits in both FM (PPM) and PCMby selecting modulation/cycling transmitter. Requires receiver of proper modulation.

• Permanent memory storage via EEPROM with no backup battery to service or have fail.

• 7CA transmitter features airplane friendly switch layout, with the trainer switch at the left hand, and a notched throttle

to minimize throttle changes with rudder input. Defaults to ACRO MODEL TYPE.

• 7CH transmitter features helicopter-friendly switch layout, with idle-up switch at the left hand, and

a smooth, ratchet-less (unsprung) throttle for perfect hovering. Defaults to H-1 MODEL TYPE.

Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this point, any time we are using a featureís specialized name or abbreviation

as seen on the screen of the 7C, that name, feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on the radioís screen, including

capitalization, and shown in a DIFFERENT TYPESTYLE for clarity. Any time we mention a specific control on the radio itself,

such as moving SWITCH A, KNOB VR, or the THROTTLE STICK, those words will be displayed as they are here.

7

• In North America it is against FCC regulation to change the crystal within the transmitter to a different

channel. All such transmitter crystal changes must be performed by a certified radio technician. Failure to properly tune

a system to its new channel may result in decreased range and may also result in interference to other types of frequency

users on adjoining channels. Doing so also voids your AMA insurance.

SERVOS

• Please see technical specifications page for specifics on the servos included with your system.

• The included receiver is compatible with all J-plug Futaba servos, including retract, winch, and digital servos.

8

RECEIVER: R127DF/R138DP

• The R127DF FM 7-channel or the R138DP PCM 7-channel receiver included with your system is a high-sensitivity

narrow-band dual-conversion receiver.

• Any Futaba narrow band FM receiver (all produced after 1991) on the correct frequency band and frequency may be

used with the 7C.

• Any Futaba PCM 1024 receiver on the right frequency band and frequency may be used with the 7C (all 1024 receivers

say PCM1024; receivers which say PCM but not 1024 are 512 resolution and not compatible).

NEVER attempt to change a receiver's band by simply changing crystal (I.E. removing a 72MHz crystal and inserting

a 75MHz crystal). A receiver that has a crystal installed from a different frequency band without retuning will not

receive properly and will have dramatically decreased range.

• In North America the receiver included with this system may have its frequency changed by simply changing the crystal

as long as it remains in the same half the band. A low band receiver between channels 11 and 35 may be changed to

any other channel between 11 and 35 without requiring any tuning. A high band receiver between channels 36 and 60

may similarly be changed. Receivers being changed from a high band channel to a low band or vice versa require proper

tuning and service by the Futaba Service Center.

• R127DF Receiver or R138DP Receiver

• Servos, S3004, S3151, S3003 or S3001, with mounting

hardware and servo arm assortment

• Switch harness

• Aileron extension cord

• 110V wall charger (North America)

• Frequency Flag

Transmitter T7CAP/T7CHP

Operating system: 2-stick, 7 channels

Transmitting frequency: 50 or 72 MHz bands

Modulation: FM/PPM or PCM, switchable

Power supply: 9.6V NT8S600B Ni-Cd battery

Current drain: 250 mA

Receiver R138DP

(PCM Dual conversion)

Receiving frequency: 50 or 72 MHz bands

Intermediate freq.: 10.7 MHz & 455 kHz

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V Ni-Cd battery

Current drain: 16 mA

Size: 2.56 x 1.42 x 0.85 (65 x 36 x 21.5 mm)

Weight: 1.42 oz (40.3 g)

Channels: 8

Receiver R127DF

(FM Dual conversion)

Receiving frequency: 50 or 72 MHz bands

Intermediate freq.: 10.7MHz & 455 kHz

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V Ni-Cd battery

Current drain: 10 mA

Size: 2.53 x 1.41 x 0.83 (64.3 x 35.8 x 21.0 mm)

Weight: 1.43 oz (40.5 g)

Channels: 7

Servo S3151 ( Standard, digital )

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8V (from receiver)

Output torque: 43.0 oz-in(3.1 kg-cm) at 4.8V

Operating speed: 0.21 sec/60 at 4.8V

Size: 1.59 x 0.79 x 1.42 (40.5 x 20 x 36.1 mm)

Weight: 1.48 oz (42 g)

Servo S3001 (Standard, ball-bearing)

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver)

Output torque: 41.7 oz-in (3.0 kg-cm)

Operating speed: 0.22 sec/60

Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41 (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm)

Weight: 1.59 oz (45.1g)

Servo S3003/S3004 (Standard/ball-bearing)

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver)

Output torque: 44.4 oz-in (3.2 kg-cm) at 4.8V

Operating speed: 0.23 sec/60 at 4.8V

Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41 (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm)

Weight: 1.31 oz (37.2 g)

9

CONTENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(Specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice.)

Your 7CAP or 7CHP (packaged with a 7-channel PCM receiver or a 7-channel FM receiver) system includes

the following components:

The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog for more information:

• NT8S Transmitter battery pack - the (600mAh) transmitter Ni-Cd battery pack may be easily exchanged with a fresh

one to provide enough capacity for extended flying sessions.

• Trainer cord - the optional training cord may be used to help a beginning pilot learn to fly easily by placing the instructor on

a separate transmitter. Note that the 7C transmitter may be connected to another 7C system, as well as to many other models

of Futaba transmitters. The 7C transmitter uses the newer rectangular type cord plug. Both new-to-new and new-to-round plug

style trainer cords are available.

• FTA8 Neckstrap - a neckstrap may be connected to your T7C system to make it easier to handle and improve your flying

precision, since your hands won't need to support the transmitter's weight.

• Y-harnesses, servo extensions, etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-harnesses, including a heavy-duty version with heavier

wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other installations.

• 5-cell (6.0V) receiver battery packs - All Futaba airborne equipment (except that which is specifically labeled otherwise) is

designed to work with 4.8V (Ni-Cd 4 cells) or 6.0V (Ni-Cd 5 cells or alkaline 4 cells). Using a 6.0V pack increases the current

flow to the servos, which accelerates their rate of response and their torque. However, because of this faster current draw, a 5-

cell battery pack of the same mAh rating will last approximately æ the time of a 4-cell pack.

• R309DPS - Synthesized receiver which can be changed to any 72MHz frequency with the turn of 2 dials, no tuning needed.

• Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros are available for your aircraft or helicopter needs. See p. 56 for aircraft or

p. 72 for helicopter gyro information.

10

TRANSMITTER CONTROLS - AIRPLANE

SW(B)

VR

SW(A)

SW(F)

SW(E)

SW(D)

SW(G)

This controls CH6, and if flaperon mixing

is activated controls the flap.

Flap Trim Control

Rudder Dual Rate Switch

Elevator Dual Rate Switch

/TH-CUT/P-MIX/TIMER

Snap Roll or

Trainer Switch

Landing Gear

Switch

/CH5

/CH7

Rudder

/Throttle

Stick

Power

LED*

Throttle

Trim Lever

Rudder

Trim Lever

LCD Panel

Power Switch

(Up position: ON)

Hook

(for optional neckstrap)

Edit Keys Edit keys

Aileron Trim Lever

Dial

Elevator Trim Lever

Elevator

/Aileron

Stick

Aileron Dual Rate Switch

Elevator - Flap Mixing or

Airbrake Mixing Switch

Carrying Handle

Antenna

Antenna must be fully extended when flying.

Be careful not to bend your antenna when you

collapse or extend it.

11

This figure shows the default switch assignments for a Mode 2 system as supplied by the factory.

You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position within

the setting menu for the function you wish to move. (Example: move aileron dual rates to switch G

to create triple rates. See p. 34 for details.)

* Power LED blinks to indicate if any mix switches are activated.

TRANSMITTER CONTROLS - HELI

SW(B)

VR

SW(A)

SW(E)

SW(D)

SW(H)

SW(G)

Hovering - Pitch Knob

Rudder Dual Rate Switch

/CH7

Elevator Dual Rate Switch

/TH-CUT/P-MIX/TIMER

Idle-up 1&2 Switch

/CH5/OFFSET/GYRO

Throttle/Collective

Pitch & Rudder Stick

Throttle/Collective

Trim Lever

Power

LED*

Rudder

Trim Lever

LCD Panel

Power Switch

(Up position: ON)

Hook

(for optional neckstrap)

Edit Keys Edit keys

Aileron Trim Lever

Dial

Elevator Trim Lever

Elevator

/Aileron

Stick

Aileron Dual Rate Switch

Throttle - Hold Switch

Trainer Switch Carrying Handle

Antenna

Antenna must be fully extended when flying.

Be careful not to bend your antenna when you

collapse or extend it.

12

This figure shows the default switch assignments for a Mode 2 system as supplied by the factory.

You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position within

the setting menu for the function you wish to move.

* Power LED blinks to indicate if any mix switches are activated.

Ni-Cd battery pack

Charging jack

Battery cover

Battery connector location

Trainer connector

Switch/Knob Airplane (ACRO) Helicopter (HELI)

A or H Tx.

SWITCH A elevator dual rate elevator dual rate

Switch B rudder dual rate rudder dual rate

up = ELE-FLPon

down = AIRBRAKEon

SWITCH D aileron dual rate aileron dual rate

Switch E OR G* landing gear/ch 5 throttle hold

Switch F OR H* snap roll/trainer trainer

SWITCH G OR E* idle-up 1 and 2,

ch5/OFFSET/GYRO

KNOB VR flap/ch 6 HOVERING PIT

(flap trim if FLAPERONon)

* On the 7CA (mode 2) transmitters, the Top Left Switches are spring-loaded switch and 2-position switch. On the 7CA (mode 1) and 7CH

transmitters, the Top Left Switch is a 3-position with the spring loaded switch on the top right.

NOTE: If you need to remove or replace the transmitter battery, do not pull on its wires to remove it. Instead,

gently pull on the connector's plastic housing where it plugs into the transmitter.

SWITCH ASSIGNMENT TABLE

• The factory default functions activated by the switches and knobs for a Mode 2 transmitter are shown below.

• Most 7C functions may be reassigned to non-default positions quickly and easily.

• Basic control assignments of channels 5 & 7 are quickly adjustable in PARA (see p. 28). For example, the channel 5

servo, which defaults to SWITCH E for retract use, can easily be unassigned (NULL) to allow for easy use as a second

rudder servo in a mix, or to a dial for bomb door or other control.

• Note that most functions need to be activated in the programming to operate.

• Mode 1 transmitter functions are similar but reverse certain switch commands. Always check that you have the desired

switch assignment for each function during set up.

13

Receiver Aircraft (ACRO) Helicopter (HELI)

Output and

Channel

1 ailerons/combined right flap & aileron 1 aileron (cyclic roll)

2 elevator elevator (cyclic pitch)

3 throttle throttle

4 rudder rudder

5 spare/landing gear/combined left flap and aileron 1,2

1,2

1,2

spare/gyro

6 spare/ flap(s)/combined left flap and aileron pitch (collective pitch)

7 spare/combined left flap and aileron spare/governor

14

1

2

Flaperon mode. (See p. 43).

Within flaperon, the second aileron servo can be assigned to channel 5, 6 or 7. (See p. 43)

CHARGING THE Ni-Cd BATTERIES

Charging Your Systemís Batteries

1. Connect the transmitter charging jack and airborne Ni-Cd batteries to the transmitter and receiver connectors of the charger.

2. Plug the charger into a wall socket.

3. Check that the charger LED lights.

The initial charge, and any charge after a complete discharge,

should be at least 18 hours to ensure full charge. The batteries

should be left on charge for about 15 hours when recharging the

standard NR-4J, NR4F1500 and NT8S600B Ni-Cd batteries.

We recommend charging the batteries with the charger

supplied with your system. Note that the use of a fast charger

may damage the batteries by overheating and dramatically

reduce their lifetime.

You should fully discharge your system's Ni-Cd batteries periodically to prevent a condition called memory. For

example, if you only make two flights each session, or you regularly use only a small amount of the batteries' capacity, the

memory effect can reduce the actual capacity even if the battery is fully charged. You can cycle your batteries with a commercial

cycling unit*, or by leaving the system on and exercising the servos by moving the transmitter sticks until the transmitter shuts

itself off. Cycling should be done every four to eight weeks, even during the winter or periods of long storage. Keep track of the

batteries' capacity during cycling; if there is a noticeable change, you may need to replace the batteries.

*Note that your 7C transmitter system is protected from accidental reverse polarity, power surges and other electrical

damage by a diode. The transmitter battery must be removed from the system to cycle. The battery easily unplugs from the

battery compartment and has a standard J-plug for easy cycling.

DO NOT attempt to charge your 8-cell transmitter pack on the 4-cell receiver plug of the wall charger!

Charger

TX: Transmitter charging indicator

RX: Receiver charging indicator

To transmitter charging jack

Receiver Ni-Cd battery

RECEIVER AND SERVO CONNECTIONS

15

Adjusting the length of the non-slip control sticks

You may change the length of the control sticks to make your transmitter more

comfortable to hold and operate. To lengthen or shorten your transmitterís sticks,

first unlock the stick tip by holding locking piece B and turning stick tip A

counterclockwise. Next, move both pieces up or down (to lengthen or shorten).

When the length feels comfortable, lock the position by turning locking

piece B counterclockwise, while holding piece A.

Stick lever tension adjustment

You may adjust the tension of your sticks to provide the feel that you prefer for flying.

Adjusting Display Contrast

To adjust the display contrast, from the home menu press and hold the End button.

Turn the dial while still holding End button:

clockwise to brighten

counterclockwise to darken the display

Let go off the dial and the button.

Changing Modes:

Hold down the MODE and End buttons while turning on the transmitter. The screen reads "STK-MD". Change this to

the correct mode. Note that this will NOT change the throttle and elevator rachets, etc. Those are mechanical changes

that must be done by a service center.

To adjust your springs, youíll have

to remove the rear case of the transmitter. First, remove the battery cover on the rear of the transmitter. Next, unplug the

battery wire and remove the battery from the transmitter.

Next, using a screwdriver, remove the four screws

that hold the transmitterís rear cover in position, and put them in a safe place. Gently ease off the transmitterís rear cover.

Now you'll see the view shown in the figure above.

Using a small Phillips screwdriver, rotate the adjusting screw for each stick for the desired spring tension. The tension

increases when the adjusting screw is turned clockwise.

When you are satisfied with the spring tensions, reattach the transmitter's rear cover. Check that the upper printed circuit

board is on its locating pins.

When the cover is properly in place, reinstall and tighten the four screws. Reinstall the battery cover.

Stick tip A Locking piece B

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder Stick Stick

Mode 2 transmitter with rear cover removed.

RADIO INSTALLATION

While you are installing the battery, receiver, switch harness and servos into your model's fuselage, please pay attention to

the following guidelines:

Use the supplied rubber grommets when you mount each servo. Be sure not to

over-tighten the screws. If any portion of the servo case directly contacts the fuselage or

the servo rails, the rubber grommets will not dampen the vibration, which can cause

mechanical wear and servo failure.

Servo Throw

Once you have installed the servos, operate each one over its full travel and check that the pushrod and output

arms do not bind or collide with each other, even at extreme trim settings. Check to see that each control linkage does

not require undue force to move (if you hear a servo buzzing when there is no transmitter control motion, most likely there

is too much friction in the control or pushrod). Even though the servo will tolerate loads, any unnecessary load applied to

the servo arm will drain the battery pack quickly.

Switch Harness Installation

When you are ready to install the switch harness, remove the switch cover and use it as a template to cut screw holes

and a rectangular hole slightly larger than the full stroke of the switch. Choose a switch location on the opposite side of

the fuselage from the engine exhaust pipe, and pick a location where it canít be inadvertently turned on or off during

handling or storage. Install the switch so it moves without restriction and snaps from ON to OFF and vice versa.

Receiver Antenna

It is normal for the receiver antenna to be longer than the fuselage.

DO NOT cut or fold it back on itself --- cutting or folding changes the electrical length of the antenna and may

reduce range. Secure the antenna to the top of the vertical fin, and let the excess wire length trail behind. You may run the

antenna inside of a non-metallic housing within the fuselage, but range may suffer if the antenna is located near metal or

carbon fiber pushrods or cables. Be sure to perform a range check before flying.

Receiver Notes

When you insert servo, switch or battery connectors into the receiver, note that each plastic housing has an

alignment tab. Be sure the alignment tab is oriented properly before inserting the connector. To remove a connector

from the receiver, pull on the connector housing rather than the wires.

If your aileron servo (or others) are too far away to plug into the receiver, use an aileron extension cord to extend the length

of the servo lead. Additional Futaba extension cords of varying lengths are available from your hobby dealer. Always use an

extension of the proper length. Avoid plugging multiple extensions together to attain your desired length. If distance is greater than

18" or multiple or high current draw servos are being used, use Futaba Heavy-Duty servo extensions.

Receiver Vibration and Waterproofing

The receiver contains precision electronic parts. Be sure to avoid vibration, shock, and temperature extremes.

For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing materials. It is also a good idea

to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the bag with a rubber band before

wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver, you may experience intermittent

operation or a crash. If in doubt, send the receiver for service.

Wood screw

Rubber grommet

Brass eyelet

Servo mount

or rail

16

Range Testing Your R/C System

Please note that different systems demonstrate different range checks and the same system will range check differently in different

conditions. Also, the receiver antenna's installation affects the range test -- exiting the top of the model is ideal.

This is a brief explanation of range test. For more in-depth specifics on receiver antenna mounting, additional checks if

unsatisfactory range is demonstrated, range checking with gasoline powered engines, etc, please see our F.A.Q. page at

www.futaba-rc.com.

• Leave the transmitter's antenna retracted and be sure both batteries are fully charged.

• Position the aircraft away from wires, other transmitters, etc.

Test one - engine/motor off, minimum of 100 ft. range

• Have a friend view the model but not hold it, engine off. (People conduct signals, too!)

• Walk away from the model, working all controls constantly. Stop when the servos jitter significantly (a jitter here and

there is normal), control movement stops (PCM), or you lose control altogether.

• Measure the distance. If greater than 100 feet, great! Proceed to Test 2. Less than 100 feet of range check means you

need more information to determine if your system is safe to fly. Please see our web site or call support for additional

tests to perform before flying your system.

• Repeat with friend holding the model. Note any differences.

Test two - engine/motor on

• Repeat the test with the model's engine running and with someone holding the model. If a decrease of more than 10%

is noted, research and resolve the cause of interference prior to flying your model.

What your fully operational system demonstrates is the normal range for your system in those conditions. Before every flying

session, it is critical that you perform a range check. It is also required by the AMA Safety Code. If you notice a significant

decrease in range with fully charged batteries, do not attempt to fly.

Aircraft (fixed wing and helicopter) Frequencies

17

72 MHz band

Ch. MHz Ch. MHz

11 72.010 36 72.510

12 72.030 37 72.530

13 72.050 38 72.550

14 72.070 39 72.570

15 72.090 40 72.590

16 72.110 41 72.610

17 72.130 42 72.630

18 72.150 43 72.650

19 72.170 44 72.670

20 72.190 45 72.690

21 72.210 46 72.710

22 72.230 47 72.730

23 72.250 48 72.750

24 72.270 49 72.770

25 72.290 50 72.790

26 72.310 51 72.810

27 72.330 52 72.830

28 72.350 53 72.850

29 72.370 54 72.870

30 72.390 55 72.890

31 72.410 56 72.910

32 72.430 57 72.930

33 72.450 58 72.950

34 72.470 59 72.970

35 72.490 60 72.990

50 MHz Band (Amateur Radio Operator "HAM" license required)

Ch. MHz Ch. MHz

00 50.800 01 50.820

02 50.840 03 50.860

04 50.880 05 50.900

06 50.920 07 50.940

08 50.960 09 50.980

Installing your frequency number flag:

It is very important that you display your

transmitting channel number at all times. To install your

flag, peel off the channel number's backing sheet, and carefully

stick the numbers to both sides of the number holder. Now you

can snap the number holder onto the lower portion of the

antenna as shown in the figure --- use the clip that fits more

snugly on your antenna. You may wish to cut off the other,

unused clip on the other side of the flag.

The following frequencies and channel numbers may be used for flying aircraft in the United States:

TRANSMITTER DISPLAYS & BUTTONS

When you first turn on your transmitter, a confirmation double beep sounds, and the screen shown below appears. Before

flying, or even starting the engine, be sure that the model type and name appearing on the display matches the model that

you are about to fly! If you are in the wrong model memory, servos may be reversed, and travels and trims will be wrong,

leading to an immediate crash.

Edit buttons and Start-up Screen (appears when system is first turned on):

MODE/PAGE BUTTON: (key)

Press and hold MODE BUTTON for one second to open programming menus. Press MODE BUTTON to switch between

BASIC and ADVANCE menus. HELI only: Press MODE BUTTON to scroll between conditions in certain functions.

END BUTTON: ( key)

Press END BUTTON to return to previous screen. Closes functions back to menus, closes menus to start-up screen.

SELECT/CURSOR BUTTONS: ( key)

Press SELECT/CURSOR BUTTON to scroll through and select the option to edit within a function.

Press SELECT/CURSOR BUTTON to page up/page down within BASIC or ADVANCE menu.

Turn Dial:

Turn DIAL clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll through functions within each menu.

Turn DIAL clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll through choices within an option of a function (for example, to

select which switch controls dual/triple rates).

Press Dial:

Press DIAL to select the actual function you wish to edit from the menu.

Press DIAL and hold one second to confirm major decisions, such as the decision to: select a different model from

memory, copy one model memory over another, trim reset, store channel position in FailSafe, change model type, reset

entire model. System will ask if you are sure. Press DIAL again to accept change.

18

Mode

key

End

key

Rudder trim

display

Throttle trim

display

Elevator trim

display Model

name

Model

number

Modulation indicator

(PCM shown)

Aileron trim

display Select

keys

Battery voltage

Dial

WARNING & ERROR DISPLAYS

An alarm or error indication may appear on the display of your transmitter for several reasons, including when the

transmitter power switch is turned on, when the battery voltage is low, and several others. Each display has a unique sound

associated with it, as described below.

LOW BATTERY ERROR: Warning sound: Continuous beep until transmitter is powered off.

The LOW BATTERY warning is displayed when the transmitter battery voltage drops below 8.5V.

Land your model as soon as possible before loss of control due to a dead battery.

MIXER ALERT WARNING: Warning sound: 5 Beeps (repeated until problem resolved or overridden)

The MIXER ALERT warning is displayed to alert you whenever you turn on the transmitter with any of the

mixing switches active. This warning will disappear when the offending switch or control is deactivated.

Switches for which warnings will be issued at power-up are listed below:

ACRO: Throttle cut, snap roll, airbrake HELI: Throttle hold, idle-up

If turning a switch OFF does not stop the mixing warning: When the warning does not stop even when the mixing switch

indicated by the warning display on the screen is turned off, the functions described previously probably use the same

switch and the OFF direction setting is reversed. In short, one of the mixings described above is not in the OFF state. In

this case, reset the warning display by pressing both SELECT BUTTONS simultaneously. Then change one of the switch

settings of the mixings duplicated at one switch.

BACKUP ERROR: Warning sound: 4 beeps (repeated continuously)

The BACKUP ERROR warning occurs when the transmitter memory is lost for any reason. If this occurs, all of the data will

be reset when the power is turned on again.

Do not fly when this message is displayed - all programming has been erased and is not

available. Return your transmitter to Futaba for service.

19

flash

flash

flash

AIRCRAFT (ACRO) MENU FUNCTIONS

Please note that all BASIC menu functions are the same for airplanes (ACRO) and helicopters (H-1/H-2/HR3/HN3/H-3/HE3).

; the helicopter BASIC menu includes additional features (swashplate adjustment and throttle/pitch curves and revo for Normal

20

AIRPLANE (ACRO) FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Map of Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Quick Guide to Setting up a 4-channel Airplane . . . .22

ACRO BASICMENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

MODEL Submenu: MODELSEL. , COPY and NAME . .25

Parameter(PARA.) Submenu: RESET,TYPE,MODUL,

CH5 & CH7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Servo REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

End Point (E. POINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Idle Management: THR-CUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Dual Rates and Exponential ( D/R,EXP ) . . . . . . . . . .34

TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Fail Safe (F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Wing types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

(FLAPRN) Flaperon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

(FL-TRIM) Flap Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

ELEVON (see tail types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Tail types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

ELEVON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

V-TAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

SNAP ROLL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Mixes: definitions and types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

ELE-FLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Air Brake (A.BRAKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

FLP-ELE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

AIL-RUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Prog. Mixes (P-MIX1-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

flight mode) that are discussed in the Helicopter section.

21

(Basic Menu 1)

(Basic Menu 2)

(Basic Menu 3)

Select

(Cursor)

Select

(Cursor)

ACRO Basic Menu

ACRO

ADVANCE

Menu

End

Mode/Page To enter the Basic Menu, press the

Mode key for one second.

( for one second)

(Startup screen)

To return to the Startup screen, press the

End key.

Press Select/Cursor keys to page up and down through the 3 pages of

screens in each menu.

Note FAIL SAFE only shows if the transmitter is set

to transmit in PCM.

Press Mode/Page key to toggle back

and forth between BASIC and

ADVANCE menus.

Mode/Page

Mode/Page Select

End Selection

Cursor Down

Cursor Up

Dial Left

Dial Right

Dial Right or Left

Press Button

Switch Up

Switch at Center

Switch Down

Stick Up

Stick Right

Stick Down

Stick Left

Turn Knob Right

Turn Knob Left

Turn the Dial clockwise or counterclockwise to

highlight function in Menu screen. Then press the

Dial to choose that function.

A QUICK GUIDE: GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC 4-CHANNEL AIRCRAFT

This guide is intended to help you get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, and to give you

some ideas and direction in how to do even more than you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all

programming pages: a big picture overview of what we accomplish; a "by name" description of what we're doing to help acquaint

you with the radio; then a step-by-step instruction to leave out the mystery when setting up your model.

For additional details on each function, see that function's section in this manual. The page numbers are indicated in the

goals column as a convenience to you.

See p.21 for a legend of symbols used.

GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE

Prepare your aircraft. Install all servos, switches, receivers per your model's instructions.

Turn on transmitter then receiver; adjust all linkages so surfaces are nearly centered.

Mechanically adjust all linkages as close as possible to proper control throws.

Check servo direction.

Make notes now of what you will need to change during programming.

22

Name the model.

P. 25.

[Note that you do not need to do

anything to "save" or store this data.

Only critical changes such as a MODEL

RESET require additional keystrokes to

accept the change.]

Reverse servos as needed for proper

control operation.

P. 31.

Adjust Travels as needed to match

model's recommended throws (usually

listed as high rates). P. 32.

Open the BASIC menu, then open the

MODEL submenu.

Go to MODEL NAME.

Input aircraft's name.

Close the MODELsubmenu.

In the BASIC menu, open (servo)

REVERSE.

Choose desired servo and reverse its

direction of travel. (Ex: reversing

rudder servo.)

From BASIC menu, choose END POINT.

Adjust the servo's end points.

(Ex: throttle servo)

Close the function.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

as needed to highlight MODEL.

to choose MODEL.

to NAME.

(First character of model's name is flashed.)

to change first character.

When proper character is displayed,

to move to next character.

Repeat as needed.

to return to BASIC menu.

4 steps to REVERSE.

to choose REVERSE.

to CH4: RUDD.

so REV is selected.

Repeat as needed.

2 steps to END POINT.

to choose END POINT.

to THROTTLE.

THROTTLE STICK.

until carb barrel closes as desired.

THROTTLE STICK.

until throttle arm just opens carb

fully at full THROTTLE STICK.

Repeat for each channel as needed.

With digital trims you don't shut the engine off with THROTTLE TRIM. Let's set up throttle cut (THR-CUT) now.

GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE

23

THR-CUTshuts the engine off completely

with the flip of a switch. P. 33.

Set up dual/triple rates and

exponential (D/R,EXP).

P. 34.

(Note that in the middle of

the screen is the name of the

channel AND the switch position you

are adjusting. Two or even THREE

rates may be set per channel by

simply choosing the desired switch

and programming percentages with

the switch in each of its 2 or 3

positions.)

From the BASIC menu, choose THR-CUT.

Activate, assign SWITCH and adjust.

Close the function.

From the BASIC menu, choose

D/R,EXP.

Choose the desired control, and set the

first (Ex: high) rate throws and

exponential.

to THR-CUT.

to choose THR-CUT.

to OFF. toSW.

to desired switch and position.

(default: A and down position)

to RATE . A to down position.

THROTTLE STICK.

until throttle barrel closes

completely.

to D/R,EXP.

to choose D/R,EXP.

A to up position.

to CH>.

to choose CH>2 (elevator).

to D/R.

to set desired percentage.

to EXP.

to set desired percentage.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE

24

Where next?

Set the second (low) rate throws and

exponential.

Optional: change dual rate switch

assignment. Ex: elevator to switch G

(7CA) or E (7CH) with 3 positions.

A to down position.

to D/R.

Repeat steps above to set low rate.

to SW. toG or E.

G or E to center position.

Repeat steps above to set 3rd rate.

(Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)

TRAINER p. 38.

Multiple wing and/or tail servos: see wing types and tail types, p. 42, 45.

Elevator-to-flap, flap-to-elevator , and other programmable mixes p. 48.

Retractable Gear, Flaps on a Switch, Smoke systems, kill switches,

auxiliary channel (ch5 and ch7) setups. p. 28.

A LOOK AT THE RADIO'S FUNCTIONS STEP BY STEP

MODELsubmenu: includes three functions that manage model memory: MODEL SELECT, MODEL COPY and MODEL NAME.

Since these functions are all related, and are all basic features used with most models, they are together in the MODEL

submenu of the BASIC menu.

MODEL SELECT: This function selects which of the 10 model memories in the

transmitter to set up or fly.

(Each model memory may be of a different model type from the other memories.)

GOAL: STEPS: INPUTS:

NOTE: When you choose a new model in the

MODEL SELECT function, if the new model is set to

the other modulation, you must cycle the transmitter

power to change modulations. If you do not cycle

the power, the modulation type will flash on the

home screen to remind you. You are still

transmitting on the other modulation until you affect

this change.

25

Select Model #3.

NOTE: This is one of several functions

for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Open BASIC menu, then open MODEL

submenu.

Choose Model #3.

Confirm your change.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

if required to MODEL.

to 3.

for 1 second.

sure? displays.

Confirm proper modulation of new

model memory.

Where next?

If PPMor PCMare flashing in the middle of the lower side, then the new model is set

for the other receiver type. Turn the transmitter off/on to change the modulation.

NAME the model: see p. 27.

Change MODELTYPE (aircraft, heli): see p. 28.

Change modulation [FM (PPM) or PCM]: see p. 28.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up TH-CUT for throttle management: see p. 33.

FLASHING

MODEL COPY: copies the current model data into another model memory in the transmitter.

The number of the model memory you are copying from and into is displayed.

Notes:

• Any data in the model copied to will be written over and lost, including name, type and

modulation. It cannot be recovered.

• With the trainer FUNC mode it is not necessary to have the student radio contain the

setup of the aircraft. See TRAINER, p. 38.

Examples:

• Start a new model that is similar to one you have already programmed.

• Copy the current model data into another model memory as a backup or before experimenting with new settings.

• Edit a copy of your modelís data to fly the model in different conditions (i.e. Helicopter using heavier weight blades;

airplane model at extreme altitudes).

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

*Radio shows progress on screen as the model memory is being copied. Note that if the power switch is turned off prior to completion,

the data will not be copied.

26

Copy model 3 into model 5.

NOTE: This is one of several

functions for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Where next?

Open the BASIC menu, then open

MODEL submenu.

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory. (Ex: 3)

Go to MODEL COPY and choose the

model to copy into. (Ex: 5)

Confirm your change.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to MODEL.

If SELECT does not indicate 3,

use MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

to 5.

for 1 second.

sure? displays. *

SELECT the copy you just made: see p. 25.

Rename it (it is currently named exactly the same as the model copied): see p. 25.

MODEL NAME: assigns a name to the current model memory. By giving each model a name that is immediately

recognizable, you can easily comfirm the correct model, and minimize the chance of flying the wrong model memory which

could lead to a crash.

Adjustability and values:

• Up to 6 characters long.

• Each character may be a letter, number, blank, or a symbol.

• The default names assigned by the factory are in MDL-xx format (MDL-01 for

first model memory, etc.)

NOTE: When you COPY one model memory over another, everything is copied, including the model's name. Similarly, if you

change MODEL TYPE or do a MODEL RESET, the entire memory is reset, including MODEL NAME. So the first thing you will want

to do after you COPY a model, change its type, or start from scratch, is rename the new copy to avoid confusion.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

27

Name model 3 "CAP-01" (where

the underline represents a blank

space.)

Where next?

Open MODEL submenu.

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory. (Ex: 3)

Go to NAME and change the first

character. (Ex: M to C)

Choose the next character to change.

Repeat the prior steps to complete

naming the model.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to MODEL.

If SELECTdoes not indicate 3,

perform MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

to C.

to A

Repeat.

Change the MODEL TYPE to helicopter: see p. 28.

Change the receiver modulation setting from PPM to PCM or vice versa: see p. 28.

Utilize servo REVERSE : see p. 31.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT : see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

PARAMETER submenu: sets those parameters you would likely set once, and then not disturb again.

Once you have selected the correct model you wish to work with, the next step is

setting up the proper parameters for this specific model:

• What is the model's type?

• What type is the receiver' s modulation [PPM(FM) or PCM]?

• Assign the desired SW to CH5 and CH7.

First it is important to clear out any old settings in the memory from prior use, using the MODEL RESET.

MODEL RESET: completely resets all data in the individual model you have currently selected. Don't worry - there is no way

you can accidentally delete all models in your radio with this function. Only a service center can completely reset your

radio's entire memory at once. To delete each model in your radio's memory (for example when selling), you must SELECT

each model, reset that memory, then go SELECT the next memory, etc.

Note that when you COPY one model memory into another or change the model's type, you need not delete all existing data

first by using this function. COPY completely overwrites anything in the existing model memory, including MODEL NAME.

The MODEL TYPE function overwrites all data except name and MODUL.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

*Radio shows progress on screen as the model memory is being reset. Note that if the power switch is turned off prior to completion,

the data will not be reset.

28

Reset model memory 1.

NOTE: This is one of several

functions for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Where next?

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory. (Ex: 1)

Open PARAMETER submenu.

Reset the Memory.

Confirm the change.

Close.

On home screen, check model name

and number on top right. If it is not

correct, use MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 3rd page of menu.

to PARAMETER.

for one second.

sure? displays. *

Now that the memory is reset, name has returned to the default (Ex: MDL-01).

NAME the model: p. 25.

COPY a different model into this memory: p. 25.

SELECT a different model to edit or delete: p. 25.

Change the MODEL TYPE to helicopter: see p. 28.

Change the receiver modulation from FM(PPM) to PCM or vice versa: see p. 28.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

MODEL TYPE: sets the type of programming used for this model.

The 7C has 10 model memories, which can each support:

• one powered aircraft (ACRO) memory type (with multiple wing and tail

configurations. See FRAPERON, ELEVON and V-TAIL for further information.);

• six helicopter swashplate types, including CCPM. See Helicopter MODELTYPE

for details, p. 61.

Before doing anything else to set up your aircraft, first you must decide which MODEL TYPE best fits this particular aircraft.

(Each model memory may be set to a different model type.) If your transmitter is a 7CA, the default is ACRO. If it is a 7CH,

the default is H-1.

If you are using a heli MODEL TYPE, please go to that chapter now to select the proper model type and support

your model setup. Note that changing MODEL TYPE resets all data for the model memory, including its name.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

29

Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your

model. Ex: ACRO.

[NOTE: This is one of several functions

that requires confirmation to make a

change. Only critical changes require

additional keystrokes to accept

the change.]

Open the BASIC menu, then open the

PARAMETER submenu.

Go to MODEL TYPE.

Select proper MODEL TYPE.

Ex: ACRO.

Confirm the change. Close PARAMETER.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

then to highlight PARAMETER.

to choose PARAMETER.

to TYPE.

to ACRO. for1second.

sure? displays. to confirm.

to return to BASIC menu.

Modulation select (MODUL): sets the type of modulation transmitted.

The modulation of your receiver will determine whether you utilize PPM or PCM setting in MODUL during transmission.

Note that you have to turn your transmitter off and back on before a modulation change becomes effective. If you choose

PCM, be sure you understand and set the FailSafe (F/S) settings as you intended (see p. 41).

PCM= Pulse Code Modulation PPM= Pulse Position Modulation (also called FM).

Adjustability:

• PCM setting for all Futaba PCM1024 receivers, regardless of number of channels

(ie.R138DP/148DP/149DP, R309DPS);

• PPM setting for all Futaba compatible (negative shift) FM receivers, regardless of

number of channels (ie. R127DF, R123F, R148DF).

• Not compatible with PCM512 receivers such as the R128DP and R105iP.

• Not compatible with other brands of PCM receiver, or positive shift FM receivers

(ie. JR, Airtronics).

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

NOTE: When you change models in MODEL SELECT, if the

new model is set to the other modulation type, you must

cycle the transmitter power to change modulations. The

modulation will flash on the home screen to remind you

until you do so. See p. 25, MODEL SELECT, for details.

30

Change model 1 from FM (PPM) to

PCM

Where next?

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory (Ex: 1)

Open BASIC menu, then open

PARAMETER submenu.

Go to MODUL and change setting.

Close menu and cycle power.

On home screen, check model name and

number on top and the modulation

on bottom. If it is not the correct

model, use MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 3rd page of menu.

to PARAMETER.

to MODUL. toPCM.

PCM flashes on screen

POWER OFF. POWER ON.

Now that the model is in the proper modulation, the 7C should communicate

with the receiver. If it does not, confirm the modulation/frequency of the

receiver. [Futaba receivers ending in F use PPM(ex: R127DF), ending in P use

PCM (ex: R149DP)].

Change MODEL TYPE to helicopter: see p. 28.

Set F/S settings for when PCM receiver sees interference: see p. 41.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

Servo reversing (REVERSE): changes the direction an individual servo responds to a CONTROLSTICK motion.

For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the section on SWASH AFR (p. 63) before reversing any servos.

Except with CCPM helicopters, always complete your servo reversing prior to any

other programming. If you use pre-built ACRO functions that control multiple servos,

such as FLAPERON or V-TAIL, it may be confusing to tell whether the servoneeds to be

reversed or a setting in the function needs to be reversed. See the instructions for each

specialized function for further details.

Always check servo direction prior to every flight as an additional precaution to confirm proper model memory,

hook ups, and radio function.

NOTE: THR-REV is a special function that reverses the entire throttle control, including moving the trim functionality to the

Stick's upper half. To use THR-REV, turn off the transmitter, hold down the MODE and END keys, turn on. CURSOR DOWN to

THR-REV and turn the DIAL to REV. Turn the transmitter off and back on. This change affects all models in the radio.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

31

Reverse the direction of the elevator

servo.

Where next?

Open REVERSE function.

Choose proper channel and set

direction. (Ex: ELE REV)

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to REVERSE.

to ELE.

to REV.

to D.

to PARAMETER.

to CH5-SW.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Change channel 5 to switch D. Open BASIC menu then PARAMETER

submenu.

Go to channel 5 switch assignment.

Change to D.

Close.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

Set up flight timers: see p. 37.

Set up trainer functions: see p. 38.

Auxiliary channel function (CH5 and CH7): defines the relationship between the transmitter

controls and the receiver output for channels 5 and 7.

Adjustability:

• channels 5 and 7 may be assigned to any SWITCH (A-H) or none (null).

(for example, moving flaps to a switch)

• multiple channels may be assigned to the same switch.

• channels set to "NULL" are only controlled by mixes.

Remember that if you assign primary control of a channel to a switch which you later use for other functions (like

dual/triple rates or airbrakes), every time you use that other function you will also be moving the auxiliary channel.

End Point of servo travel adjustment (E.POINT , also called EPA): the most flexible version of travel adjustment

available. It independently adjusts each end of each individual servoís travel, rather than one setting for the servo that

affects both directions. Again, for CCPM helicopters, be sure to see SWASH AFR (see p. 63) prior to adjusting end points.

Adjustability:

• Can set each direction independently.

• Ranges from 0% (no servo movement at all) to 140%. At a 100% setting, the throw of

the servo is approximately 40º for channels 1-4 and approximately 55º for channels 5-8.

• Reducing the percentage settings reduces the total servo throw in that direction.

Examples:

• Adjust the throttle high end to avoid binding at the carburetor, and low end to allow for proper carburetor closure.

• Adjust flap so up travel is only sufficient for straight and level flight trimming, with full down travel.

• END POINT may be adjusted to 0 to keep a servo from moving one direction, such as flaps not intended to also operate

as spoilers.

• Retract servos are not proportional. Changing END POINT will not adjust the servo.

END POINT adjusts only the individual servo. It will have noeffect on any other servo that is operated in conjunction with

this servo via mix or preset programming such as FLAPERON , etc. This is so that each individual servo can be

carefully fine-tuned to avoid binding and other conflicts. To adjust the total travel of a function such as FLAPERON, make

the adjustments in that function's controls. For CCPM helicopters, adjust the total travel of the function, such as collective

pitch, in SWASH AFR.

Adjust the linkage or the END POINT? It is nearly always best to adjust your linkages to get as close as possible prior to

utilizing END POINT. The higher the END POINT setting, the better position accuracy and the more servo power available at

nearly any position (except if using digital servos). Higher END POINT values also mean longer travel time to reach the

desired position, as you are utilizing more of the servo's total travel. (For example, using 50% END POINT would give you

only half the steps of servo travel, meaning every click of trim has twice the effect and the servo gets there in half the time).

• end point (and moving the linkage) = torque, accuracy, but transit time to get there.

• end point (instead of adjusting linkages) = travel time, but torque, accuracy.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

*You can reset to the initial values by pressing the DIAL for one second.

32

Decrease the flap servo throw in the

upward direction to 5% to allow

trimming of level flight only and down

travel to 85% to prevent binding.

Where next?

Open END POINT function.

Choose proper channel and set

direction. (Ex: flap up 5%)

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to END POINT.

to flap.

flap control [default is VR ].

to 5%.*

VR to 85%.

Move auxiliary channels 5 or 7 to different switch(es): see p. 28.

Set up THR-CUT to cut the engine: see p. 33.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

Set up flight timers: see p. 37.

Set up trainer functions: see p. 38.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 43.

Throttle cut (TH-CUT) (ACRO/HELI): provides an easy way to stop the engine by flipping a switch (with THROTTLE STICK

at idle). The movement is largest at idle and disappears at high throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. In HELI, there is an

additional setting, TH-CUT See p. 66.

*Normally, a setting of 10-20% is sufficient. Viewing the carburetor barrel until it fully closes is adequate to get an approximate setting; then test with

engine running to confirm.

33

Engine idle management: THR-CUT: functions which work with the digital THROTTLE TRIM to provide a simple,

consistent means of engine operation. No more fussing with getting trim in just the right spot for landings!

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Decrease the throttle setting (at idle) to

stop the engine with the flip of a switch.

(default: SWITCH A in the down

position)

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open

THR-CUT function.

Activate the function. Choose desired

switch, and the position which

activates the function.

With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust the

rate until the engine consistently shuts

off but throttle linkage is not binding.*

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to THR-CUT.

to ON(OFF).

to SW.

A to down position.

THROTTLE STICK.

to RATE. until shuts off.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 38.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 43.

to select the desired

switch and position.

Dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): assigns adjusted rates and exponential.

Dual/Triple Rates: reduce/increase the servo travel by flipping a switch,

or (ACRO) they can be engaged by any stick position. Dual rates affect the control

listed, such as aileron, not just a single (ex: channel 1) servo. For example, adjusting

aileron dual rate will affect both aileron servos when using FLAPERON, ELEVON, and

a CCPM helicopter.

Activation:

• Any SWITCH, A-H. If you choose a 3-position switch, then that dual rate instantly becomes a triple rate (see example).

• Stick position (ACRO). (Ex: On rudder you normally use only the center 3/4 of the stick movement except

for extreme maneuvers such as snaps/spins/stalls. As long as your RUDDER STICK does not exceed 90% of maximum

throw, the rudder responds at your lower rate, allowing small, gentle corrections. When the stick passes 90% (ie. stall

turn), the rudder goes to high rate' s 90%, which is a MUCH higher amount of travel than your low rate at 89%.)

Ex: EPA = 1" Low Rate = 50% High Rate = 100%

At 89% Low Rate = .45"

At 90% High Rate = .9"

Adjustability:

• Range: 0 - 140% (0 setting would deactivate the control completely.)

Initial value=100%

Exponential: changes the response curve of the servos relative to the stick position to make flying more pleasant. You

can make the servo movement less or more sensitive around neutral for rudder, aileron, elevator, and throttle (except HELI

type - use THROTTLE CURVE instead).

Why use expo? Many models require a large amount of travel to perform their best tricks. However, without exponential,

they are ìtouchyî around neutral, making them unpleasant to fly and making small corrections very dif ficult. Additionally,

by setting different exponentials for each rate, you can make the effectiveness of small corrections similar in each rate, as

in our example below.

The best way to understand exponential is to try it:

• Having made no changes yet in the D/R,EXP screen, move SWITCH D to "down" (toward the AILERON STICK).

• Cursor down to EXP and dial to 100%.

• Move SWITCH D up. Hold the AILERON STICK at 1/4 stick and move SWITCH D down.

• Notice how much less travel there is.

• Go to 3/4 stick and repeat. Notice how the travel is much closer, if not identical.

High Rate

High Rate

High Rate Low Rate

Low Rate

100% 100%

100% 30% 0%

90% 90% 0%

34

Adjustability:

• More sensitive around neutral. (positive exponential, see example)

• Less sensitive around neutral. (negative exponential, see example)

For ACRO throttle, exponential is applied at the low end to help nitro and gasoline engines have a linear throttle response,

so that each 1/4 stick increases engine RPM 25% of the available range. (In most engines this ranges from 5-60%.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

35

Set up dual rates and exponential

in ACRO mode.

Open

Close.

D/R,EXP.

Choose channel and switch position.

Set rate (Ex: high rate = 95%)

Set expo (Ex: expo = -15%)

Set expo (Ex: expo = -15%)

Set 2 expo (Ex: expo = -3%)

Go to 2nd

nd

switch position and set rate

(Ex: low rate 70%)

Optional: if using a 3 position switch,

set 3rd rate.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to D/R,EXP.

to desired channel.

to different position.

to 95%.

to -15%.

to -15%.

to -3%.

to 70%.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Set up dual rates and exponential in

Note: In HELI mode the switch does

not change the rate being adjusted.

Change switch channel and switch

position with mode button.

HELI mode.

Open D/R,EXP.

Choose channel and switch position.

Set rate (Ex: high rate = 95%.)

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to D/R,EXP.

to desired channel and

switch position.

to 95%.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

36

Set up aileron triple rates on SWITCH G

with travel settings of 75% (normal),

25% (slow roll) and 140% (extreme

aerobatics) and exponential settings of

0%, +15%, and -40% respectively.

NOTE: This normal rate has no

exponential so it has a very linear,

normal feel. This slow roll rate has

positive exponential (the opposite of

what most people normally use),

which makes the servos more

responsive around center. This makes

the servos feel the same around center

in the normal and low rates, but still

gives a very slow roll rate at full stick.

The 3D rate (extreme aerobatics) has a

very high distance of travel B nearly

twice that of the normal rate.

Therefore, using a very high negative

exponential setting softens how the

servos respond around center stick.

This makes the servos respond

similarly around center stick for a

more comfortable feel.

Many modelers like to set up all 3

triple rates on a single 3-position

switch, creating a "slow and pretty

mode", a "normal mode", and a "wild

stunts mode" all with the flip of a

single switch. To do so, simply set up

rates for all 3 controls and assign all 3

to the same 3-position switch.

Where next?

Open D/R,EXP function.

Choose the channel to change

(Ex: aileron is already selected)

Optional: change switch assignment.

Confirm switch is in desired position

and set rate. (Ex: up = high rate, 75%).

Move SWITCH to 2nd rate position and

set this particular rate.

(Ex: center = low rate, 25%).

Optional: if using a 3 position

SWITCH, move SWITCH to 3rd position

and set this rate (Ex: down = 3D rate,

140%).

Optional: instead of using a switch,

you can set high rates to be triggered

when the stick moves past a certain

point. To test this, set aileron high

rate to 25%.

Move AILERON STICK

and notice the huge jump in travel

after the stick moves 90% of its

distance.

to the right

Set each rate's EXP.

(Ex: 0%, +15%, -40%)

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to D/R,EXP.

to desired channel.

to G.

G to up position.

G to center position.

G to down position.

You may also change the trigger point

by holding the stick at the desired point,

then pressing and holding the DIAL.

G to up position.

confirm EXP reads 0.

G to down position.

G to center position.

Set up flight timers: see p. 37.

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 38.

Adjust the sensitivity of the trims: see p. 39.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 43.

Set up programmable mixes to meet your specific needs: see p. 53.

Repeat above steps for elevator and rudder.

to 1.

to 75%

to 25%

to 15%

to -40%

to 25%

to 140%

TIMERsubmenu (stopwatch functions): controls an electronic clock used to keep track of time remaining in a competition time

allowed, flying time on a tank of fuel, amount of time on a battery, etc.

Adjustability:

• Count down timer: starts from the chosen time, displays time remaining. If the time is exceeded, it continues to count

below 0.

• Count up timer: starts at 0 and displays the elapsed time up to 99 minutes 59 seconds.

• Independent to each model, and automatically updates with model change.

• In either TIMER mode, the timer beeps once each minute. During the last twenty seconds, there's a beep each two seconds.

During the last ten seconds, there's a beep each second. A long tone is emitted when the time selected is reached.

• To Reset, choose the desired timer with the SELECT key (while at the startup screen), then press and hold DIAL for 1 second.

• Activation by either direction of

• To quickly reset any timer from the home screen, cursor down until the timer blinks. Press dial to reset.

SWITCH A-H, bySTICK (1-4) . THROTTLE STICK is convenient if you are keeping track of

fuel remaining, or for an electric, how much battery is left.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

37

Set timer to count down 4-1/2

minutes, being controlled by

THROTTLE STICK position. This is

utilized to keep track of actual

Throttle on time to better correlate

with fuel/battery usage.

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then

open TIMER function.

Adjust time to 4 min. 30 sec., count down.

Activate the function.

Assign to THROTTLE STICK and set

trigger point (if timer is to trigger

BELOW this throttle point, so

arrow points down).

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to page 3.

to TIMER.

to 4. to 30.

to SW.

to 3(arrow points up).

THROTTLE STICK to desired

position (Ex: 1/4 stick).

for 1 second to set.

Adjust END POINTs after first flight test: see p. 32.

Adjust auxiliary channel assignments: see p. 28.

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 38.

TRAINER: for training novice pilots with optional trainer cord connecting 2 transmitters. The instructor has several levels

of controllability.

Adjustability:

• "N": When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can be

controlled by the student. The set channel is controlled according to any

programming set at the student's transmitter.

• "F": When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can be controlled

by the student, controlled according to any mixing set at the instructor's transmitter.

"-": The channel set to this mode cannot be controlled by the student even when the TRAINER SWITCH is ON. The set

channel is controlled by the instructor only, even when the TRAINER SWITCH is ON.



SWITCH: controlled by spring-loaded SWITCH F (7CA) or H (7CH) only. Not assignable.

• Compatibility: The 7C may be master or student with any Futaba FM transmitter compatible with the cord. Simply

plug the optional trainer cord (For 7C series, sold separately) into the trainer connection on each transmitter, and

follow the guidelines below.

Examples:

• When throttle/collective are set to "F", 5-channel helicopter practice is possible with a 4-channel transmitter.

• Set up the model in a second transmitter, use "N" mode to quickly and safely check proper operation of all

functions, then allow the student radio to fully fly the model.

• Using "N" mode, set lower throws, different exponentials, even different auxiliary channel settings on the student

radio (if it has these features).

• To ease the learning curve, elevator and aileron may be set to the "N" or "F" mode, with the other channels set to

"-" and controlled by the instructor.

Precautions:

• NEVER turn on the student transmitter power.

• ALWAYS set the student transmitter modulation mode to PPM.

• BE SURE that the student and instructor transmitters have identical trim settings and control motions. Verify by

switching back and forth while moving the control sticks.

• FULLY extend the instructor's antenna. Collapse the student's antenna.

• Always remove the student transmitter's RF module (if it is a module-type transmitter).

• When the TRAINER function is active, the snap roll function is deactivated. Other functions, such as THR-CUT,

which have been assigned to the same switch, are notdeactivated. Always double check your function assignments

prior to utilizing the TRAINER function.

• When you select a different model, the TRAINER function is deactivated in the current model for safety reasons.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

38

Turn on the TRAINER system and set

up so student has: fully functional

control of aileron to support

FLAPERON ;

normal control of rudder to allow

lowered travel; and no throttle

channel control (with the instructor

for safety).

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open

TRAINER function.

Activate TRAINER.

Choose desired channel(s) and proper

training type(s).

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to page 3. to TRAINER.

to OFF.

past AIL and ELE (default OK).

to THR,

to RUD,

to "-": OFF.

TEST student radio function fully prior to attempting to fly!

Set student 7C to PPM(required regardless of receiver's modulation): see p. 28.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP) on student 7C: see p. 34.

Reset trims on student 7C: see p. 39.

to "N": NORM.

TRIM submenu: resets and adjusts effectiveness of digital trims.

The 7CA has digital trims which are different from conventional mechanical trim sliders.

Each TRIM LEVER is actually a two-direction switch. Each time the TRIM LEVER is

pressed, the trim is changed a selected amount. When you hold the TRIM LEVER, the trim

speed increases. The current trim position is graphically displayed on the start up screen.

The TRIM submenu includes two functions that are used to manage the trim options.

HELI models only: OFFSET is available in the idle ups. If OFFSET is inhibited, adjustment of the TRIM LEVERS will adjust the

trims for all flight conditions. If OFFSET is active, then moving the trims within any one condition will affect only that

condition. See OFFSET, p. 70.

Trim reset (CLR): electronically centers the trims to their default values. Note that the SUB-TRIM settings and the trim

STEP rate are not reset by this command.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Trim step : changes the rate at which the trim moves when the TRIM LEVER is activated. It may be set from 1 to 40

units, depending on the characteristics of the aircraft. Most ordinary aircraft do well at about 2 to 10 units. Generally larger

trim steps are for models with large control throws or for first flights to ensure sufficient trim to properly correct the model.

Smaller trim steps are later used to allow very fine adjustments in flight.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

39

Reset trims to neutral after having

adjusted all linkages.

NOTE: This is one of several

functions for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open

TRIM submenu.

Request and confirm the reset.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to TRIM.

for 1 second.

Beep sounds.

Adjust SUB-TRIMs: see p. 40.

Adjust trim rate (STEP): see below.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

Double the sensitivity (larger step) of

the AILERON TRIM LEVERS for a first

flight of an aerobatic model to ensure

sufficient range to trim the model for

level flight.

Where next?

Open

Choose the STEP you wish to change.

(Ex: aileron)

TRIM submenu.

Adjust the size of the step. (Ex: incr. to 8)

Repeat as desired for other channels.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to TRIM.

to 8.

to CH1.

to ELEV. tonew setting.

Repeat as needed.

Adjust sub trims: see p. 40.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

.

SUB-TRIM: makes small changes or corrections to the neutral position of each servo. Range is -120 to +120, with 0 setting,

the default, being no SUB-TRIM.

The recommended procedure is as follows:

• measure and record the desired surface position;

• zero out both the trims (TRIM RESETmenu) and the SUB-TRIMs (this menu);

• mount servo arms and linkages so that the control surface' s neutral is as correct as possible; and

• use a small amount of SUB-TRIM to make fine corrections.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

We recommend that you center the digital trims before making SUB-TRIM

changes, and that you try to keep all of the SUB-TRIM values as small as

possible. Otherwise, when the SUB-TRIMs are large values, the servo's

range of travel is restricted on one side.

40

Adjust the flap servo' s SUB-TRIM until

its center exactly matches the aileron

servo's center, as they are to work

together as flaperons.

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open

SUB-TRIM.

Choose the channel to adjust, and

adjust until surfaces match. (Ex: flap)

Repeat for other channels.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to SUB-TRIM.

as needed. to each channel,

as needed.

Adjust trim steps: see p. 39.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

FailSafe (loss of clean signal and low receiver battery) submenu (PCM mode only) (F/S ): sets responses in case of loss

of signal or low Rx battery.

FailSafe (F/S ): instructs a PCM receiver what to do in the event radio interference is received.

Adjustability:

• Each channel may be set independently.

• The NOR (normal) setting holds the servo in its last commanded position.

• The F/S (FailSafe) function moves each servo to a predetermined position.

• NOTE: the setting of the throttle's F/S also applies to the Battery F/S (see below).

Examples:

• The F/S setting is used in certain competitions to spin the aircraft to the ground prior to flying away and doing potential damage

elsewhere. Conversely, may also be used to go to neutral on all servos, hopefully keeping the plane flying as long as possible.

• Competition modelers often maintain the NOR function so that brief interference will not affect their model's maneuver.

• Set the throttle channel so that the engine idles when there is interference (ACRO). This may give enough time to fly away

from and recover from the radio interference and minimize damage if crashed.

• For helicopters, NOR is typically the safest choice.

• We also recommend setting a gasoline engine's electronic kill switch to the OFFposition in the F/S function for safety reasons.

Updating F/S Settings: If you specify a F/S setting, the FailSafe data is automatically transmitted once each two minutes.

When you choose the F/S mode, check that your settings are as desired by turning off the transmitter power switch and

verifying that the servos move to the settings that you chose. Be sure to wait at least two minutes after changing the setting

and turning on the receiver power before turning off the transmitter to confirm your changes have been transmitted.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Battery FailSafe (F/S ): a second battery low warning feature (separate from the transmitter low voltage warning). When

the airborne battery voltage drops below approximately 3.8V, the PCM receiverís battery F/S function moves the throttle

to a predetermined position. When the Battery F/S function is activated, your engine will move to idle (if you haven't set

a position) or a preset position. You should immediately land. You may temporarily reset the Battery F/S function by

moving the THROTTLE STICK to idle. You will have about 30 seconds of throttle control before the battery function

reactivates.

Adjustability:

• NOR F/S setting for throttle results in Battery F/S going to the servo position reached by moving THROTTLE STICK to the

bottom with TRIM LEVER centered;

• POS F/S setting for throttle results in Battery F/S also going to the same throttle servo position as the regular F/S .

If using a 6V (5-cell) receiver battery, it is very likely that your battery will be rapidly running out of charge before

battery FailSafe takes over. It is not a good idea to count on battery Fail Safe to protect your model at any time, but

especially when using a 5-cell battery.

41

Change the receiver FailSafe command

for channel 7 (gasoline engine kill

switch) to a preset position.

NOTE: This is one of several functions

for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Where next?

Open the BASIC menu, then open

F/S function.

Choose Channel to change. (ex: Ch. 8)

Set and confirm fail safe command.

Repeat as desired.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to F/S .

to Ch 7.

that controls channel 7 to desired

OFFposition.

for 1 second to store.

to F/S .

Wait two minutes and confirm F/S settings as described above.

Read below for information on Battery FailSafe.

Adjust END POINTs to gain proper F/S responses if needed: see p. 32.

Adjust SUB-TRIM to gain proper F/S responses if needed: see p. 40.

ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS:

Aircraft wing types (ACRO):

There are 3 basic wing types in aircraft models:

Simple. Model uses one aileron servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness into a single receiver channel) and has a tail.

This is the default setup and requires no specialized wing programming.

Twin Aileron Servos. Model uses 2 aileron servos and has a tail. see Twin Aileron Servos.

Tail-less model (flying wing). Model uses 2 wing servos working together to create both roll and pitch control.

see ELEVON.

Twin Aileron Servos (with a tail) (ACRO): Many current generation models use two aileron servos, plugged into two

separate receiver channels. (If your model is a flying wing without separate elevators, see ELEVON, p. 45.)

Benefits:

Ability to adjust each servo's center and end points for perfectly matched travel.

Redundancy, for example in case of a servo failure or mid-air collision.

Ease of assembly and more torque per surface by not requiring torque rods for a single servo to drive 2 surfaces.

Having more up aileron travel than down travel for straighter rolls ñ aileron differential. (see glossary for definition.)

Using the two ailerons not only as ailerons but also as flaps, in which case they are called flaperons.

Options:

5-channel receiver? Set up AIL-2 (see p. 43) in FLAPERON.

FLAPERON:

Uses CH6 for the second servo (see AIL-2 to use CH5 orCH7.)

Allows flap action as well as aileron action from the ailerons.

Provides FLAP-TRIM function to adjust the neutral point of the flaperons for level flight.

Also allows aileron di

Channel 6 = normal flaperons, 2 servos operate together as flaps;

Channel 5 or 7 = act like aileron differential did in prior radios; channel 6 is still FLAPS, and the 2 ailerons

never act together as flaps EXCEPT in the airbrake function.

fferential in its own programming.

NOTE: Only one of the two wing-type functions (FLAPERON, and ELEVON) can be used at a time. Both functions

cannot be activated simultaneously. To activate a different wing type, the first must be deactivated.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

42

De-activate FLAPERON so that

ELEVON can be activated.

Where next?

Open the FLAPERON function.

De-activate the function.

Close function.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to FLAPERON.

to INH.

Set up ELEVON(see p. 45).

Using FLAPERON (ACRO):

The FLAPERON mixing function uses one servo on each of the two ailerons, and uses them

for both aileron and flap function. For flap effect, the ailerons raise/lower simultaneously.

Of course, aileron function (moving in opposite directions) is also performed.

Once FLAPERON is activated, any time you program CH6 or "Flap" (ie. FLAP-ELEVATOR mixing), the radio commands both

servos to operate as flaps. A trimming feature is also available (see FLAP-TRIM) to adjust both neutral positions together

for straight-and-level flight or slight increases/decreases of the flap angle.

END POINT and SUB-TRIM both still adjust each servo individually.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

*If the FLAPERON function does not activate there is a conflicting mix act such as ELEVON.

43

Activate twin aileron servos, FLAPERON.

Input 10% more up travel than down

travel (aileron differential) within the

FLAPERON programming.

Where next?

Open the FLAPERON function.

Activate the function.

Optional: adjust the aileron

differential.(Ex: +10%)

Optional: If using a 5 channel

receiver, change AIL-2 from CH6

to CH5.

Close menu.

for 1 second. (If basic, again.)

to FLAPERON. *

to +10%.

to CH5.

Set FLAP-TRIM: see p. 44.

Set up AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 52.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com/faq/faq-7c.html

Second aileron servo (AIL-2): The default for the second aileron servo is CH6 and this allows both servos to work

as ailerons and flaps. If CH5 or CH7 is selected the flap function only works CH6, and the two aileron servos

function only as ailerons except in the air brake (A. BRAKE) function. In the air brake function the flap servo CH6

and the aileron servos CH1 and (CH5 or CH7) work together.

FLAP-TRIM allows the flap action to be set in a way that it can be adjusted with the VR

dial. AIRBRAKE will also move the flaps to a specified position via movement of a switch.

The flaps can also be moved with switch using a programmable mix. See offset as master

p.53.

44

Add FLAP-TRIM to allow the model's

ailerons to drop 30% together as flaps

from the VR dial.

The FRAPERON function must be

active with the second servo set to CH6.

*If the FLAP-TRIM is inhibited the flap control defaults to the VR dial. You can use E.POINT to set the travel of the flap if you are using one flap servo.

If you are using flaperons with CH1 and CH6 DO NOT inhibit FLAP-TRIM.

Open FLAP-TRIM.

Set the dial to desired zero flap side.

Set the dial to desired full flap side.

Set flap throw (Ex 30%).

Set the OFS so that the flap will work

for the full range of the dial.

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to

to 30%.

full left.

full right.

FLAP-TRIM.

The function is automatically activated with the FRAPERON.

There are 3 basic tail types in aircraft models:

Simple. Model uses one elevator servo and one rudder servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness). This is the default.

Tail-less model. Model uses 2 wing servos together to create roll and pitch control. see ELEVON. see p. 45.

V-TAIL. Model uses 2 surfaces, at an angle, together to create yaw and pitch control. see V-TAIL. see p. 46.

Note: Only one of the two tail-type functions ( V-TAIL, and ELEVON) can be used at a time.

(See the wing type example on page 42.)

Using ELEVON(ACRO): used with delta wings, flying wings, and other tailless aircraft that combine aileron and

elevator functions, using two servos, one on each elevon. The aileron/elevator travel can be adjusted independently.

This is also popular for ground model use, such as tanks, which drive two motors together for forward, and one motor

forward/one backward for turning. Also aileron differential can be adjusted in this programming.

Adjustability:

• Requires use of CH1 and CH2.

• Independently adjustable aileron/elevator travel.

• Adjustable aileron differential.

NOTE: If ELEVON is active, you cannot activate FLAPERON. You must deactivate the last function to activate ELEVON.

NOTE: Be sure to move the elevator and aileron sticks to full deflection during setup. If large travels are specified, when

the AILERON and ELEVATOR STICKS are moved at the same time the controls may bind or run out of travel.

(For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, such as "space shuttle" style controls, please visit

www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html. Many other setup examples are also available at this location.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

45

Activate ELEVON.

Adjust aileron differential to +10%.

Where next?

Open the ELEVON function.

Activate the function.

Optional: adjust the aileron

differential.

(Ex: +10%. )

Optional: adjust the aileron/elevator

travel as desired.

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to ELEVON.

to +10%.

Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 40 and END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html

(Elevator travel)

(Aileron travel)

Using V-TAIL(ACRO):

V-TAIL mixing is used with v-tail aircraft so that both elevator and rudder functions

are combined for the two tail surfaces. The elevator and rudder travel can be

adjusted independently.

NOTE: If V-TAIL is active, you cannot activate ELEVON functions. If one of these functions is active, an error message will be

displayed and you must deactivate the last function prior to activating ELEVON. See the wing example on page 42.

NOTE: Be sure to move the elevator and rudder sticks regularly while checking the servo motions. If a large value of travel

is specified, when the sticks are moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of travel. Decrease the travel

until no binding occurs.

Adjustability:

Independently adjustable elevator/rudder travels.

CH (2/1 CH): This allows you to utilize V-TAIL function with v-tail aircraft so that elevator and aileron are combined.

Ex: A v-tail polyhedral wing with no ailerons would use this option. The v-tail will have both pitch and roll on the right

stick.

(For details on setting up a complex plane, such as one with a v-tail AND a separate steerable nosewheel, please visit our

FAQ at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html. Many other setup examples are also available at this location.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

46

Activate V-TAIL.

Adjust the elevator/rudder travels

as desired.

Where next?

Open the V-TAIL function.

Activate the function.

optional: adjust the travels separately

as desired.

optional: change the channel from

4 to 1. (If needed.)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to V-TAIL.

(Elevator travel)

(Rudder travel)

to 2/1CH.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32 and SUB-TRIMs: see p. 40.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 34.

Set up ELEV-FLAP mix: see p. 49.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.

Snap Rolls at the flick of a switch (SNAP-ROLL) (ACRO):

This function allows you to execute snap rolls by flipping a switch, providing the

same input every time. It also removes the need to change dual rates on the 3

channels prior to performing a snap, as SNAP-ROLL always takes the servos to the

same position, regardless of dual rates, inputs held during the snap, etc.

Note: Every aircraft snaps differently due to its C.G., control throws, moments, etc.

Some models snap without aileron; others snap on elevator alone. Most models snap

most precisely with a combination of all 3 surfaces. Additionally, rate of speed and

acceleration when using the snap switch will affect how the model snaps. For

information on using gyros with airplanes for cleaner precision maneuvers, such as

snaps and spins without over rotation, see p. 56.

Adjustability:

Travel: Adjust the amount and direction of elevator , aileron and rudder travel.

Range: -120 to +120 on all 3 channels. Default is 100%of range of all 3 channels.

Directions: (up/right, down/right, up/left, down/left).

This snap-roll function is fully adjustable regarding travels and direction on each of the 3 channels.

AIL ELE RUD

Right positive(up) + + +

Right negative(down) + - -

Left positive(up) - + -

Left negative(down) - - +

Note:Always deactivate the TRAINER function prior to activate SNAP-ROLL function.

47

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate SNAP-ROLL. Adjust elevator

travel to 55%, rudder travel to 120% in

the right/up snap.

Where next?

Open the SNAP-ROLL function.

Activate the function.

Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex:

elevator to +55%, rudder to +120%.)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to SNAP-ROLL.

to OFFor ON.

to +55%.

to +120%.

Set up programmable mixes: see p. 53.

View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.

MIXES: the backbone of nearly every function

Mixes are special programs within the radio that command one or more channels to act together with input from only one

source, such as a stick, switch or knob.

There are a variety of types of mixes.

Types:

• Linear: Most mixes are linear. A 100% linear mix tells the slave servo to do exactly what the master servo is doing,

using 100% of the slave channel's range to do so. An example is FLAPERON. When aileron stick is moved, the flap

servo is told to move exactly the same amount. A 50% linear mix would tell the slave servo, for example, to move to

50% of its range when the master' s control is moved 100%.

• Offset: An OFFSET mix is a special type of linear mix. When the mix is turned on (usually a flip of a switch), the slave

servo is moved a set percent of its range. An example of this is AIRBRAKE --- moving flaps, flaperons, and elevator all

to a set position at the flip of a switch. (see p. 52.)

Essentially every feature in the radio' s programming is really a mix, with all assignments/programming set up and ready

to use. Additionally, the7C ACRO and HELI programs provide 3 linear fully-programmable mixes that allow you to

set up special mixes to resolve flight difficulties, activate additional functions, etc.

Let' s look quickly at a few examples that are features we've already covered. This may help to clarify the mix types and

the importance of mixes.

Additional examples:

• Exponential is a preprogrammed curve mix that makes the servosí response more (+) or less (-) sensitive around center

stick (works in conjunction with dual rate, a linear mix that adjusts the total range). see D/R,EXP, p. 34.

• THR-CUT is an OFFSET pre-programmed mix. This tells the throttle servo, when below a certain point, to move toward

idle an additional set percentage to help close the carburetor. See p. 33.

• ELEV-TO-FLAP mixing is a pre-programmed linear mix to move the flaps proportionally to elevator control, helping the

model loop even tighter than it can on elevator alone. (see p. 49.)

Next, we'll get an in-depth look at some pre-programmed mixes (mixes whose channels are predefined by Futaba for

simplicity) we've not covered yet, and last, look at the fully-programmable mix types.

48

ELEV-FLAP mixing (ACRO):

ELEV-FLAP mixing is the first pre-programmed mix we'll cover. This mix makes the

flaps drop or rise whenever the ELEVATOR STICK is moved. It is most commonly used

to make tighter pylon turns or squarer corners in maneuvers. In most cases, the flaps

droop (are lowered) when up elevator is commanded.

Adjustability:

Rate: -100% (full up flap) to +100 (full down flap), with a default of +50% (one-half of the flap range is achieved

when the ELEVATOR STICK is pulled to provide full up elevator.)

Switch: assignable, or null, so mix is always active.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

49

Activate ELEV-FLAP mixing. Adjust

flap travel to 45% flaps.

Set switch assignment to null so the

mix is always active.

Where next?

Open the ELEV-FLAP function.

Activate the function.

Adjust the travels as needed.

(Ex: +45%)

Optional: change SWITCH control. Ex:

change to NULL so flaps only respond

to ELEVATOR STICK input.

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to ELEV-FLAP.

to 45%.

to NULL. (--)

Adjust flaperons' flap travel available ( FLAPERON): see p. 43.

Set up AIRBRAKE: see p. 52.

Set up programmable mixes (ex: FLAP-ELEVATOR): see p. 50.

View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.

FLAP-ELEV mixing (ACRO ):

FLAP-ELEV mixing is a pre-programmed linear mix. This mix makes the elevator

move whenever the flaps are moved. This mix is used to compensate for any

pitching created by the flap.

Adjustability:

Rate: -100% (full up elevator) to +100 (full down elevator), with a default of +50% (one-half of the elevator range is

achieved when the flaps are lowered to full range.)

Offset: offsets the elevator's center relative to the flaps.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate FLAP-ELEV mixing. Adjust

elevator travel to 45%.

Where next?

Open the FLAP-ELEV function.

Activate the function.

Adjust the travels as needed.

(Ex: +45%)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to FLAP-ELEV.

to 45%.

to ON.

View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.

50

AILE-RUDD mixing (ACRO):

AILE-RUDD mixing is a pre-programmed linear mix. This mix is used to mix

rudder operation with aileron operation automatically, to make realistic

coordinated turns. It is especially effective when turning and banking scale

models or large models that resemble full-sized aircraft.

Adjustability:

Rate: -100% to +100, with a default of +50% (one-half of the rudder range is achieved when the AILERON STICK is

pulled to provide full left or right aileron.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

51

Activate AILE-RUDD mixing. Adjust

rudder travel to 45%.

Where next?

Open the AILE-RUDD function.

Activate the function.

Adjust the travels as needed.

(Ex: +45%)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to AILE-RUDD.

to 45%.

View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.

AIRBRAKE mixing(ACRO):

Like FLAPERON, AIRBRAKE is one function that is really made up of a series of pre-programmed mixes all done for you

within the radio. AIRBRAKE simultaneously moves the flap and elevator, and is usually used to make steep descents or

to limit increases in airspeed in dives.

This function is often used even on models without flaps as an easy way to use the flaperons.

Adjustability:

Activation: set positions by flipping SWITCH G.

Provides AIRBRAKE response immediately upon switch movement, going to a pre-set travel on each active channel

without any means of in-flight adjustment.

Channels controlled: Elevator and flap may be set independently in AIRBRAKE , including set to 0 to have no effect.

Note: If using FRAPERON with channel 5 or 7 the AIRBRAKE has separate settings for the aileron servos working

as flaperons and the flap.

52

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Activate AIRBRAKE on a FLAPERON

model. Adjust the flap travel to 50%,

with negative elevator (push) of 10%.

Where next?

Confirm FLAPERON is active.

Open the AIRBRAKEfunction.

Activate the function.

Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex:

Flap 50%, Elevator -10%.)

Close menu.

see FLAPERON instructions.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to AIRBRAKE.

Switch G in up position.

to OFF.

to -10%.

to 50%.

Adjust flaperons' total flap travel available ( FLAPERON): see p. 43.

Set up ELEV-FLAP mixing: see p. 49.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.

PROGRAMMABLE MIXES (PROG.MIX1-3):

Your 7C contains three separate linear programmable mixes.

There are a variety of reasons you might want to use these mixes. A few are listed here.

Sample reasons to use linear programmable mixes:

To correct bad tendencies of the aircraft (such as rolling in response to rudder input).

To automatically correct for a particular action (such as lowering elevator when flaps are lowered).

To operate a second channel in response to movement in a first channel (such as increasing the amount of smoke oil

in response to more throttle application, but only when the smoke switch is active).

To turn off response of a primary control in certain circumstances (such as simulating one engine flaming-out on a

twin, or throttle-assisted rudder turns, also with a twin).

Adjustability:

Defaults : The 3 programmable mixes default to aileron to rudder mixes.

• PROG.MIX1-3 aileron-to-rudder for coordinated turns

Channels available to mix: All three mixes may use any combination of CH1-7.

Offset may also be set to the master channels. (see below.)

Master: the controlling channel. The channel whose movement is followed by the slave channel.

Another channel: Most mixes follow a control channel. (Ex: rudder-to-ailerons, 25%, no switch, corrects roll coupling.)

MASTER SLAVE SWITCH & POSITION RATE OFFSET

RUDD AILE NULL (--) 25% center(default)

MASTER SLAVE SWITCH & POSITION RATE

OFST CH6 A DOWN 20%

Offset as master: To create an OFFSETmix, set the master as OFST. (Ex: move flap 20% of their total

throw when SWITCH A is in down position.)

53










• Slave: the controlled channel. The channel that is moved automatically in response to the movement of the master

channel. The second channel in a mixís name (i.e. aileron-to-rudder).

• On/off choices:

• SWITCH: Any of the positions of any of the 5 switches may be used to activate a mix. Up&Cntr, Cntr&Dn options

allow the mix to be ONin 2 of the 3 positions of a 3-position SWITCH.

• NULL (--): No SWITCH can turn this mix OFF. This mix is active at all times.

• Rate: the percentage of the slave' s range it will move upon maximum input from the master channel. Ex: RUDDERAILERON

mix, 50%. Ail range=1". When rudder is moved full right, ailerons move 1/2".

• Offset: Offsets the slave' s center relative to the master. Ex: Smoke valve opens wider per throttle servo position when

smoke SWITCH is ON. Smoke servo' s neutral is moved down from THROTTLE STICK center to the bottom.

54

MASTER SLAVE SWITCH & POSITION RATE OFFSET

RUDD AILE NULL (--) 50% center(default)

MASTER SLAVE SWITCH & POSITION RATE OFFSET

THRO CH7 E DOWN 0%(Hi) half throttle(default)

100%(Lo)

*Assign the CH7 switch to NULL(--). See p.28.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Other Examples:

RUD-THR(HELI) mix:When right rudder is applied, additional torque is needed from the motor to drive the tail left. Left

rudder requires less torque. A rudder-throttle mix, positive on the left side and negative on the right, adjusts for this.

RUD-ELEV(ACRO) mix: Compensate for pitching up or down when rudder is applied.

ELEV-PIT(HELI) mix: compensate for the loss of lift of tilting the model.

55

Set up a Smoke system:

ON when SWITCH E is in the

down position.

*Adjust the CH7 switch to NULL

prior to this setting. See page. 28.

Where next?

Open an unused programmable mix.

(Ex: use PROG.MIX3.)

Activate the function.

Choose master and slave channels.

Assign SWITCH and position.

(Ex: E DOWN.)

Set rates. (Ex: Lo=100%, Hi=0%.)

Set OFFSET, if needed.

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to PROG.MIX3.

to E DOWN.

to CH3.

THROTTLE STICK past center.

THROTTLE STICK past center.

Stick to desired point.

for 1 second to set.

View numerous additional mix setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.

to CH7.

to +100%.

to 0%.

Special Additions, Functions, And Added Equipment Commonly Used On Powered Aircraft

Gyros: Just as torque rotates an aircraft on the runway during take-off, helicopters struggle with torque twisting the model

every time throttle is applied. For many years gyroscopes have been used on model helicopters to control this. In

competition aerobatics and scale aircraft competition alike, the usefulness of gyros has recently come to light. For in-depth

information on gyro types, please see p. 72.

For aerobatics, gyros on rudder and elevator fix over-rotation of snaps and spins as well as tail wagging in stall turns. (Futaba

offers a twin-axis gyro, GYA-352, that controls two axes with a single gyro.) For 3D aerobatics (below stall speed, such as torque

rolls), heading-hold/AVCS gyros on rudder and elevator dramatically simplify these maneuvers. For scale models, gyros are

frequently used to simplify take-offs and landings by keeping the model straight during throttle application.

Always be careful if using a heading-hold/AVCS gyro, as it will correct any change in yaw that is not caused by

movement of the rudder (like making a turn with just aileron and elevator). Typically, modelers use headinghold/

AVCS settings only for specific maneuvers, such as take-offs and torque rolls, then switch to normal mode or

OFF for the remainder of the flight to avoid this risk.

While the 7C's ACRO programming does not offer gyro-specific programming, simply adjusting the END POINTs of

the channel that is used to control the gyro' s gain will adjust the gyro's performance in flight. For details on gain and other

gyro functions, please see the HELI GYRO programming, p. 72.

Retracts: Retractable landing gear is often used on scale models for increased realism and on high performance models to

decrease drag. The gear servo is typically plugged into CH5, which defaults to a 2-position switch for simplicity.

Mechanical retracts require the use of a specialized non-proportional retract servo. Retract servos go from full

travel one direction to full travel the other direction, then mechanically hold the gear into the locked position. A

regular servo used for mechanical retracts will continue to draw full power the entire time, prematurely draining

the battery and risking crash of your model. End point will not adjust a retract servo.

Pneumatic (air driven) retracts use a standard servo to control an air valve which directs air into or out of the retract units,

moving the gear up or down. Pneumatics are easier to install but require added maintenance of the air system.

Gear Doors: Some scale models with retracts also have separate gear doors to cover the scale gear. For one example of

how to operate the gear doors separately from the retracts, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.

Smoke Systems: Many scale and aerobatic models use smoke systems to provide increased realism or a more impressive

demonstration. There are many smoke systems available, with varying types of control. Most use a servo to increase/decrease the

flow of smoke fluid into the specialized smoke muffler. The oil is heated in the muffler, creating smoke.

It is a good practice to set up a "safety" that shuts off the smoke oil if the throttle is lowered below half-stick. For a detailed

example of a smoke system setup, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.

Kill Switches: For safety reasons, it is strongly recommended that an electronic kill switch be installed in all gasolinepowered

aircraft. In case of any type of in-flight problem (such as prop failure, exhaust vibrating off, throttle servo failure,

radio interference), the modeler can shut the engine off quickly and safely in flight. Additionally, FailSafe (F/S ) settings

are recommended to shut the engine off in case of sufficient interference to trigger the PCM FailSafe settings.

Lastly, an electronic kill switch set to "off" prior to the aircraft's power being shut off adds an additional safety should

someone accidentally turn on the mechanical kill switch on the exterior of the model.

Bomb Drops, Paratroopers, and other Released Items: Many sport and scale models include one or more of these fun

add-ons. Typically, all are controlled by a simple micro-switch plugged into CH7. The switch is assigned in PARAMETER.

56

HELICOPTER MODEL FUNCTIONS

Please note that nearly all of the BASIC menu functions are the same for airplane (ACROsetup)

and helicopter (H-1/H-2/HR3/HN3/H-3/HE3) setups. The features that are identical refer back to the ACRO chapter.

The Helicopter BASIC menu includes the normal conditionís throttle and collective pitch curves and revo. mixing.

(idle-ups and throttle hold are advanced features and are in the ADVANCE menu).

Helicopter Setup Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 58.

HELI (H-1/H-2/HR3/HN3/H-3/HE3) BASIC MENU

MODEL SUBMENU:

MODEL SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 25.

MODEL COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 26.

MODEL NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 27.

PARAMETER SUBMENU:

MODEL RESET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 28.

MODEL TYPE: Information specific to HELI models, including CCPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 61.

MODUL(Modulation, PPM or PCM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 30.

CH5, CH7 (Auxiliary Channel assignment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 31.

REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 31.

SWASH AFR(swashplate control direction and travel correction) (not in H-1) .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 63.

END POINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 32.

Setting Up the NORMAL Condition: (TH-CV/NOR, PI-CV/NOR, REVO./NOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 65.

THR-CUT(specialized settings for helicopter specific models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 66.

D/R,EXP (Specialized settings for helicopter specific models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 34.

TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 37.

TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 38.

TRIMSUBMENU:

RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 39.

STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 39.

SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 40.

F/S FAILSAFE (loss of clean signal and low receiver battery) SUBMENU (PCM mode only):

F/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 41.

Battery Fail Safe (F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 41.

HELI (H-1/H-2/HR3/HN3/H-3/HE3) ADVANCE MENU

THROTTLE HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 67.

THR-CURVE,PIT-CURVE, and REVO. MIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 68.

IDLE-UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 69.

TRIMS/OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 70.

HOVERING SETUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 71.

GYROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 72.

Mixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 48.

PROG.MIX1-3(Linear Programmable mixes, default to AIL-RUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 53.

57













GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC HELICOPTER

This guideline is intended to help you set up a basic ( H-1 ) heli, to get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start

on using your new radio, and to give you some ideas and direction on how to do even more with this powerful system than

you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages: a big picture overview of what

we're trying to accomplish; a "by name" description of the steps to help acquaint you with the radio; and then a step-bystep

instruction to leave out the mystery and challenge of setting up your model.

Briefly, the typical helicopter' s controls are as follows:

Aileron: changes cyclic lateral (roll) . Rolls the helicopter. Tilts the swashplate to the left or right. CH1.

Elevator: changes cyclic pitch. Changes the helicopter' s angle of attack (nose up or nose down). Tilts the entire

swashplate fore and aft. CH2.

Rudder: changes the angle of the tail rotor. Yaws the helicopter left or right. CH4.

Collective Pitch: adjusts main rotor collective [angle of the paddles], changing the main blades' pitch. Increased collective

pitch (with throttle) causes the helicopter to rise. Moves in conjunction with throttle on the THROTTLE STICK. CH6.

Throttle: opens/closes carburetor. Moves in conjunction with collective pitch on the THROTTLE STICK. CH3.

REVO: mix that adds rudder in conjunction with pitch. This helps compensate for rotation of the helicopter caused by

the increased engine torque. (Never use revo. mixing with a heading-hold/AVCS gyro which is in headinghold/

AVCS mode. However, revo. mixing is still used when a heading-hold/AVCS gyro is in normal mode.)

For additional details, see that function's section in this manual. The page numbers are indicated in the first column for you.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

58

Prepare your helicopter.

Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your

model. Ex: HELI ( H-1) . See p. 61.

[NOTE: This is one of several

functions for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change. Only

critical changes require additional

keystrokes to accept the change.]

(If the correct model type was already

displayed, be sure to do a model reset

to discard any unwanted settings.)

Then, NAMEthe model. P. 25.

(You do not need to do anything to

"save" or stor e this data.)

In the BASIC menu, open the

PARAMETER submenu.

Go to MODEL TYPE.

Select proper MODEL TYPE.

Ex: H-1.

Confirm the change. Close PARAMETER.

In the BASIC menu, open the MODEL

submenu.

Go to MODEL NAME.

Input aircraft's name.

Close the MODEL submenu when done.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

to highlight PARAMETER.

to choose PARAMETER.

to TYPE.

to H-1. for1second.

sure? displays. to confirm.

to return to BASIC menu.

as needed to highlight MODEL.

to choose MODEL.

(First character of model's

name is highlighted.)

to change first character.

When proper character is displayed,

to move to next character. Repeat.

to return to BASIC menu.

Install all servos, switches, receiver per your model's instructions. Set all trims

and dials to neutral.

Confirm all control linkages are 90 degrees (or per instructions) from the servo

horn to the ball link for proper geometry and that no slop is present.

Mechanically adjust all linkages to get as close as possible to proper control

throws and minimize binding prior to radio set up.







59

Reverse servos as needed for proper

control operation. Ex: LEFT RUDDER

STICK results in leading edge of tail

rotor blades moving left. Reverse to

operate properly. P. 31.

Adjust Travels as needed to match

model's recommended throws (usually

listed as high rates).

P. 32.

Activate THR-CUT. P. 66.

Set up throttle curve for normal.2

(Usually changes will not need to be

made prior to first flight.) P. 65.

Set up collective pitch curve for

normal as base of -4, center of +5,

end of +8 to +10 degrees of blade

pitch for aerobatics.2 (If just learning

to fly, ask your instructor.) P. 65.

Set up revo. mixing for normal. (For

heading-hold gyros, inhibit revo.) P. 65.

Confirm Gyro direction. (Note: if

using a heading-hold/AVCS gyro, use

the GYRO programming for proper

setup. See p. 72.)

In the BASIC menu, open REVERSE.

Choose desired servo and reverse its

direction of travel.

(Ex: reverse rudder servo.)

In the BASIC menu, choose

END POINT.

Adjust the servo's end points.

(Ex: flap servo)

Return to BASIC menu.

Open THR-CUT function.

Activate the function. Choose desired

switch and position to activate.

With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust the

rate until the engine consistently shuts

off, but throttle linkage is not binding.1

Close.

Open the THR-CV/NOR function.

Adjust if needed. Close the function.

Open the PIT-CV/NOR function.

Adjust each point to match desired

curve. (Ex first point: 89%.)

Close the function.

Open the REVO-MIX function. Adjust to

your desired starting point. (Ex: 10%.)

Close the function.

to REVERSE.

to choose REVERSE.

to CH4: RUDD.

so REV is selected.

Repeat as needed.

to END POINT.

to choose END POINT.

to

to OFF.

ELEV.

ELEVATOR STICK.

until up travel is as desired.

ELEVATOR STICK.

until down travel is as desired.

Repeat as needed.

to THR-CUT.

to SW.

to A-DOWN.

A to down position.

THROTTLE STICK.

to RATE.

to THR-CV/NOR.

to 95%. tonext point. Repeat.

to PIT-CV/NOR.

to 89%. tonext point. Repeat.

to REVO-MIX.

to 10%.

to 15%.

With radio on, move helicopter' s tail to the right by hand.

The gyro should give right rudder input (leading edge of the tail rotor blades

move left).

If the gyro gives the opposite input, reverse direction on the gyro unit itself.

until shuts off.

to ON.

1 Periodically move the throttle stick to full and back down to ensure proper servo settings.

2 It is critical that dials VR be centered when the pitch and throttle curves are setup.

60

Be sure to follow your model's instructions for preflight checks, blade tracking, etc. Never assume a set of blades is

properly balanced and will track without checking.

Check receiver battery voltage! Always check voltage with a voltmeter prior to each and every engine start.

(Never assume being plugged in all night means your radio gear is ready to fly). Insufficient charge, binding servo linkages,

and other problems can result in a dangerous crash with the possibility of injury to yourself, others and property.

Confirm the swashplate is level at 0 travel. Adjust arms if needed.

Apply full collective and check that the swashplate remained level and there is no binding. Repeat for full cyclic pitch and

roll. If not, adjust as needed to correct in END POINT: see p. 32.

Important note: prior to setting up throttle hold, idle-ups, offsets, etc., be sure to get your normal condition operating properly.

Where next?(Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)

THROTTLE HOLD: P. 67.

SUB-TRIM p. 40 and separate trims for conditions (OFFSETS): p. 70.

IDLE-UP p. 69.

Rudder-to-throttle and other programmable mixes p. 53.

Checking setup prior to going airborne: Check voltage! Then, with the assistance of an instructor, and having completed

all range checks, etc, gradually apply throttle until the helicopter becomes "light on the skids." Adjust trims as needed to

correct for any roll, pitch, or yaw tendencies. If the tail "wags," the gyro gain is too high. Decrease gyro gain.

HELI-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS

MODEL TYPE: This function of the PARAMETER submenu is used to select the type of model programming to be used.

Before doing anything else to set up your model, first you must decide which MODEL TYPE best fits your aircraft. If

your transmitter is a 7CA, the default is ACRO. If it is a 7CH, the default is HELI(H-1).

HELICOPTER SWASHPLATE TYPES:

The 7C radios support 6 basic swashplate setups, including "single servo" (H- 1 - most helicopters use this type) and 5

types of CCPM (cyclic and collective pitch mixing). A "single servo" swashplate uses one servo for each axis: aileron,

elevator (cyclic pitch), and collective pitch. CCPM helicopters utilize a combination of servos working together to achieve

the 3 axes of motion. There are 5 basic CCPM types, displayed below. CCPM has several advantages, the most obvious

of which is far less mechanical complexity to properly move the swashplate of the helicopter. Additionally, several servos

working in unison (ex: HR3, all 3 servos together create elevator movement) dramatically increases the torque available as

well as the precision and centering.

Please note that some helicopters are type HR3 or HN3, except off by 180 degrees. For example, the Kyosho® Caliber™ is

HR3 but with the 2 parallel servos to the rear of the helicopter, not front. If your model's swashplate is off by 180 degrees,

you will still use that swashplate type, but also use SWASH AFR (p.63) to adjust the functions as needed until it operates

properly. Additionally, different angles of CCPM may also be created utilizing the fully assignable programmable mixes.

(See our Frequently Asked Questions area at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html for specific examples.)

Not operating quite like you expected? In many CCPM installations you need to either reverse the direction of a specific

function (SWASH AFR) or reverse a single servo's direction (REVERSE). See SWASH AFR for details.(p.63)

Swashplate Type Setting Procedure

HELI H-1 Type : Independent aileron, pitch and elevator servos linked to the

swashplate. Most kits are HELI H-1 type.

HELI H-2 Type : pushrods positioned as shown. Elevator operates with a mechanical

linkage. With Aileron inputs, the aileron and pitch servos tilt the swashplate left and

right; with Pitch inputs, the aileron and pitch servos raise the swashplate up and down.

HELI HE3 Type : pushrods positioned as shown. With Aileron inputs, the aileron and

pitch servos tilt the swashplate left and right; with Elevator inputs, the servos tilt the

swashplate fore and aft; with Pitch inputs, all four servos raise the swashplate up and down.

HELI HR3 Type: pushrods positioned as shown. With Aileron inputs, the aileron and

pitch servos tilt the swashplate left and right; with Elevator inputs, the three servos tilt

the swashplate fore and aft; with Pitch inputs, all three servos raise the swashplate up

and down.

HELI HN3 Type: pushrods positioned as shown. With Aileron inputs, the three servos

tilt the swashplate left and right; with Elevator inputs, the elevator and pitch servos tilt

the swashplate fore and aft; with Pitch inputs, all three servos raise the swashplate up

and down.

Pitch Aileron

Front

Aileron Pitch

Front

(Pitch) (Aileron)

Elevator

Aileron

(Pitch)

Pitch

(Aileron)

Front

Elevator

120

120 120

HELI H-3 Type : pushrods positioned as shown. Fundamentally, the servo operations

of H-3 type are almost same as HR3 type.

However, the servo arrangement about elevator operation differs.

Aileron

(Pitch)

Pitch

1:1

(Aileron)

Front

Elevator

Aileron

Pitch

Front

Elevator

120

120

120

61

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Note: Radio shows progress on screen as the model memory is being copied and beeps once upon completion. If the power switch is turned off prior

to completion, the data will not be changed.

62

Change the MODEL TYPE of model #3

from aircraft to 120 degree CCPM with 2

servos working in unison for collective

pitch and aileron [HELI(HR3)].

Where next?

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory. (example: 3)

Open PARAMETER submenu.

Change to the desired MODEL

TYPE(example, HR3.)

Confirm the change.

Close.

On home screen, check model name

and # on top left and right.

If it is not the correct model (example:

3), see MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

to PARAMETER.

to HR3.

for one second.

"sure?" displays. to confirm.

If a single servo is not operating properly, REVERSE: see p. 31.

If a control is operating backwards (i.e. Elevator), see SWASH AFR, p. 63.

If unsure see SWASH AFR.

SWASH AFR [HELI(H-2/HE3/HR3/H-3/HN3)only]:

Swashplate function rate settings (SWASH AFR) reduce/increase/reverse the rate (travel)

of the aileron, elevator (except H-2 ) and collective pitch functions, adjusting or

reversing the motion of all servos involved in that function, only when using that

function. Since these types utilize multiple servos together to create the controls, simply

adjusting a servo' s REVERSE or END POINT would not properly correct the travel of any

one control. Since H-1uses one servo for each function, there is no need for AFR in H-1.

This is fairly hard to explain but easy to see, so let' s set up Kyosho Caliber' s swashplate settings as an example. With

everything installed per factory instructions, set the model to HELI(HR3). Now let' s adjust the swashplate properly.

Since aileron always uses no more than 2 servos, check it first. Either both operate properly (no change needed), both

operate backwards (reverse the whole function), or one servo operates backwards (reverse that servo alone).

Next check elevator. Remember, the aileron servo(s) operate correctly, so if elevator does not, we should only have 2

choices left - the whole function needs to be reversed, or the servo(s) not shared with aileron need to be reversed.

Last is collective. If aileron and elevator are working properly, the only thing that could be wrong is the whole direction

collective operates (reverse the whole function). In our example, HR3 is 180 degrees off from the swashplate of the Caliber.

The collective pitch operation is backwards; but reversing all three servos would also reverse the aileron and elevator

operations. Changing the collective pitch rate, however, from +50% to -50%, will reverse the collective pitch without

affecting the aileron action.

63

CHECKING FOR PROPER MOTION ON AN HR3 SWASHPLATE

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

64

Adjust the travel of the collective pitch

from +50% to -23%, reversing the

travel of all 3 servos and decreasing

their travel in collective pitch only, on

an HR3 MODEL TYPE.

Where next?

Open SWASH AFR function.

Adjust PIT travel to -23 .

Close the menu.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

to SWASH

to -23%.

Confirm the swashplate is level at 0 travel. Adjust arms if needed.

Apply full collective and check that the swashplate remained level. If not, adjust

servo's travels as needed to correct. END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up the normal condition: (TH-CV/NOR, PI-CV/NOR, REVO./NOR): see p. 65.

Set up D/R,EXP: see p. 34.

HR3 Swash Type

AILERON STICK.

ELEVATOR STICK.

RUDDER STICK.

THROTTLE STICK.

PROPER MOTION

Swashplate tilts right.

Front of swash plate moves

down; back of swashplate

moves up.

The leading edges of tail

blades rotate left.

Entire Swashplate lifts.

WRONG MOTION

Swashplate tilts left.

Back of Swashplate moves up.

Back of Swashplate moves

down.

Swashplate moves the

opposite.

Entire swashplate moves up.

Blades rotated right.

Swashplate lowers.

HOW TO FIX

Reverse AIL setting in

SWASH to -50%.

Ch6 servo moves

incorrectly; REVERSE.

Ch1 servo moves

incorrectly; REVERSE.

Reverse ELE setting in SWASH.

(ex: +50 to -50 )

Ch2 servo moves

incorrectly; REVERSE.

REVERSE the rudder servo.

Reverse PIT setting in SWASH.

Setting up the Normal Flight Condition: The Normal flight condition is typically utilized for hovering. The throttle and

collective pitch curves are adjusted to provide consistent engine RPM despite the increase/decrease in collective pitch of

the blades. This keeps the engine from "bogging down" under excessive load (like trying to accelerate a car on a steep hill

in 5th gear) or excessive RPM under insufficient load (like flooring the throttle while in neutral), risking engine damage.

As the 2 curves and revo. mixing are all interrelated, we will discuss all three first, then complete a sample setup.

Note that the normal throttle and pitch curves and revo mix are all available in the BASIC menu for simplicity. These may also be

updated later in the ADVANCE menu with the settings for the other 3 conditions [idle-up 1 (IDL1), idle-up 2 (IDL2) and throttle

hold (HOLD)]. Note: The throttle and pitch curves for the normal condition are always on. They cannot be inhibited. The

other three conditions are activated with their throttle curves or throttle hold. For idle-ups, see p. 69. For throttle hold, see p. 67.

TH-CV/NOR: inputs the normal (NORM) throttle curve, which is usually not a linear response to THROTTLE STICK motion.

Adjusting point 3 of the curve adjusts the engine's RPM at the THROTTLE STICK midpoint - the desired position for

hovering. The other 4 points are then adjusted to create the desired idle and maximum engine speed, and a smooth

transition in-between. For more on throttle curves, see p. 69.

PI-CV/NOR: inputs the normal (NORM) collective pitch curve, the collective pitch curve for flight near hover. The

normal collective pitch curve is adjusted to match the throttle curve, providing the best vertical performance at a

constant engine speed, with a starting curve of -4 base, +5 neutral, and +8 to +10 degrees of blade pitch maximum*.

You can program the response over a 5-point curve for the best collective pitch angle relative to THROTTLE STICK

movement. For more on collective pitch curves, see p. 69.

REVO.: mixes collective pitch commands to the rudder (a PITCH-RUDDER mix) to suppress the torque generated by

changes in the main rotor's collective pitch angle, keeping the model from yawing when throttle is applied. REVO.

is extremely helpful in "taming the tail" of models not using heading-hold/AVCS gyros. Never use revo. mixing

in conjunction with a heading-hold/AVCS gyro while in heading-hold/AVCS mode.

Revo. mixing is still used with these gyros while set to the normal mode. For details on revo, including default points

for clockwise and counterclockwise rotating rotors, see p. 69.

*These default recommendations assume you are doing forward flight. If you are just learning, please follow your instructor' s guidance. Some

instructors like a +1 base point for training so that the helicopter comes down very slowly, even if your instincts pull the throttle/collective stick to

the bottom in a hurry.

65

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

THROTTLE CUT: The THR-CUT function is used to kill the engine at the end of a flight. The engine can be stopped with

one touch of any switch, eliminating the need to move the trim to kill the engine and then readjust prior to each flight. The

helicopter THR-CUT includes an ON/OFF throttle position (normally a little above idle). You must move the THROTTLE

STICK back below the set point before the THR-CUT function can be reset, to avoid sudden engine acceleration. For a detailed

example of throttle cut setup, see ACROp. 33.

Note: Be sure to add the step of setting a trigger point by cursoring to THR, then putting the

THROTTLE STICK in the desired position and pressing and holding the dial for one second.

Notice that this function cannot be reversed to trigger only above the stick point.

66

Set up Normal Flight Condition

Throttle/Collective Pitch Curves

and Revo.

Base point: Adjust base point of

throttle curve until engine idles

reliably on ground. Adjust base point

of collective pitch curve to achieve -4

degrees of blade pitch.

Apply throttle until the model sits

"light" on its skids. Adjust base point

of REVO. until model does not rotate

its nose at all.

Hover point: Adjust collective pitch curve

to +5 degrees. Ease heli into a hover.

Land/shut engine off. Adjust throttle

curves and rudder trim. Repeat until

model hovers smoothly at half throttle.

Rapidly apply throttle from 1/4 to 1/2

stick. Adjust REVO. points 2 and 3

until the model does not rotate its

nose upon throttle application.

High point: Adjust collective pitch

curve to +8 to +10 degrees. From

hover, throttle up rapidly. If engine

bogs, increase the throttle curve. If

engine over-revs, increase the

collective pitch curve at points 4 or 5.

Apply full throttle while hovering, then

descend back to hover. Adjust REVO.

until the nose does not change heading.

Where next?

Open the THR-CV/NOR function.

Adjust the first point. (Ex: 5%.)

Open the PIT-CV/NOR function.

Adjust the first point. (Ex: 8%.)

Open the REVO. function.

(Ex: High 5%, Low 10%.)

Adjust THR-CV/NOR.

Adjust PIT-CV/NOR.

Adjust THR-CV/NOR.

Adjust PIT-CV/NOR.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

to THR-CV/NOR.

to 5%.

to PIT-CV/NOR.

to 8%.

to REVO.

to 5%.

Repeat above as needed.

Repeat above as needed.

Repeat above as needed.

Repeat above as needed.

to 10%.

GYRO function: see p. 72.

Adjust HOV-THR and HOV-PIT if needed: see p. 71.

Setting up Throttle Hold: see p. 67.

Setting up idle-ups 1 and 2: Throttle and collective pitch curves and revo.

mixing (TH-CURVE, PI-CURVE, REVO. MIX): see p. 69.

D/R,EXP: see p. 34.

HELI-SPECIFIC ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS

THR-HOLD: This function holds the engine in the idling position and disengages it from the THROTTLE STICK when SWITCH

E (7CH) or G (7CA) is moved. It is commonly used to practice auto-rotation.

Prior to setting up THR-HOLD, hook up the throttle linkage so that the carburetor is

opened fully at high throttle, then use the digital trim to adjust the engine idle

position. To have THR- HOLD maintain idle, move the THROTTLE STICK to the idle

position, then move the hold SWITCH on and off and keep changing the offset value

until the servo does not move. To lower the engine idle speed, or if you want to shut

off, input a more negative number.

Adjustability:

Idling position: Range of -50% to +50%centered about the throttle idle position to get the desired engine RPM.

Rudder offset: Offsets the tail rotor pitch. Keeps the fuselage from rotating in throttle hold.

Switch assignment: Assigned to SWITCH G (7CA) or E (7CH) down. Not adjustable.

Throttle curve: Since the throttle is moved to a single preset position, no curve is available for THR-HOLD.

Collective pitch curve: Independent curve, typically adjusted to create a blade pitch range of -4° to +6° to +12°, is

automatically activated with THR-HOLD.

Revo. mix: Since revo. mix adjusts for torque from the engine, no revo. mix is available for THR-HOLD.

Priority: The throttle hold function has priority over idle-up. Be sure that the throttle hold and idle-up SWITCHES are in the

desired positions before trying to start the engine. (We recommend starting your engine in throttle hold for safety reasons.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

67

Set up throttle hold.

Determine desired throttle position by

idling engine, turn on THR-HOLD, and

adjust percentage as required to reach

the desired running point.

Where next?

Open THR-HOLD function.

Activate the function.

Set desired engine position.

Optional: set up a rudder offset.

Close.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to THR-HOLD.

to OFF.

to desired percent.

to OFF. todesired offset.

PIT-CURVE for THR-HOLD: see p. 69.

GYRO setup: see p. 72.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing

(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING) for idle-ups: see p. 69.

D/R,EXP: see p. 34.

THR-CURVE and PIT-CURVE: These 5-point curves are utilized to best match the blade collective pitch to the engine RPM for

consistent load on the engine. Curves are separately adjustable for normal, idle-up 1 and idle-up 2. In addition,

a separate collective pitch curve is available for throttle hold. Sample curves are displayed in the appropriate setup types

(ex: normal flight condition, p. 65) for clarity.

Suggested defaults:

Normal: Collective pitch curve that results in points 1, 3 and 5 providing -4, +5, (+8 to +10)* degrees pitch. A throttle

curve setting of 0, 30, 50, 70, 100%.

Idle-up 1: Idle-ups 1 is typically the same except for the gyro settings, with heading-hold/AVCS mode.

The pitch curve will likely be similar to the normal curve above.

Idle-up 2: Collective pitch curve that results in points 1, 3 and 5 providing (-8 to -10), 0, (+8 to +10) degrees. A

throttle curve of 100, 75, 50, 75, 100 to provide full throttle for inverted maneuvers.

Throttle Hold pitch curve: Start with the normal pitch curve (for inverted autos, start from the idle-up 2 pitch curve), but

increase the last point approximately 1-2°, if available, to ensure sufficient pitch at landing.

*(These default recommendations assume you are doing forward flight. If you are just learning, please follow your instructor' s guidance. Some

instructors like a +1 base point for training so that the helicopter comes down very slowly, even if your instincts pull the throttle/collective stick to

the bottom in a hurry.)

Adjustability:

Normal condition curves are editable in the BASIC menu for convenience.

All curves may be adjusted in the ADVANCE menu.

Automatically selected with the proper condition.

The idle-up curves are adjusted by the modeler to maintain constant RPM even when the collective pitch is reduced

during flight (including inverted).

To change which condition's curve is being edited, simply press the MODE/PAGE BUTTON to scroll through the curves

available, or cursor up above point 1 and change the curve named.

For clarity, the name of the condition currently active (switched on in the radio) is shown in parentheses behind name

of condition whose curve is being edited.

Idle-ups and throttle hold pitch curves may be edited even before the conditions have been made active or while they

are active but not selected.

REVO. MIX: This linear curve mix adds opposite rudder input to counteract the changes in torque when the speed and

collective pitch of the blades is changed.

Adjustability:

REVO.MIX: normal for hovering and idle-ups (1 and 2) combined.

REVO.MIX is editable in the BASIC and ADVANCE menu.

68

Revo. mixing rates are linear curves. For a clockwise-turning rotor, the rudder is mixed in the clockwise direction

when collective pitch is increased; for counterclockwise-turning, the opposite. Change the operating direction setting

by changing the signs of the numbers in the curve from plus (+) to minus (-) and vice versa.

Revo. curves for idle-ups are often v-shaped to provide proper rudder input with negative pitch and increased throttle

during inverted flight. (Rudder is needed to counter the reaction whenever there is increased torque. In inverted flight,

throttle stick below half has increased throttle and negative pitch, therefore increasing torque and rotating the

helicopter unless the revo. mix is also increasing appropriately.)

IDLE-UPS: additional flight conditions available specifically for helicopters. These additional flight conditions contain

different throttle curves, collective pitch curves, and trims to make the helicopter perform

certain maneuvers more easily. Lastly, the gyro and dual rate functions may be set to provide separate rates per condition

selected, including one for each idle-up.

One of the most common flight conditions can easily flip from upright to inverted and back. To do so, the pitch curve is

set to 0 pitch at half stick, positive pitch (climb upright) above half, and negative pitch (climb when inverted) below half

stick. The throttle curve is adjusted to allow the engine to run consistently throughout the changes in pitch.

Additional idle-ups may be used to maximize the helicopter' s flight characteristics in certain types of flight (i.e. fast

forward motion, backward) or maneuvers (loops, rolls, stall turns), or even the same maneuver but changing from headinghold/

AVCS gyro mode to normal gyro mode. The 7C provides 2 idle-ups to allow the modeler 2 additional setups along

with the normal flight condition.

Adjustability:

SWITCH G (7CA) or E (7CH) is programmed for normal (NORM), idle-up 1 (IDL1), and idle-up 2 (IDL2) curves. This

switch/position assignment is not adjustable.

Activated with the throttle curve for that condition in THR-CURVE.

Curves are adjusted to maintain constant RPM even when the collective pitch is negative (inverted).

Gyro settings may be set separately for each idle-up. (See p. 72.)

Activating OFFSET makes the TRIM LEVERS adjust the trim separately in each of the idle-up conditions.

Dual rates may be set up to allow tri rates - a rate for each of the 3 primary controls in normal/idle up conditions.

For an example of throttle and pitch curves and revo, please see Normal Flight Condition Setup, p. 65.

69

OFFSET: Optional separate trims in addition to those for the normal condition. This function is used to automatically change

the trim of a helicopter, for example, when transitioned from hover to flying at high speed. A clockwise-rotation rotor

helicopter tends to drift to the right at high speed, so an aileron offset may be applied to offset the helicopter to the left.

The necessary elevator offset varies with model geometry, so it must be determined by noting collective pitch changes at

high speed. The rudder offset is affected by both revo. mixing and trim lever movement while in the offset function.

Adjustability:

Complete switch assignability, plus a CONDITION option that creates/switches between individual trims for each of the

idle-ups.

When OFFSET is active (its switch is on), moving the TRIM LEVERS adjusts the stored offset, not the trims in the normal

condition.

When OFFSET is inactive (its switch is off), the OFFSET and any trim adjustments to it have no effect (model obeys the

trim settings of the currently-active flight condition.)

Defaults to INH.

When OFFSET is inhibited, trim adjustments made in any flight condition affect all flight conditions.

NOTE: Remember, offsets and revo. mixes are not recommended when using heading-hold/AVCS gyros in AVCS mode

because they conflict with the automatic corrections to trim and torque that AVCS provides.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

70

Set up separate trims for each of the

two idle-up conditions.

Adjust the idle-up 2 rudder trim to

correct for torque at high speeds.

Where next?

Open the

Activate the function.

OFFSET function.

Change switch setting to E

Select IDL2.

Adjust trim settings as needed. (Ex:

rudder to +8%.)

Close menus and confirm difference in

trims between normal and idle-up 2.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to OFFSET.

to +8%.

E (7CH) or G (7CA) from

NORMALto IDL2. Check that rudder

trim changes.

THR-HOLD: see p. 67.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing

(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING for idle-ups: see p. 69.

to E.

to OFF.

to 2 (IDL2).

HOVERING ADJUSTMENTS (HOV-THR and HOV-PIT):

Hovering throttle and hovering pitch are fine-tuning adjustments for the throttle and collective pitch curves individually,

af

Note: HOV-THR is active in normal with and option for normal and idle up 1. HOV-PIT is only active in normal

condition.

fecting performance only around the center point. They allow in-flight tweaking of the curves for ideal setup.

Adjustability:

Rotor speed changes caused by temp., humidity

HOV-THR and HOV-PIT can assign the knob VR only to one of these functions at a time. Each time, assign the knob

, altitude or other changes in flying conditions are easily accommodated.

Both adjustments may be inhibited if not desired.

in these functions. Temporarily turning off the knob but maintaining the last memorized setting.

Adjustments may be memorized and then the knobs returned to center point to use that amount of adjustment. Allows

easy use of the trimming knobs for multiple models. (Note that when memorization is repeated with the knob offset

from center, the trim value accumulates.)

Adjustments are quickly reset to the initial value by turning the dial until the trim reads 0%, memorizing, then

returning the knob to its center position.

Note that all functions, including these, assume the model hovers at half stick.

Available in normal condition only.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

71

Fine-tune hovering with the hovering

adjustments. Remember these affect

only the hovering (normal) condition.

Adjust throttle and collective pitch

curves until model hovers nicely. In

flight, adjust collective pitch and

throttle curves near hover point

independently with HOV-THR and HOVPIT

knobs.

Store new settings after flight.

Where next?

Open the HOV-THR function.

Assign the dial VR.

Store the current dial settings prior to

selecting another model.

Close.

Open the HOV-PIT function.

Store the current dial settings prior to

Change VR to OFF.

setting HOV-THR function.

Close.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to HOV-THR.

to ON.

for one second to store.

or VR to center.

to HOV-PIT.

for one second to store.

or VR to center.

to OFF.

THR-HOLD: see p. 67.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing

(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING for idle-ups: see p. 69.

D/R,EXP: see p. 34.

In flight, adjust throttle curve near hover point with the knob.

GYROS : Using electronics to take some of the complexity out of setups and flight.

What is a gyro? A gyroscope is an electronic unit that senses motion and corrects for it. For example, if the wind blows

your helicopterís tail to the left, a gyro will sense that motion (and confirm that no input was given) and will correct for it.

How does it help in helicopter setup? A good gyro will totally eliminate the need for revo. mixing. The gyro will sense

and correct the unwanted motion for you, so you don' t have to spend time to get a complex curve operating properly.

Gyro sensor kinds: There are many different kinds of gyros. Early gyros were mechanical, with a spinning drum similar

to a child' s gyroscope toy. The next generation utilized a special type of crystal, called piezoelectric, which sensed the

motion and provided an electrical pulse. The finest gyros at the time of this writing are SMM technology. These silicone

micro machines, or computer chips, sense the motion. SMM is far more accurate and less susceptible to inaccuracies

caused by temperature changes, etc.

Types of gyro responses:

• Normal: sense motion and dampen it (if the gyro rotates off course for 2 seconds, it corrects for 2 seconds).

• Heading-hold/AVCS: calculate the angle of rotation (by tracking the time/rate of change) and then provide correction

until the same rotation is achieved.

• Stick priority: a feature on most high-end gyros. The more input given on the channel the gyro controls, the less

sensitive the gain is automatically. This way, if you give a large input for a stall turn, for example, the gyro turns itself

off and does not fight the stall turn. As you ease off the rudder, the gain increases again, minimizing tail wag and

keeping the model straight. (If your gyro does not include stick priority, you can manually create it. Please see

www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-7c.html.)

Choosing the right gyro for your skills, your helicopter, and your budget:

• Mechanical: some are still available. They are very challenging to set up and not as reliable as piezo or SMM.

• Non-Heading-Hold Piezo: these are now inexpensive gyros that are reliable and easy to set up. Some have dual rates

and remote gain control to adjust sensitivity in flight. Lack heading-hold capabilities for precision flying.

• Heading-Hold Piezo: Until recently, the cream of the crop. Expensive, and more complex to set up. Adds GPS-like heading

recognition. Exhibits minor difficulties with temperature drift (position setting varying with unit's temperature).

• Heading-Hold SMM: 21st Century gyro technology. Computer chip technology. Expensive, easier set up, higher durability.

Significant decrease in temperature sensitivity. Many include frame rate settings to allow faster response when using

specialized digital servos. Examples:

• GY401: Simpler set up. Ideal for learning aerobatics through 3D.

• GY502: Better centering than 401 for more advanced aerobatics. Ideal through Class III competition.

• GY601: Exceptional center. Extremely fast response time. Requires specialized servo.

GYRO: simplifies adjusting/selecting the gyro sensitivity, and can provide more than 2 gyro gain settings. (The higher the

gain, the more correction the gyro provides and the "softer" or less responsive the helicopter feels.) This function

makes the best possible use of the inflight adjustable gain of most gyros..

Adjustability:

• Plug the gyro's sensitivity adjustment to channel 5 of the receiver. (not assignable)

• STD and AVCS/Heading-hold (GY) setup types available to simplify adjustments for AVCS/Heading-hold gyros.

• Full switch assignability or may select Cond.option.

• Each gyro setting may be set from 0 to 100% gain.

• Dual mode gyros (heading-hold/AVCS and normal) are easily triggered to each mode by changing the gyro settingís

sign.

• Larger percentages indicate more gain, or gyro responsiveness.

• Tail wagging or shaking indicates excessive gain settings. Turn down gyro setting until wag stops.

72

Gain Example for AVCS/Heading-hold Gyros (GY)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

73

Set up a heading-hold/AVCS gyro with

heading-hold/AVCS setting in idle-up

1 and normal mode setting in

idle-up2 and normal.

Where next?

Open and activate the GYRO function.

Optional: change gyro type to

Heading-hold (GY).

Optional: change switch assignment.

Ex: select E.

Adjust gyro rates as needed. (Ex:

NORM to A80%, IDL1 to A70%, IDL2

to N70% as starting points.)

Close the function.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to GYRO.

to SW.

to E.

to A80%.

to A70%.

to N70%.

D/R,EXP: see p. 34.

to ON.

to GY.

74

GLOSSARY

3D: Common name for certain types of aerobatic maneuvers. Aircraft: flying below the modelís stall speed, such as

torque rolls. Helicopters: combining 2 or more maneuvers, such as rolling loop.

4.8V: 4.8 volt battery pack, made of 4 Ni-Cd 1.2V cells. See Accessories.

5-cell: 6.0 volt battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories.

6V (6Volt): battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories.

Accessories: additional optional items which may be used with your 7C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

ACRO: model type designed for use with powered aircraft. Selected in the PARA submenu under TYPE . . . . . . . . . . ..29

ACT. Active. Make a feature able to be utilized. Opposite of INH. Only visible in certain features.

Adjustable Function Rate: see SWASH AFR.

Adjustable Servo Travel (AST): a specific type of end point adjustment. See END POINT.

Adjustable Travel Limited (ATL): End point adjustment for low end only, for throttle channel. See ATL.

Adjustable Travel Volume (ATV): an older, less specific term for end point adjustment. See END POINT.

ADVANCE menus: Specific menus for each model type which allow the modeler to access and program the radio's more

advanced features.

AFR: Adjustable function rate. Used only in HELI model types with CCPM heads. See SWASH AFR.

AIL-2: second aileron servo assignment. See Twin aileron servos.

Aileron: surface that controls the roll of the model. Also called cyclic roll on a helicopter.

Aileron-to-flap mixing: Mixing used to create full-span aileron action. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable

mix.

Aileron-to-rudder mix: Mixing that automatically creates a "coordinated turn". Not a preprogrammed mix. See

Programmable mix.

Aileron Differential: Decreased down aileron travel when compared to up aileron travel. Minimizes "dragging" the low

wing and creates more axial rolls. See Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

AIRBRAKE: (ACRO) Combines elevator and flap to suddenly slow the model for spot landings. May be triggered by

THROTTLE STICK POSITION.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

AMA: Academy of Model Aeronautics. Non-profit organization governing model aircraft flight in the US. . . . . . . . . .5

AST: Adjustable Servo Travel. See END POINT.

ATL: Adjustable Travel Limited. Standard type of trim used for throttle, where the trim is effective only in the idle portion of the

THROTTLE STICK POSITION. Normal trims affect the entire travel of the servo (ex: elevator trims), but ATL trims only the low end

of the throttle movement, allowing throttle idle adjustments that don' t over-drive the servo at full throttle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

ATV: Older, less clear terminology for end point adjustment. See END POINT.

Autorotation: The ability of a helicopter to land safely without engine power, using the stored energy in the blade's

rotation to produce lift for flaring.

Backup battery: battery used to protect data storage in case of removal of master transmitter battery. In most Futaba

radios, including the 7C, EEPROM data storage is used, so no backup battery is used or needed.

BACKUP ERROR: transmitter's hard-coded memory has been lost. Send for service immediately. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Base-Loaded antenna: also called Whip antenna. Aftermarket equipment not approved by Futaba.

Basic model setups: guidelines to setting up the most basic models of each type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO22

HELI 58

BASIC menus: Specific menus with most commonly used features for each model type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO25

HELI 58

Battery care and charging. (Charging the Ni-Cd batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Battery FailSafe: determines how the receiver indicates an airborne pack low-battery warning. Defaults: 56% throttle,

requires throttle to idle to override. To adjust the warning point, set a THROTTLE STICK POSITION in F/S. . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

BEEP: tone emitted by transmitter to signify a variety of situations. See Error messages.

Binding: friction in a joint exceeding the movement of the linkage. Sticking or inability to continue movement. The servo

continues to attempt to move the surface beyond its power/capabilities, rapidly draining battery power as it continues to struggle.

Buddy Box: see Trainer box.

CCPM: Cyclic (pitch and roll) Collective Pitch Mixing. Multiple servos work in unison on the helicopterís head to create one

or more of the control functions. Ex: 3 servos set at 120 degrees operate the entire head. The 2 forward servos work together to

rotate both the bladeís pitch and the roll cyclic (aileron) in a HR3head type. See MODEL TYPE,HELI.

Charge: to increase the electrical energy, measured as voltage, available in a battery pack. See Battery care and charging.

Condition: (HELI) separate flight setup that has significant adjustability separate from the basic model setup. See IDLEUP

1, 2 and THROTTLE HOLD.

Contact information, North American Service Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

75

Copy model: see MODEL COPY.

Crow: see AIRBRAKE(ACRO).

Cursor: See SELECT BUTTONS.

Cyclic: horizontal controls on a helicopter. Cyclic pitch is typically called elevator. Cyclic roll is typically called aileron.

Data reset: erase all data in a specific model. See RESET.

Delta peak charger: common name for a specialized charger designed and required to properly peak charge both NiMH

and NiCd batteries, actually called a Zero Delta V Peak Charger. See Battery Care and Charging.

Dial: transmitterís rotary control and button used in various ways during programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Differential: uneven movement in each direction of a control surface. Usually used when discussing ailerons or when

describing an undesirable unevenness in movement of other controls. See Twin aileron servos.

Diode: an electronic device which only allows current to flow one direction. Used to protect radio against power surge

and reversed polarity during charging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Discharge: to deplete the electrical energy in a battery pack, usually to its lowest safe voltage, for storage or as a part of

regular maintenance. See Battery care and charging.

Dual aileron servos: (ACRO) a model using 2 servos on 2 separate channels to operate ailerons. May include

flaperon action. See Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Dual elevator servos: (ACRO) a model using 2 servos on 2 separate channels to operate elevators. Includes elevon,

V-tail.

Dual rates (D/R,EXP): reduce/increase the servo travel by flipping a switch (or by stick position). Used to make model

more comfortable to fly in different maneuvers. 7C supports triple rates by simply assigning dual rates to 3 position

switches. Includes exponential function, see EXP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Elapsed Time Counter reset: see TIMER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Elevator: surface which controls the modelís rate of climb or descent. Also called cyclic pitch on helicopters.

Elevator-to-flap mix: (ACRO) Used to apply flaps along with elevators to increase lift, allowing modeler to fly at

slower speeds, make tighter loops or turns, etc.

76

Elevator-to-pitch mix: (HELI) used to adjust pitch to counter the loss of angle of attack when elevator input is given. Not

a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. .

ELEVON: flying wing configuration with 2 servos working together to create both aileron and elevator action. . . . . . .45

Elevons: two surfaces, one on each wing, which work as both ailerons and elevators. See ELEVON.

END BUTTON: control button used during programming to return to previous menu or close menu altogether.

END POINT: often abbreviated EPA. Adjusts the total travel in each direction of proportional servos regardless of their control

assignment. Ex: adjustment to AIL channel will adjust only the servo plugged into channel 1 even if being used as one of two

flaperons or elevons. Note: End point is not an absolute; mixing can still drive the servo farther than this setting. . . . . . . . . . .32

Engine cut: see THR-CUT.

EPA: see END POINT.

Error messages: warnings/cautions provided by the radio when potential problems may exist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Exponential (D/R,EXP): adjustment to the relationship of STICK MOVEMENT to servo movement, typically used to soften

overly sensitive models around center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

FailSafe (F/S ): sets servo positions when interference is encountered or signal is lost. Available only in PCM

transmission mode. Also includes Battery FailSafe settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Flap-to-aileron mix: (ACRO ) used to create full span flap reaction in flight. Not a preprogrammed mix. See

Programmable mix. .

Flap-to-elevator mix: (ACRO ) used to counteract unwanted changes in pitch when flaps are deployed.

FLAPERON: one servo on each aileron, plugged into channels 1 and 6, which operate both as ailerons and as flaps. . .43

FLAP-TRIM: Adjustment of central position of flaperons, default assigned to CHANNEL6 KNOB. May also be used as

primary or only control of flaperons acting as flaps, or other mixes may be set up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Frequency: channel on which radio transmits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Frequency band: In the entire spectrum, transmissions are designated in terms of "frequency bands" which exhibit similar

properties. In the US, specific frequencies within the 72MHz band are regulated by the FCC to be used solely for remote

control aircraft. 50MHz band is available for model use by those holding a HAM amateur radio operatorís license. 75MHz

is solely for remote control ground models. 27MHz is legal for air or ground use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Function (F) mode of TRAINER, allows student radio to use the computer programming for that channel in the master radio.

Ex: allows a student with a 4-channel transmitter to fly an 8-servo aerobatic plane or a 5-servo helicopter. See TRAINER.

Gain: the responsiveness or amount of control given the gyro. On a high gain, the gyro is very active and overrides

nearly all other actions. Too high a gain may result in ìwaggingî at the surface as the gyro over-corrects repeatedly in

each direction. See GYRO SENS.

Gear doors: covers for retractable landing gear, may be operated separately from landing gear on some models. . . . .56

77

Gyro, gyroscope: equipment that senses change in direction and provides input to compensate for that change. For

description of aircraft use, see p. 56. For description of types, and helicopter use, see GYRO.

GYRO (HELI ): gyro sensitivity programming designed to ease the setup and use of gyroscopes on model helicopters.

Manual pages include extensive descriptions of gyro types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Gyros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Heading-hold gyro: gyro that specifically measures the unwanted deflection angle and compensates until a corresponding angle

has been returned. See Gyros.

HELI: model type, rotary wing. See MODEL TYPE.

Helicopter radio: transmitter that includes helicopter-friendly switch and control layout and sufficient programming to

at least support a 5-channel helicopter. The 7CA and 7CH radios both contain all needed programming. The 7CH has a

more heli-friendly layout (through switch positioning and no ratchet on throttle for easier hovering)

High band: 72MHz equipment on a channel from 36 to 60. Receiver channel may be changed to any channel within the

high band without needing retuning. Transmitter must not be changed except by certified technician. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

High Rate: See D/R,EXP.

Hover: to maintain a stationary position relative to a point on the ground.

HOVERING PITCH: see Hovering setups.

HOVERING THROTTLE: see Hovering setups.

Hovering setups: in-flight adjustments to pitch and throttle curves around center THROTTLE STICK position (the ideal

hovering point). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

IDLE-UP: separate condition created to allow inverted and other types of flight with a helicopter not easily achieved in

the normal condition. Note: the idle-ups are activated by activating their throttle curves. Also note that OFFSET is

available to create separate trims within each condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

INH: makes a feature inactive/unable to be used. When a function is inhibited, it cannot be used even if the assigned

switch is ON. Turns off functionality without losing any settings. Only visible in specific features.

Inhibit: see INH.

Installation: radio installation and setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Inverted: to fly a model upside-down.

Inverted flight control programming: not available in the 7C. Most modelers no longer use this "crutch" to fly inverted,

instead learning to recognize the model's behaviors when inverted and compensate appropriately.

Kill switch: (1) throttle cut switch to close carburetor (see THR-CUT, p. 33). (2) gasoline ignition engine kill switch

which removes spark to the plugs to stop the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

78

Linear Mix: a mix that maintains the same relationship of master to slave throughout the whole range. Ex: a mix from

one flap servo to another flap servo at 100% causes the 2nd servo to follow the first servo' s movement exactly through

all points of travel. See Programmable mix.

Lithium battery: see Backup battery.

Low Band: 72MHz equipment on a channel from 11 to 35. Receiver channel may be changed to any channel within the

low band without needing retuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

LOW BATTERY warning: transmitter's battery is below a safe flight voltage. Recharge immediately. See Error messages.

Low rate: see D/R, EXP.

Master: the primary control. See Programmable mix.

Mechanical gyro: uses a mechanical gyroscope (like a child' s toy gyro) to sense change of angle. See Gyros.

MHz: Megahertz. Unit used to express frequency. 72MHz channels are aircraft only frequencies; 75MHz are ground model

only frequencies; 27MHz are air and ground both. 50MHz is legal for HAM amateur license holders. See Frequency.

Mix, mixing rate, mix offset: See Programmable mix.

MIXER ALERT warning: notifies user that a mix is activated which is not considered desirable for engine startup. See

Error messages.

Mode: definition of which channels are assigned to which STICK movements. All 7C radios shipped in the US are Mode

2, with elevator and aileron on the right STICK. To change mode, please visit www.futaba-rc.com.

MODE/PAGE BUTTON: control button on radio' s face used in various parts of programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

MODEL COPY: used to duplicate the settings of one model already in memory into a second model memory. Often used

to set up 2 similar models, or make a copy of a working model to experiment with new setups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

MODEL NAME: gives each model memory an 6-character name for easy recognition. In MODEL submenu. . . . . . . . . .27

MODEL RESET: restore all data in a single model memory to defaults, including name and model type. See RESET.

MODEL SELECT: choose the model memory you wish to modify or fly. In MODEL submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

MODEL TYPE: select the type of model the aircraft is, including airplane and 6 heli types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

MODUL: modulation, means of transmitting data (PPM, PCM). In PARAMETER submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Name: see MODEL NAME.

Neckstrap: optional strap to suspend transmitter during use. Futaba stock # FTA8. See Accessories.

79

Ni-Cd: Nickel Cadmium rechargeable battery. Typically used to power transmitter and receiver. See Battery care

and charging.

NiMH: Nickel Metal Hydride rechargeable battery. Newer battery technology than Ni-Cd. Longer run times but more specific

peak charging requirements. [Require a (zero) delta peak charger labeled specifically for use with NiMH batteries.]

NORMAL(N): trainer mode that does not give student radio the computer programming features of the master radio. See Trainer.

NT8S: standard transmitter battery pack. See Accessories.

NULL(--): not assigned or never changed. Ex: a mix which has a null switch assignment is always active, and can never be

changed in flight (turned off) no matter which switch is moved.

OFFSET: (HELI) separate trim settings available to each idle-up setting, or assigned to separate switches from the idle-up

switch. When offset is ON, movement of the trim levers adjusts the OFFSET, not the normal condition's trims . . . . . .70

Offset mix: mix that independently moves the slave servo a set percentage of its total throw, not in relation to any

master. See Programmable mix.

PA2: Pilot Assist. Optional onboard device that uses optical sensors to correct model's orientation to upright.

PARAMETER submenu: sets specific parameters. Includes reset, type, modulation, CH5, and CH7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .28

PCM: Pulse Code Modulation. An electronically encoded method of transmitting data to a receiver to help minimize the effects

of interference. (Transmission is on an FM wavelength, and uses FM crystals). See Modulation.

Peak Charger: charger that automatically stops charging when the battery is fully charged (commonly called "peaked").

See Battery care and charging.

Piezo gyro: gyro that uses a piezo crystal to sense angular changes. See Gyros.

Pitch-to-rudder mix: see REVO.

PITCH CURVE: (HELI) curve that sets the response of the collective pitch servo(s) to movement of the throttle/collective

STICK. Independently adjustable in the normal flight mode, one for each of the 2 idle-ups, and one for throttle hold.

Adjusted to provide ideal blade response for various types of maneuvers being performed. For simplicity, the normal

conditionís curve may be set in the BASIC menu. All 3 curves are also adjustable in the ADVANCE menu. . . . . . . . . . .68

PPM: Pulse Position Modulation. Also known as FM. Type of signal transmission. See Modulation.

Programmable mix: used to cause specific servo responses to specific inputs separate from the basic control setups.

Includes extensive definitions of types and examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Range check or test: to test the transmitterís control over the model at a specific distance as a precaution in checking its

proper operation prior to flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Rate: amount of control given. Ex: see Programmable mix.

RESET: to delete all data in the existing model only. User CANNOT erase all data in the radio. Only service center can

do so. Part of PARAMETER submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Retractable landing gear: landing gear that is brought up into the model during flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

REVERSE: servo reversing. Used to reverse the direction of a servo to ease installation and set up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Rudder-to-aileron mix: (ACRO ) used to counteract undesirable roll (roll coupling) that happens with rudder input,

especially in knife-edge. Gives proper aileron input to counteract roll coupling when rudder is applied. Not a

preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default programming for one linear and one curve mix in

ACRO.

Rudder-to-elevator mix: used to counteract undesirable pitch (pitch coupling) with rudder input, especially in knife edge flight.

Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.

80

Rudder-to-throttle mix: (HELI) adds throttle to counter the added load from increasing pitch of the tail blades,

maintaining a constant head-speed with rudder. (This is a minor effect and is not critical in most helicopters.) Not a

preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.

Rx: receiver.

SELECT (CURSOR) BUTTONS: controls used in various ways during programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Select a model: see MODEL SELECT.

Service Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Servo reversing: see REVERSE.

SET: to accept. Usually done by pressing and holding the dial when instructed.

Slave: channel that moves in response to the command of the master. See Programmable mix.

Smoke system: injects a specialized smoke oil into the hot exhaust to create air-show like smoke trails. . . . . . . . . . . .56

SNAP ROLL: (ACRO) combines rudder, elevator and aileron movement to cause the aircraft to snap or spin at the flip of a

switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Stick adjustments: change stick tension and height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

SUB-TRIM: used to fine tune the center or neutral point of each servo. Allows full trim function from the trim sliders for

flight trimming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

SWASH AFR: (HELI,CCPM types only) adjustment of the travel of all servos involved in the particular control's

movement only during the movement of that control. Ex: reverse the direction of movement of collective pitch while

not affecting the direction of movement of either cyclic control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Swashplate type: (HELI). Part of the model type selection process. Selects specific heli swashplate geometry, such as one

of four available types of "CCPM." . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Switch programmability: MANY features are reassignable to a variety of switches, including simply moving an

auxiliary control such as flaps from the stock dial to a switch or other location.

Synthesized receiver: The 7C is compatible with the R309DPS Futaba synthesized receiver that can be used on

any 72MHz channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

81

Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

THR-REV: reverses the throttle trim function to the top of the THROTTLESTICK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Throttle-to-rudder mix: used to compensate with rudder when throttle is applied on take off. Not a preprogrammed

mix. See Programmable mix.

THROTTLE CURVE: (HELI) adjusts how the servo responds to the THROTTLE STICK position along a 5 point curve. Separate

curves available for each idle-up and normal. For simplicity, normal curve may be edited from BASIC menu. All curves

may be edited together in the ADVANCE menu. Activating an idle-up's throttle curve is what activates that idle-up. .65,68

Throttle cut or throttle kill: THR-CUT. (ACRO/ HELI) Offset mix which closes the throttle servo to a set position when the

assigned switch is moved to shut the engine off without having to fiddle with trim settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

THROTTLE HOLD: (HELI) makes the throttle servo non-responsive to THROTTLESTICK position, and moves the throttle to idle.

Used to practice autorotations. NOTE: THR-HOLD must be activated, then the default pitch curve adjusted properly.. . . . . . . .67

Throttle trim adjustment: see ATLto change throttle trim from ìidle onlyî to full trim control like all other channels. See

THR-REV to reverse THROTTLE STICK completely, including moving trim to the top of the THROTTLE STICK. See also Idle

management for details on idle down and throttle cut functions.

TIMER: adjust the timer functions, used to keep track of flight time on a tank of fuel, etc. The ìtriggerî to turn timers

on/off may be programmed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

TRAINER: software that allows 2 radios to be connected via trainer cord, giving student control of all or some of the

channels of the aircraft at the flip of a switch. FUNC(F) trainer mode allows student to use mixing in the master transmitter ,

for example dual rates, exponential, fly a 5-channel helicopter with a 4-channel buddy box, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Trainer cord: cord used to connect two compatible radios to use for flight instruction. See Accessories.

TRIM menu: adjusts rate at which the trim responds to movement of the trim sliders. Also has a reset function to reset

the modelís electronic trims to zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

TRIM OFFSET: (HELI) sets an offset or adjustment of trim when switching between conditions. See OFFSET.

Triple rate: 3rd control travel setting available in flight. See D/R,EXP.

Twin aileron servos: use of 2 or more servos on separate channels to control aileron action. Includes flaperon

and elevon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Twin elevator servos: use of 2 or more servos on separate channels to control the elevator of a model. Includes elevon,

V-tail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Tx: transmitter.

Voltmeter, voltage reading: displays transmitter voltage on home screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

VR : variable rate control. Knob on the radio. See switch assignment chart for default assignments.

82

V-tail model Mix: (ACRO) programming used to control a V-tail modelís tail surfaces, with 2 servos operating 2 control

surfaces as both rudder and elevator.

Warning messages: cautions provided by the radio when certain potential problems exist. See Error messages.

Warranty information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Website: www.futaba-rc.com. Internet location of extensive technical information Futaba products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Whip antenna: aftermarket, shortened antenna. Not approved by Futaba.

Futaba 9C

9CAP / 9CAF / 9CHP / 9CHF

9 CHANNEL RADIO CONTROL SYSTEM

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Technical updates and additional programming examples available at: http://www.futaba-rc.com/faq/faq-9c.html

FUTZ8585 V1.2 Entire Contents © Copyright 2002

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Additional Technical Help, Support and Service . . . . .3

Application, Export and Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Meaning of Special Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Safety Precautions (do not operate without reading) . .5

Introduction to the 9C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Contents and Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Transmitter Controls &

Switch Identification/Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Charging the Ni-Cd Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Stick Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Adjusting display contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Changing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Radio Installation & Range Checking . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Aircraft Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Transmitter Displays and Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Warning and Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

AIRPLANE (ACRO) FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Map of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Quick Guide to Setting up a 4-channel Airplane . . . .22

ACRO BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

MODEL Submenu: MODEL SELECT, COPY and NAME . .25

PARAMETER Submenu: TYPE, MODUL, ATL, AIL2,

& RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Servo REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

END POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Idle Management: IDLE DOWN and THR-CUT . . . . . . . .33

Dual/Triple Rates and Exponential (D/R,EXP) . . . . . .35

TIMER Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Auxiliary Channel assignments and

CH9 reverse (AUX-CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

TRIM and SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

SERVO Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe (F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Wing types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

FLAPERON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

FLAP TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Aileron Differential (AIL-DIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Using a 5-channel receiver: AIL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

ELEVON (see tail types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Tail types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

ELEVON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Twin Elevator Servos (AILEVATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . .49

V-TAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

SNAP ROLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Mixes: definitions and types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

ELEV-FLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

AIRBRAKE/BUTTERFLY (crow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

THROTTLE-NEEDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

THROTTLE DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Linear, Prog. mixes 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Curve, Prog. mixes 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Other Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

GLIDER (GLID1FLP/2FLP) FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . .65

Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Getting Started with a Basic 4-CH Glider . . . . . . . . .66

GLIDER-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS . .68

Model type (PARAMETERS submenu) . . . . . . . . . .68

GLIDER-SPECIFIC ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS 69

BUTTERFLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

FLAP-AILE (GLID2FLP only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

AILE-FLAP (GLID2FLP only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

START OFS (Launch/Start Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

SPEED OFS (Minimum Drag Setup) . . . . . . . . . . .71

HELICOPTER (SW…) FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Table of contents and reference info for helicopters .73

Getting Started with a Basic Helicopter . . . . . . . . . .74

HELI-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . .77

MODEL TYPE (PARAMETERS submenu) . . . . . . . . . .77

SWASH AFR (swashplate surface direction and travel

correction) (not in SWH1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Setting up the Normal Flight Condition . . . . . . .81

THR-CUT (specialized settings for helicopter specific

models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

HELI-SPECIFIC ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS . . .83

THROTTLE HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE and REVO. . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Idle-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Trims/offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Hovering setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Gyros and governors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this point,

any time we are using a feature’s specialized name or

abbreviation, as seen on the screen of the 9C, that name,

feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on the radio’s

screen, including capitalization and shown in a DIFFERENT

TYPE STYLE for clarity. Any time we mention a specific

control on the radio itself, such as moving SWITCH A, KNOB

VR(B), or the THROTTLE STICK, those words will be

displayed as they are here.

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing a Futaba® 9C series digital proportional R/C system. This system is extremely versatile and may

be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the best use of your system and to fly safely, please read this

manual carefully. If you have any difficulties while using your system, please consult the manual, our online Frequently

Asked Questions (on the web pages referenced below), your hobby dealer, or the Futaba Service Center.

Owner’s Manual and Additional Technical Help

This manual has been carefully written to be as helpful to you, the new owner, as possible. There are many pages of setup

procedures and examples. However, it need not be your sole resource of setup guidelines for your 9C. For example, pages

22-24 include setup instructions for a basic 4-channel airplane. The Frequently Asked Questions web page referenced

below includes this type of step-by-step setup instructions for a variety of other model types, including multi-engine,

complex gear installation, 7-servo aerobatic models, 140 degree CCPM, etc.

Due to unforeseen changes in production procedures, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.

Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during your hobby’s “off

season” to ensure safe operation.

IN NORTH AMERICA

Please feel free to contact the Futaba Service Center for assistance in operation, use and programming. Please be sure to

regularly visit the 9C Frequently Asked Questions web site at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html. This page includes

extensive programming, use, set up and safety information on the 9C radio system and is updated regularly. Any technical

updates and US manual corrections will be available on this web page. If you do not find the answers to your questions there,

please see the end of our F.A.Q. area for information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient response.

Don’t have Internet access? Internet access is available at no charge at most public libraries, schools, and other public

resources. We find internet support to be a fabulous reference for many modelers as items can be printed and saved for future

reference, and can be accessed at any hour of the day, night, weekend or holiday. If you do not wish to access the internet for

information, however, don’t worry. Our support teams are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you.

FOR SERVICE ONLY: FOR SUPPORT :

Futaba Service Center (PROGRAMMING AND USER QUESTIONS)

1610 Interstate Drive Please start here for answers to most questions:

Champaign IL 61822 www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html

www.hobbyservices.com FACSIMILE: 217-398-7721

PHONE: 217-398-8970 option 4

OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA

Please contact your Futaba importer in your region of the world to assist you with any questions, problems or service needs.

Please recognize that all information in this manual, and all support availability, is based upon the systems sold in North

America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support center for assistance.

3

Application, Export, and Modification

1. This product may be used for model airplane or surface (boat, car, robot) use, if on the correct frequency. It is not

intended for use in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is

subject to regulations of the Ministry of Radio/Telecommunications and is restricted under Japanese law to such purposes.

2. Exportation precautions:

(a) When this product is exported from the country of manufacture, its use is to be approved by the laws governing the

country of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If this product is then re-exported to other

countries, it may be subject to restrictions on such export. Prior approval of the appropriate government authorities may

be required. If you have purchased this product from an exporter outside your country, and not the authorized Futaba

distributor in your country, please contact the seller immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met.

(b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations, and an application

for export approval must be submitted. In the US, use of 72MHz (aircraft only), 75MHz (ground models only) and 27MHz

(both) frequency bands are strictly regulated by the FCC. This equipment must not be utilized to operate equipment other than

radio controlled models. Similarly, other frequencies (except 50MHz, for HAM operators) must not be used to operate models.

3. Modification, adjustment, and replacement of parts: Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modification, adjustment, and

replacement of parts on this product. Any such changes may void the warranty.

The Following Statement Applies to the Receiver (for U.S.A.)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation.

The RBRC™ SEAL on the nickel-cadmium battery contained in Futaba products indicates that Futaba

Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect and recycle these

batteries at the end of their useful lives, when taken out of service within the United States. The RBRC™

program provides a convenient alternative to placing used nickel-cadmium batteries into the trash or municipal

waste system, which is illegal in some areas.

(for USA)

You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please call

1-800-8-BATTERY for information on Ni-Cd battery recycling in your area. Futaba Corporation of America’s involvement

in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and conserving natural resources.

NOTE: Our instruction manuals encourage our customers to return spent batteries to a local recycling center in order to

keep a healthy environment.

RBRC is a trademark of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation.

4

Meaning of Special Markings

Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks:

DANGER - Procedures which may lead to dangerous conditions and cause death/serious injury if not carried out properly.

WARNING - Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury to the user if not

carried out properly, or procedures where the probability of superficial injury or physical damage is high.

CAUTION - Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to the user is small, but there is a danger of injury, or

physical damage, if not carried out properly.

= Prohibited = Mandatory

Warning: Always keep electrical components away from small children.

FLYING SAFETY

To ensure the safety of yourself and others, please observe the following precautions:

Have regular maintenance performed. Although your 9C protects the model memories with non-volatile EEPROM

memory (which does not require periodic replacement) and not a battery, it still should have regular checkups for wear

and tear. We recommend sending your system to the Futaba Service Center annually during your non-flying-season

for a complete checkup and service.

Ni-Cd Battery

Charge the batteries! (See Charging the Ni-Cd batteries, p. 14, for details.) Always recharge the transmitter and

receiver batteries for at least 8 hours before each flying session. A low battery will soon die, causing loss of control

and a crash. When you begin your flying session, reset your 9C’s built-in timer, and during the session pay attention

to the duration of usage.

Stop flying long before your batteries become low on charge. Do not rely on your radio’s low battery warning

systems, intended only as a precaution, to tell you when to recharge. Always check your transmitter and

receiver batteries prior to each flight.

Where to Fly

We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs and fields by asking

your nearest hobby dealer, or in the US by contacting the Academy of Model Aeronautics.

You can also contact the national Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA), which has more than 2,500 chartered clubs across the

country. Through any one of them, instructor training programs and insured newcomer training are available. Contact the AMA

at the address or toll-free phone number below.

Academy of Model Aeronautics

5151 East Memorial Drive

Muncie, IN 47302-9252

Tele. (800) 435-9262

Fax (765) 741-0057

or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org

5

Always pay particular attention to the flying field’s rules, as well as the presence and location of spectators, the

wind direction, and any obstacles on the field. Be very careful flying in areas near power lines, tall buildings, or

communication facilities as there may be radio interference in their vicinity.

If you must fly away from a club field, be sure there are no other modelers flying within a three-to-five-mile range, or you may

lose control of your aircraft or cause someone else to lose control.

At the flying field

Before flying, be sure that the frequency you intend to fly with is not in use, and secure any frequency control

device (pin, tag, etc.) for that frequency before turning on your transmitter. It is never possible to fly two or more

models on the same frequency at the same time. Even though there are different types of modulation (AM, FM,

PCM), only one model may be flown on a single frequency at any one time.

To prevent possible damage to your radio gear, turn the power switches on and off in the proper sequence:

1. Pull throttle stick to idle position, or otherwise disarm your motor/engine.

2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen.

3. Confirm the proper model memory has been selected.

4. Fully extend the transmitter antenna.

5. Turn on your receiver power.

6. Test all controls. If a servo operates abnormally, don’t attempt to fly until you determine the cause of the problem.

(For PCM systems only: Test to ensure that the FailSafe settings are correct by waiting at least 2 minutes after

adjusting then, turning the transmitter off and confirming the proper surface/throttle movements. Turn the transmitter

back on.)

7. Start your engine.

8. Complete a full range check (see p. 17).

9. After flying, bring your throttle stick to idle position, engage any kill switches or otherwise disarm your motor/engine.

10. Turn off receiver power.

11. Turn off transmitter power.

If you do not turn on your system in this order, you may damage your servos or control surfaces, flood your engine, or in the

case of electric-powered or gasoline-powered models, the engine may unexpectedly turn on and cause a severe injury.

While you are getting ready to fly, if you place your transmitter on the ground, be sure that the wind won’t tip

it over. If it is knocked over, the throttle stick may be accidentally moved, causing the engine to speed up. Also,

damage to your transmitter may occur.

Before taxiing, be sure to extend the transmitter antenna to its full length.

A collapsed antenna will reduce your flying range and cause a loss of control. It is a good idea to avoid pointing the transmitter

antenna directly at the model, since the signal is weakest in that direction.

Don’t fly in the rain! Water or moisture may enter the transmitter through the antenna or stick openings and cause erratic

operation or loss of control. If you must fly in wet weather during a contest, be sure to cover your transmitter with a plastic

bag or waterproof barrier. Never fly if lightning is expected.

6

A QUICK INTRODUCTION TO THE 9C SYSTEM

TRANSMITTER:

• Large graphic liquid-crystal display panel with 4 buttons and an easy set up turn-and-press Dial for quick, easy setup.

•All transmitters include all 3 aircraft types with specialized programming for each, including:

• Airplane (ACRO)

• V-tail • Twin Aileron Servos (FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF)

• ELEVON • Twin Elevator Servos (AILEVATOR)

• AIRBRAKE • Snap Roll (4 separate directions available)

• Helicopter (5 swashplate types, including CCPM, see page 77)(HELI)

• 3 Idle Ups • Throttle and Pitch Curves per Condition

• Revo. Mixing • Gyro Mixing including Separate Settings per Condition

• Delay • Governor Mixing

• Sailplane/Glider (2 wing types)(GLID)

• V-tail • Twin Ailerons (FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF)

• ELEVON • Crow (BUTTERFLY)

• START OFFSET • SPEED OFFSET

• BASIC menu for quick, easy set up of less complex models.

• ADVANCE menu for more complex, unique setups.

• Four electronic TRIM LEVERS for rapid yet precise trim adjustment - no remembering to “store trims” between models

and no more “bumped trims” during transport.

• IDLE- DOWN (ACRO) and THR-CUT (ACRO/HELI) (engine shut off) setups to allow precise engine control for taxi and landings.

• 8 complete model memories with 6 more per optional CAMPac.

• New stick design with improved feel, adjustable length and tension.

• Triple rates available by setting dual rates to 3-position switches.

• Eight SWITCHES, 3 DIALS and 2 SLIDERS; completely assignable in most applications.

• Trainer system includes the “functional” (FUNC) setting, which allows the student to use the 9C’s mixing, helicopter, and

other programming functions even with a 4-channel buddy box. (Optional trainer cord required.)

• Transmits in both FM (PPM) and PCM by selecting modulation/cycling transmitter. Requires receiver of proper modulation.

• Permanent memory storage via EEPROM with no backup battery to service or have fail.

• 9CA transmitter features airplane friendly switch layout, with the trainer switch at the left hand, and a notched throttle

to minimize throttle changes with rudder input. Defaults to ACRO MODEL TYPE.

• 9CH transmitter features helicopter-friendly switch layout, with idle-up and throttle hold switches at the left hand, and

a smooth, ratchet-less (unsprung) throttle for perfect hovering. Defaults to HELI(SW1) MODEL TYPE.

• Change transmitter mode from mode 2 to modes 1, 3, or 4. (See P. 15)

Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this point, any time we are using a feature’s specialized name or abbreviation

as seen on the screen of the 9C, that name, feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on the radio’s screen, including

capitalization and shown in a DIFFERENT TYPE STYLE for clarity. Any time we mention a specific control on the radio itself,

such as moving SWITCH A, KNOB VR(B), or the THROTTLE STICK, those words will be displayed as they are here.

7

MODULE: 72TP-FM

• Module may be easily removed and a module on a different channel (or even band) reinserted to change the frequency

on which the 9C transmits.

• Module transmits both FM (PPM) and PCM. No need for a second module.

• All transmission circuitry is included in the module, so no retuning is needed when changing channels or even bands.

• Frequency band is changed by inserting a module on the proper band, including for international or ground model use.

• In North America it is against FCC regulation to change the crystal within the transmitter module to a different

channel. All such transmitter crystal changes must be performed by a certified radio technician. Failure to properly tune

a system to its new channel may result in decreased range and may also result in interference to other types of frequency

users on adjoining channels. Doing so also voids your AMA insurance.

• The FSS synthesized module for the 9Z family of radios is NOT compatible with the 9C.

• Radio system beeps and RF LIGHT goes out to indicate module is not installed and radio is not transmitting.

• Non-Futaba brand modules are not FCC certified for use with this radio and therefore are against FCC regulation to use.

Doing so also voids your AMA insurance.

• TJ75FM modules may also be used with the 9C for ground use models such as robotics, rocketry, trains, cars, and boats.

RECEIVER: R138/R148/R149

• The R138 or R148 FM 8-channel or the R149 PCM 9-channel receiver included with your system is a high-sensitivity

narrow-band dual-conversion receiver.

• Note that your 9C transmitter is capable of transmission on both PPM (FM) and PCM with just a simple programming

change and just turning the transmitter off and back on. (See p. 28.)

• Any Futaba narrow band FM receiver (all produced after 1991) on the correct frequency band and frequency may be

used with the 9C.

• Any Futaba PCM 1024 receiver on the right frequency band and frequency may be used with the 9C (all 1024 receivers

say PCM1024; receivers which say PCM but not 1024 are 512 resolution and not compatible).

NEVER attempt to change a receiver’s band by simply changing crystal (IE removing a 72MHz crystal and inserting

a 75MHz crystal). A receiver that has a crystal installed from a different frequency band without retuning will not

receive properly and will have dramatically decreased range.

• In North America the receiver included with this system may have its frequency changed by simply changing the crystal

as long as it remains in the same half the band. A low band receiver between channels 11 and 35 may be changed to

any other channel between 11 and 35 without requiring any tuning. A high band receiver between channels 36 and 60

may similarly be changed. Receivers being changed from a high band channel to a low band or vice versa require proper

tuning and service by the Futaba Service Center.

SERVOS

• Please see technical specifications page for specifics on the servos included with your system.

• The included receiver is compatible with all J-plug Futaba servos, including retract, winch, and digital servos.

8

• 9C Transmitter, including RF module1 (TP)

• R148DF Receiver or R149DP Receiver

• Servos, S3004, S3001 or S9001, with mounting hardware

and servo arm assortment

• Switch harness

• Aileron extension cord

• 110V wall charger (North America)

• Frequency Flag

Transmitter T9C

Operating system: 2-stick, 9 channels, PCM1024 system

Transmitting frequency: 50, 72 or 75 MHz bands

Modulation: FM/PPM or PCM, switchable

Power supply: 9.6V NT8S600B Ni-Cd battery

Current drain: 280 mA

Receiver R149DP

(PCM Dual conversion)

Receiving frequency: 50 or 72 MHz bands

Intermediate freq.: 10.7 MHz & 455 kHz

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V Ni-Cd battery

Current drain: 14 mA

Size: 1.28 x 2.17 x 0.82 (32.6 x 55.0 x 20.8 mm)

Weight: 1.22 oz (34.5 g)

Channels: 9

Receiver R148DF

(FM Dual conversion)

Receiving frequency: 50 or 72 MHz bands

Intermediate freq.: 10.7MHz & 455 kHz

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V Ni-Cd battery

Current drain: 14 mA

Size: 1” x 2.2” x .9” (25.4 x 55.8 x 22.9 mm)

Weight: 1.1 oz (31.18 g)

Channels: 8

Servo S9001 (Coreless motor)

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver)

Output torque: 54.2 oz-in(3.9 kg-cm) at 4.8V

Operating speed: 0.22 sec/60 at 4.8V

Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41 (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm)

Weight: 1.69 oz (48 g)

Servo S3001 (Standard, ball-bearing)

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver)

Output torque: 41.7 oz-in (3.0 kg-cm)

Operating speed: 0.22 sec/60

Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41 (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm)

Weight: 1.59 oz (45.1g)

Servo S3004 (Standard, ball-bearing)

Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral

Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver)

Output torque: 44.4 oz-in (3.2 kg-cm)

Operating speed: 0.23 sec/60

Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41” (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm)

Weight: 1.30 oz (38 g)

1 Transmitter band may only be changed by changing the module. Contact

Futaba Service Center regarding adjustability of receiver band. Band

cannot be changed by simply changing crystals.

9

CONTENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(Specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice.)

Your 9CAP or 9CHP (packaged with a 9-channel PCM receiver), 9CAF or 9CHF (packaged with an 8-channel FM

receiver) system includes the following components:

The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog for more information:

• CAMPac Memory module - the optional DP-16K CAMPac increases your model storage capability (to 14 models from

8) and allows you to transfer programs to another 9C transmitter. Note that data cannot be transferred to/from any other

model of transmitter (i.e. 8U, 9Z, etc).

Insertion of a CAMPac containing data of a different transmitter type (ex: 9Z) will result in a complete

CAMPac data reset and loss of all data.

• NT8S Transmitter battery pack - the (600mAh) transmitter Ni-Cd battery pack may be easily exchanged with a fresh

one to provide enough capacity for extended flying sessions.

• Trainer cord - the optional training cord may be used to help a beginning pilot learn to fly easily by placing the instructor on

a separate transmitter. Note that the 9C transmitter may be connected to another 9C system, as well as to many other models

of Futaba transmitters. The 9C transmitter uses the newer rectangular type cord plug. Both new-to-new and new-to-round plug

style trainer cords are available.

• FTA8 Neckstrap - a neckstrap may be connected to your T9C system to make it easier to handle and improve your flying

precision, since your hands won’t need to support the transmitter’s weight.

• Y-harnesses, servo extensions, etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-harnesses, including a heavy-duty version with heavier

wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other installations.

• 5-cell (6.0V) receiver battery packs - All Futaba airborne equipment (except that which is specifically labeled otherwise) is

designed to work with 4.8V (Ni-Cd 4 cells) or 6.0V (Ni-Cd 5 cells or alkaline 4 cells). Using a 6.0V pack increases the current

flow to the servos, which accelerates their rate of response and their torque. However, because of this faster current draw, a 5-

cell battery pack of the same mAh rating will last approximately ¾ the time of a 4-cell pack.

• R309DPS - Synthesized receiver which can be changed to any 72MHz frequency with the turn of 2 dials, no tuning needed.

• Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros are available for your aircraft or helicopter needs. See p. 64 for aircraft or

p. 89 for helicopter gyro information.

• Governor (GV1) - for helicopter use. Automatically adjusts throttle servo position to maintain a constant head speed

regardless of blade pitch, load, weather, etc. See p. 89 for details.

• DSC Cord - allows setup and testing without transmitting. Requires DSC compatible receiver (R149DP or R309DPS)

and DSC cord. With Transmitter and Receiver off, plug cord into trainer port then, into receiver battery slot. All

programing and setup may be done in this manner without transmitting.

• TP72FM modules - additional modules on other frequencies within the 50MHz (licensed operators only) and 72 MHz

bands may be purchased to utilize your transmitter with receivers on other frequencies. Additionally, the TK and

TJ75MHz modules may be used with the 9C. (See p.8)

• Receivers - various models of receivers may be purchased for use in other models. (See p. 8.)

10

TRANSMITTER CONTROLS – AIRPLANE

SW(B)

VR(A)

VR(B)

SW(A)

SW(F)

SW(E)

VR(D) VR(E)

VR(C)

SW(G)

SW(H)

SW(D)

SW(C)

Dust Cap

(optional CAMPac module plugs in here)

CH8 Knob

This controls CH6, and if flaperon mixing

is activated controls the flap.

Flap Trim Control

Rudder Dual Rate Switch

Elevator Dual Rate

Switch

Snap Roll or

Trainer Switch

Landing Gear

Switch

/CH5

Rudder

/Throttle

Stick

Power

LED*

Throttle

Trim Lever

Rudder

Trim Lever

LCD Panel

Power Switch

(Up position: ON)

Hook

(for optional neckstrap)

Edit Keys Edit keys

Aileron Trim Lever

Dial

Elevator Trim Lever

Elevator

/Aileron

Stick

Aileron Dual Rate Switch

Elevator - Flap Mixing or

Airbrake Mixing Switch

Spoiler/CH7 Control

This knob is disabled if aileron differential

is activated.

Carrying Handle

Antenna

Antenna must be fully extended when flying.

Be careful not to bend your antenna when you

collapse or extend it.

LED**

RF

11

This figure shows the default switch assignments for a Mode 2 system as supplied by the factory.

You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position within

the setting menu for the function you wish to move. (Example: move aileron dual rates to switch C

to create triple rates. See p. 35 for details.)

* Power LED blinks to indicate if any mix switches are activated.

** RF LED is green when the transmission link is solid and the radio is transmitting properly.

TRANSMITTER CONTROLS – HELI

SW(B)

VR(A)

VR(B)

SW(A)

SW(F)

SW(E)

VR(D) VR(E)

VR(C)

SW(G)

SW(H)

SW(D)

SW(C)

Dust Cap

(optional CAMPac module plugs in here)

CH8 Knob

Hovering - Pitch Knob

Rudder Dual Rate Switch

Elevator Dual Rate

Switch

Idle-up 3 Switch

Idle-up 1&2

Switch

Throttle/Collective

Pitch & Rudder Stick

Throttle/Collective

Trim Lever

Power

LED*

Rudder

Trim Lever

LCD Panel

Power Switch

(Up position: ON)

Hook

(for optional neckstrap)

Edit Keys Edit keys

Aileron Trim Lever

Dial

Elevator Trim Lever

Elevator

/Aileron

Stick

Aileron Dual Rate Switch

Throttle - Hold Switch

Trainer Switch

CH 7/Governor Switch

Hovering - Throttle Knob

Carrying Handle

Antenna

Antenna must be fully extended when flying.

Be careful not to bend your antenna when you

collapse or extend it.

LED**

RF

12

This figure shows the default switch assignments for a Mode 2 system as supplied by the factory.

You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position within

the setting menu for the function you wish to move. (Example: move aileron dual rates to switch C

to create triple rates. See p. 35 for details.)

* Power LED blinks to indicate if any mix switches are activated.

** RF LED is green when the transmission link is solid and the radio is transmitting properly.

13

PUSH

Ni-Cd battery pack

Charging jack

Battery cover

Battery connector location

Trainer function

/DSC function connector

RF module

To remove, press the tabs together

and gently pull rearwards.

To install, line up the connector pins with

the socket in the rear of the module and

gently snap into position.

Switch/Knob Airplane (ACRO) Sailplane/Glider (GLID) Helicopter (HELI)

A or H Tx.

SWITCH A elevator dual rate elevator dual rate elevator dual rate

down = butterfly on

Switch B rudder dual rate rudder dual rate rudder dual rate

Switch C up = ELE-FLP on up = ELE-FLP on governor/ch 7

center/down = IDLE-DOWN center/down = IDLE-DOWN

down = AIRBRAKE on

SWITCH D aileron dual rate aileron dual rate aileron dual rate

Switch E OR G* landing gear/ch 5 GLID1FLP = gear throttle hold

Switch F OF H* snap roll/trainer trainer trainer/THR-CUT

SWITCH G OR E* none back = SPEED OFFSET idle-up 1 and 2

fwd = START OFFSET

SWITCH H OR F* none none idle-up3/ch 5/gyro

KNOB A flap/ch 6 GLID1FLP: flap HOVERING PITCH

(flap trim if FLAPERON on) (flap trim if FLAPERON on)

GLID2FLP: camber

(flap trim if FL-AIL off)

KNOB B ch 8 ch 8 ch 8

KNOB C spoiler/ch 7 spoiler/ch 7 HOVERING THROTTLE

(disabled if AIL-DIFF on) (disabled if AIL-DIF on)

SLIDER D none GLID1FLP: ch 5 none

SLIDER E none none none

*On the 9CH transmitters, the TOP LEFT SWITCHES are spring-loaded and 3-position; on the 9CA, those switches are on the right side. For consistency,

the switch position’s designation remains the same (upper left is F, etc), but the functions are moved to match the switch type.

NOTE: If you need to remove or replace the transmitter battery, do not pull on its wires to remove it. Instead,

gently pull on the connector's plastic housing where it plugs into the transmitter.

SWITCH ASSIGNMENT TABLE

• The factory default functions activated by the switches and knobs for a Mode 2 transmitter are shown below.

• Most 9C functions may be reassigned to non-default positions quickly and easily.

• Basic control assignments of channels 5-9 are quickly adjustable in AUX-CH (see pp. 39). For example, the channel 5

servo, which defaults to SWITCH E for retract use, can easily be unassigned (NULL) to allow for easy use as a second

rudder servo in a mix, or to a slider or dial for bomb door or other control.

• Note that most functions need to be activated in the programming to operate.

• Mode 1 transmitter functions are similar but reverse certain switch commands. Always check that you have the desired

switch assignment for each function during set up.

Receiver Aircraft (ACRO) Helicopter (HELI)

Output and

Channel Glider (GLID1FLP/GLID2FLP)

1 ailerons/right aileron1/combined right flap & aileron1 aileron (cyclic roll)

2 elevator elevator (cyclic pitch)

3 throttle throttle

4 rudder rudder

5 spare/landing gear/left aileron1,3/combined left flap and spare/gyro

aileron2,3 right flap (GLD2FLP)

6 spare/ flap(s)/combined left flap and aileron2 pitch (collective pitch)

7 spare/left aileron1 spare/governor

8 spare/second elevator servo4/mixture control spare

9 spare spare

14

1Aileron Differential mode (AIL-DIFF). (See p. 47).

2Flaperon mode. (See p. 45).

3Using Second Aileron option, second aileron servo output is sent to channels 5 and 6 to allow use of a 5-channel receiver.

( AIL-2) (See p. 47)

4AILEVATOR (dual elevator) mode. (See p. 49).

CHARGING THE Ni-Cd BATTERIES

Charging Your System’s Batteries

1. Connect the transmitter charging jack and airborne Ni-Cd batteries to the transmitter and receiver connectors of the charger.

2. Plug the charger into a wall socket.

3. Check that the charger LED lights.

The initial charge, and any charge after a complete discharge,

should be at least 18 hours to ensure full charge. The batteries

should be left on charge for about 15 hours when recharging the

standard NR-4J, NR4F1500 and NT8S600B Ni-Cd batteries.

We recommend charging the batteries with the charger

supplied with your system. Note that the use of a fast charger

may damage the batteries by overheating and dramatically

reduce their lifetime.

You should fully discharge your system’s Ni-Cd batteries periodically to prevent a condition called memory. For

example, if you only make two flights each session, or you regularly use only a small amount of the batteries capacity, the

memory effect can reduce the actual capacity even if the battery is fully charged. You can cycle your batteries with a commercial

cycling unit*, or by leaving the system on and exercising the servos by moving the transmitter sticks until the transmitter shuts

itself off. Cycling should be done every four to eight weeks, even during the winter or periods of long storage. Keep track of the

batteries capacity during cycling; if there is a noticeable change, you may need to replace the batteries.

*Note that the 9C transmitter system has electronic protection from overcharging and reverse polarity via a poli-switch.

It does NOT have a diode in the charge circuit and may be discharged/peak charged with the battery in the transmitter.

DO NOT attempt to charge your 8-cell transmitter pack on the 4-cell receiver plug of the wall charger!

Charger

TX: Transmitter charging indicator

RX: Receiver charging indicator

To transmitter charging jack

Receiver Ni-Cd battery

RECEIVER AND SERVO CONNECTIONS

15

Adjusting the length of the non-slip control sticks

You may change the length of the control sticks to make your transmitter more

comfortable to hold and operate. To lengthen or shorten your transmitter’s sticks,

first unlock the stick tip by holding locking piece B and turning stick tip A

counterclockwise. Next, move the locking piece B up or down (to lengthen or

shorten). When the length feels comfortable, lock the position by turning locking

piece B counterclockwise.

Stick lever tension adjustment

You may adjust the tension of your sticks to provide the feel that you prefer for flying. To adjust your springs, you’ll have

to remove the rear case of the transmitter. First, remove the battery cover on the rear of the transmitter. Next, unplug the

battery wire, and remove the battery and RF module from the transmitter. While you are removing the RF module, pay

attention to the location of the pins that plug into the back of the module. Next, using a screwdriver, remove the four screws

that hold the transmitter’s rear cover in position, and put them in a safe place. Gently ease off the transmitter’s rear cover.

Now you’ll see the view shown in the figure above.

Using a small Phillips screwdriver, rotate the adjusting screw for each stick for the desired spring tension. The tension

increases when the adjusting screw is turned clockwise.

When you are satisfied with the spring tensions, reattach the transmitter's rear cover. Check that the upper printed circuit

board is on its locating pins, then very carefully reinstall the rear cover being mindful to guide the RF module connector

pins through the slot in the case. When the cover is properly in place, reinstall and tighten the four screws. Reinstall the

battery, cover and module.

Adjusting Display Contrast

To adjust the display contrast, from the home menu press and hold the End button.

Turn the dial while still holding the menu button:

clockwise to brighten

counterclockwise to darken the display

Let go of the dial and the button.

To reset to default, Hold the END key and press and hold the Dial.

Changing Modes:

Hold down the Mode and End buttons while turning on the Transmitter. The screen reads "STK-MODE". Change this to

the correct mode. Note that this will NOT change the throttle and elevator ratchets, etc. Those are mechanical changes that

must be done by a service center.

Aileron

Elevator

Rudder Stick Stick

Mode 2 transmitter with rear cover removed.

Stick tip A Locking piece B

RADIO INSTALLATION

While you are installing the battery, receiver, switch harness and servos into your model’s fuselage, please pay attention to

the following guidelines:

Use the supplied rubber grommets when you mount each servo. Be sure not to

over-tighten the screws. If any portion of the servo case directly contacts the fuselage or

the servo rails, the rubber grommets will not dampen the vibration, which can cause

mechanical wear and servo failure.

Servo Throw

Once you have installed the servos, operate each one over its full travel and check that the pushrod and output

arms do not bind or collide with each other, even at extreme trim settings. Check to see that each control linkage does

not require undue force to move (if you hear a servo buzzing when there is no transmitter control motion, most likely there

is too much friction in the control or pushrod). Even though the servo will tolerate loads, any unnecessary load applied to

the servo arm will drain the battery pack quickly.

Switch Harness Installation

When you are ready to install the switch harness, remove the switch cover and use it as a template to cut screw holes

and a rectangular hole slightly larger than the full stroke of the switch. Choose a switch location on the opposite side of

the fuselage from the engine exhaust pipe, and pick a location where it can’t be inadvertently turned on or off during

handling or storage. Install the switch so it moves without restriction and snaps from ON to OFF and vice versa.

Receiver Antenna

It is normal for the receiver antenna to be longer than the fuselage.

DO NOT cut or fold it back on itself — cutting or folding changes the electrical length of the antenna and may

reduce range. Secure the antenna to the top of the vertical fin, and let the excess wire length trail behind. You may run the

antenna inside of a non-metallic housing within the fuselage, but range may suffer if the antenna is located near metal or

carbon fiber pushrods or cables. Be sure to perform a range check before flying.

Receiver Notes

When you insert servo, switch or battery connectors into the receiver, note that each plastic housing has an

alignment tab. Be sure the alignment tab is oriented properly before inserting the connector. To remove a connector

from the receiver, pull on the connector housing rather than the wires.

If your aileron servo (or others) are too far away to plug into the receiver, use an aileron extension cord to extend the length

of the servo lead. Additional Futaba extension cords of varying lengths are available from your hobby dealer. Always use an

extension of the proper length. Avoid plugging multiple extensions together to attain your desired length. If distance is greater than

18” or multiple or high current draw servos are being used, use Futaba Heavy-Duty servo extensions.

Receiver Vibration and Waterproofing

The receiver contains precision electronic parts. Be sure to avoid vibration, shock, and temperature extremes.

For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing materials. It is also a good idea

to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the bag with a rubber band before

wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver, you may experience intermittent

operation or a crash. If in doubt, send the receiver for service.

Wood screw

Rubber grommet

Brass eyelet

Servo mount

or rail

16

Range Testing Your R/C System

Please note that different systems demonstrate different range checks and the same system will range check differently in different

conditions. Also, the receiver antenna's installation affects the range test -- exiting the top of the model is ideal.

This is a brief explanation of range test. For more in-depth specifics on receiver antenna mounting, additional checks if

unsatisfactory rage is demonstrated, range checking with gasoline powered engines, etc, please see our F.A.Q. page at

www.futaba-rc.com.

• Leave the transmitter's antenna retracted and be sure both batteries are fully charged.

• Position the aircraft away from wires, other transmitters, etc.

Test one - engine/motor off, minimum of 100 ft. range

• Have a friend view the model but not hold it, engine off. (People conduct signals, too!)

• Walk away from the model, working all controls constantly. Stop when the servos jitter significantly (a jitter here and

there is normal), control movement stops (PCM), or you lose control altogether.

• Measure the distance. If greater than 100 feet, great! Proceed to Test 2. Less than 100 feet of range check means you

need more information to determine if your system is safe to fly. Please see our web site or call support for additional

tests to perform before flying your system.

• Repeat with friend holding the model. Note any differences.

Test two - engine/motor on

• Repeat the test with the model's engine running and with someone holding the model. If a decrease of more than 10%

is noted, research and resolve the cause of interference prior to flying your model.

What your fully operational system demonstrates is the normal range for your system in those conditions. Before every flying

session, it is critical that you perform a range check. It is also required by the AMA Safety Code. If you notice a significant

decrease in range with fully charged batteries, do not attempt to fly.

Aircraft (fixed wing and helicopter) Frequencies

17

72 MHz band

Ch. MHz Ch. MHz

11 72.010 36 72.510

12 72.030 37 72.530

13 72.050 38 72.550

14 72.070 39 72.570

15 72.090 40 72.590

16 72.110 41 72.610

17 72.130 42 72.630

18 72.150 43 72.650

19 72.170 44 72.670

20 72.190 45 72.690

21 72.210 46 72.710

22 72.230 47 72.730

23 72.250 48 72.750

24 72.270 49 72.770

25 72.290 50 72.790

26 72.310 51 72.810

27 72.330 52 72.830

28 72.350 53 72.850

29 72.370 54 72.870

30 72.390 55 72.890

31 72.410 56 72.910

32 72.430 57 72.930

33 72.450 58 72.950

34 72.470 59 72.970

35 72.490 60 72.990

50 MHz Band (Amateur Radio Operator “HAM” license required)

Ch. MHz Ch. MHz

00 50.800 01 50.820

02 50.840 03 50.860

04 50.880 05 50.900

06 50.920 07 50.940

08 50.960 09 50.980

Installing your frequency number flag:

It is very important that you display your

transmitting channel number at all times. To install your

flag, peel off the channel number’s backing sheet, and carefully

stick the numbers to both sides of the number holder. Now you

can snap the number holder onto the lower portion of the

antenna as shown in the figure — use the clip that fits more

snugly on your antenna. You may wish to cut off the other,

unused clip on the other side of the flag.

The following frequencies and channel numbers may be used for flying aircraft in the United States:

TRANSMITTER DISPLAYS & BUTTONS

When you first turn on your transmitter, a confirmation double beep sounds, and the screen shown below appears. Before

flying, or even starting the engine, be sure that the model type and name appearing on the display matches the model that

you are about to fly! If you are in the wrong model memory, servos may be reversed, and travels and trims will be wrong,

leading to an immediate crash.

Edit buttons and Start-up Screen (appears when system is first turned on):

MODE/PAGE BUTTON: (key)

Press and hold MODE BUTTON for one second to open programming menus. Press MODE BUTTON to switch between

BASIC and ADVANCE menus.

END BUTTON: ( key)

Press END BUTTON to return to previous screen. Closes functions back to menus, closes menus to start-up screen.

SELECT/CURSOR BUTTONS: ( key)

Press SELECT/CURSOR BUTTON to scroll through and select the option to edit within a function.

Press SELECT/CURSOR BUTTON to page up/page down within BASIC or ADVANCE menu.

Turn Dial:

Turn DIAL clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll through functions within each menu.

Turn DIAL clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll through choices within an option of a function (for example, to

select which switch controls dual/triple rates).

Press Dial:

Press DIAL to select the actual function you wish to edit from the menu.

Press DIAL and hold one second to confirm major decisions, such as the decision to: select a different model from

memory, copy one model memory over another, trim reset, store channel position in FailSafe, change model type, reset

entire model. System will ask if you are sure. Press DIAL again to accept change.

18

WARNING & ERROR DISPLAYS

An alarm or error indication may appear on the display of your transmitter for several reasons, including when the

transmitter power switch is turned on, when the battery voltage is low, and several others. Each display has a unique sound

associated with it, as described below.

MODEL SELECTION ERROR: Warning sound: 5 beeps (repeated 3 times)

The MODEL SELECTION warning is displayed when the transmitter attempts to load a model memory from a memory module

(optional CAMPac) that is not currently plugged into the transmitter. When this occurs, model No. 01 is automatically loaded.

Do not fly until the proper model is loaded into memory! Reinsert the memory module, and

recall the desired setup using the model select function.

LOW BATTERY ERROR: Warning sound: Continuous beep until transmitter is powered off.

The LOW BATTERY warning is displayed when the transmitter battery voltage drops below 8.5V.

THIS IS NOT AN “OK TO FLY” to this level! This is a warning that the radio is about to shut off.

Land your model as soon as possible before loss of control due to a dead battery.

MIXER ALERT WARNING: Warning sound: 5 Beeps (repeated until problem resolved or overridden)

The MIXER ALERT warning is displayed to alert you whenever you turn on the transmitter with any of the

mixing switches active. This warning will disappear when the offending switch or control is deactivated.

Switches for which warnings will be issued at power-up are listed below:

ACRO:Throttle cut, idle-down, snap roll, airbrake GLID:Butterfly, Start and Speed mixing HELI:Throttle cut, throttle hold, idle-up

If turning a switch OFF does not stop the mixing warning: When the warning does not stop even when the mixing switch

indicated by the warning display on the screen is turned off, the functions described previously probably use the same

switch and the OFF direction setting is reversed. In short, one of the mixings described above is not in the OFF state. In

this case, reset the warning display by pressing both SELECT BUTTONS simultaneously. Then change one of the switch

settings of the mixings duplicated at one switch.

BACKUP ERROR: Warning sound: 4 beeps (repeated continuously)

The BACKUP ERROR warning occurs when the transmitter memory is lost for any reason. If this occurs, all of the data will

be reset when the power is turned on again.

Do not fly when this message is displayed — all programming has been erased and is not

available. Return your transmitter to Futaba for service.

MEMORY MODULE INITIALIZE DISPLAY

This warning appears when an (optional) CAMPac memory module is used in the transmitter for the first time. When the

MODE BUTTON is pressed, initialization of the module begins, after which the memory module can be used. Once the

module is initialized, the display will not appear again.

The 9C CANNOT convert data from other radio types (ie. 8U, 9Z). Installation of a CAMPac with data from

another radio type will result in reinitialization of the CAMPac and loss of all data.

RF MODULE WARNING: Warning sound: A single long beep. The single beep lets you know that the RF module has been

removed from the transmitter, or is not being read properly. The green RF light also goes out.

19

AIRCRAFT (ACRO) MENU FUNCTIONS

Please note that all BASIC menu functions are the same for airplanes (ACRO), sailplanes (GLID1FLP/2FLP), and helicopters

(HELISWH1/SWH2/SWH4/SR-3/SN-3). The glider BASIC menu does not include IDLE-DOWN or THR-CUT; the helicopter

BASIC menu includes additional features (swashplate adjustment and throttle/pitch curves and revo for Normal flight mode)

that are discussed in the Helicopter section.

Map of ACRO BASIC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Quick Guide to Setting up a 4-channel Airplane . . . .22

ACRO BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

MODEL Submenu: MODEL SELECT, COPY and NAME . .25

PARAMETER Submenu: TYPE, MODUL, ATL, AIL2,

& RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Servo REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

END POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Idle Management: IDLE DOWN and THR-CUT . . . . . . . .33

Dual/Triple Rates and Exponential (D/R,EXP) . . . . . .35

TIMER Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Auxiliary Channel assignments and

CH9 reverse (AUX-CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

TRIM and SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

SERVO Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe (F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Wing types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

FLAPERON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

FLAP TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Aileron Differential (AIL-DIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Using a 5-channel receiver: AIL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

ELEVON (see tail types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Tail types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

ELEVON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Twin Elevator Servos (AILEVATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . .49

V-TAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

SNAP ROLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Mixes: definitions and types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

ELEV-FLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

AIRBRAKE/BUTTERFLY (crow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

THROTTLE-NEEDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

THROTTLE DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Linear, Prog. mixes 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Curve, Prog. mixes 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

20

21

MAP OF ACRO BASIC FUNCTIONS

ACRO Basic Menu

End

Mode/Page To enter the Basic Menu, press the

Mode key for one second.

( for one second)

(Startup screen)

(Basic Menu 1/2)

Select

(Cursor)

To return to the Startup screen, press the

End key.

(Basic Menu 2/2)

Turn the Dial clockwise or counterclockwise to

highlight function in Menu screen. Then press the

Dial to choose that function.

Press Select/Cursor keys to page up and down through the 2 pages of

screens in each menu. Note that all functions which have more than one

page have a <1/2> indicator in the upper right hand corner to indicate

page 1 of 2 or page 2 of 2.

Press Mode/Page key to toggle back

and forth between BASIC and

ADVANCE menus.

Mode/Page

Mode/Page Select

End Selection

Cursor Down

Cursor Up

Dial Left

Dial Right

Dial Right or Left

Press Button

Switch Up

Switch at Center

Switch Down

Stick Up

Stick Right

Stick Down

Stick Left

Turn Knob Right

Turn Knob Left

A QUICK GUIDE: GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC 4-CHANNEL AIRCRAFT

This guide is intended to help you get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, and to give you

some ideas and direction in how to do even more than you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all

programming pages: a big picture overview of what we accomplish; a “by name” description of what we're doing to help acquaint

you with the radio; then a step-by-step instruction to leave out the mystery when setting up your model.

For additional details on each function, see that function's section in this manual. The page numbers are indicated in the

goals column as a convenience to you.

See p.21 for a legend of symbols used.

GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE

Prepare your aircraft. Install all servos, switches, receivers per your model's instructions.

Turn on transmitter then receiver; adjust all linkages so surfaces are nearly centered.

Mechanically adjust all linkages as close as possible to proper control throws.

Check servo direction.

Make notes now of what you will need to change during programming.

22

Name the model.

P. 25.

[Note that you do not need to do

anything to "save” or store this data.

Only critical changes such as a MODEL

RESET require additional keystrokes to

accept the change.]

Reverse servos as needed for proper

control operation.

P. 31.

Adjust Travels as needed to match

model's recommended throws (usually

listed as high rates). P. 32.

Open the BASIC menu, then open the

MODEL submenu.

Go to MODEL NAME.

Input aircraft's name.

Close the MODEL submenu.

In the BASIC menu, open (servo)

REVERSE.

Choose desired servo and reverse its

direction of travel. (Ex: reversing

rudder servo.)

From BASIC menu, choose END POINT.

Adjust the servo's end points.

(Ex: throttle servo)

Close the function.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

as needed to highlight MODEL.

to choose MODEL.

to NAME.

(First character of model's name is highlighted.)

to change first character.

When proper character is displayed,

to move to next character.

Repeat as needed.

to return to BASIC menu.

4 steps to REVERSE.

to choose REVERSE.

to CH4: RUDD.

so REV is highlighted.

Repeat as needed.

2 steps to END POINT.

to choose END POINT.

to THROTTLE.

THROTTLE STICK.

until carb barrel closes as desired.

THROTTLE STICK.

until throttle arm just opens carb

fully at full THROTTLE STICK.

Repeat for each channel as needed.

With digital trims you don’t shut the engine off with THROTTLE TRIM. Let's set up IDLE-DOWN and “throttle cut” (THR-CUT) now.

GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE

23

Set up IDLE-DOWN.

P. 33.

IDLE-DOWN slows the engine's idle for

landings, sitting on the runway, and

maneuvers such as spins. The normal

(higher idle) setting (when IDLE-DOWN

is off) is for engine starting, taxi, and

most flight maneuvers, to minimize

chance of a flame-out.

From the BASIC menu, choose IDLE-DOWN.

Activate and adjust IDLE-DOWN.

Optional: change switch command from

C center-and-down to any other switch.

Close the Function.

5 steps to IDLE-DOWN.

to choose IDLE-DOWN.

to OFF.

C to center position. Screen now

reads ON.

to RATE.

to increase rate until engine idles

reliably but low enough to sit still.

(Not needed in this example.)

THR-CUT shuts the engine off completely

with the flip of a switch. P. 33.

(NOTE: DO NOT assign IDLE-DOWN

and THR-CUT to both positions of a 2-

position switch. See IDLE-DOWN for

details.)

Set up dual/triple rates and

exponential (D/R,EXP).

P. 38.

(Note that in the middle of the left

side of the screen is the name of the

channel AND the switch position you

are adjusting. Two or even THREE

rates may be set per channel by

simply choosing the desired switch

and programming percentages with

the switch in each of its 2 or 3

positions.)

From the BASIC menu, choose THR-CUT.

Activate, assign SWITCH and adjust.

Close the function.

From the BASIC menu, choose

D/R,EXP.

Choose the desired control, and set the

first (Ex: high) rate throws and

exponential.

to THR-CUT.

to choose THR-CUT.

to OFF. toSW.

to C.

to POSI. to DOWN.

to RATE. C to down position.

THROTTLE STICK.

until throttle barrel closes

completely.

5 steps to D/R,EXP.

to choose D/R,EXP.

A to up position.

to CH:.

to choose CH>2 (elevator).

[note the screen reads ELEV (UP)]

to D/R.

ELEVATOR STICK.

to set desired “UP” percentage.

ELEVATOR STICK.

as needed to adjust “DOWN”

percentage (normally set the same as down.)

to EXP.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE

24

Where next?

Set the second (low) rate throws and

exponential.

Optional: change dual rate switch

assignment. Ex: elevator to switch G

(9CA) or E (9CH) with 3 positions.

A to down position.

to D/R.

Repeat steps above to set low rate.

to SW. to G or E.

G or E to center position.

Repeat steps above to set 3rd rate.

(Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)

TRAINER p. 40.

Multiple wing and/or tail servos: see wing types and tail types, p. 44, 48.

Elevator-to-flap, Rudder-to-aileron, flap-to-elevator, and other programmable

mixes p. 53.

Retractable Gear, Flaps on a Switch, Smoke systems, kill switches, and other

auxiliary channel setups. p. 39.

A LOOK AT THE RADIO'S FUNCTIONS STEP BY STEP

MODEL submenu: includes three functions that manage model memory: MODEL SELECT, MODEL COPY and MODEL NAME.

Since these functions are all related, and are all basic features used with most models, they are together in the MODEL

submenu of the BASIC menu.

MODEL SELECT: This function selects which of the 8 model memories in the transmitter

(or 6 in the optional CAMPac) to set up or fly. For clarity the model's name and an image

of its type are indicated after its number. (Each model memory may be of a different

model type from the other memories.)

Note: If you are using the optional CAMPac, your choices in MODEL SELECT and MODEL

COPY will include 9-14, which are the model memories in the CAMPac. You do not have to

COPY from the CAMPac to the transmitter prior to working with that model memory.

GOAL: STEPS: INPUTS:

NOTE: When you choose a new model in the

MODEL SELECT function, if the new model is set to

the other modulation, you must cycle the transmitter

power to change modulations. If you do not cycle

the power, the modulation type will flash on the

home screen to remind you. You are still

transmitting on the other modulation until you affect

this change.

Model type

¥ACRO (aircraft)

¥GLID (glider)

¥HELI (helicopter)

25

Select Model #3.

NOTE: This is one of several functions

for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Open BASIC menu, then open MODEL

submenu.

Choose Model #3.

Confirm your change.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

if required to MODEL.

to 3.

for 1 second.

sure? displays.

Confirm proper modulation of new

model memory.

Where next?

If PPM or PCM are flashing in the upper right hand corner, then the new model is set

for the other receiver type. Turn the transmitter off/on to change the modulation.

NAME the model: see p. 25.

Change MODEL TYPE (aircraft, heli, glider): see p. 28.

Change modulation [FM (PPM) or PCM]: see p. 28.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT for throttle management: see p. 33.

FLASHING

MODEL COPY: copies the current model data into another model memory (in the transmitter or the optional DP-16K

CAMPac). The name of the model memory you are copying into is displayed for clarity.

Notes:

• Any data in the model copied to will be written over and lost, including name, type and

modulation. It cannot be recovered.

• To copy from one 9C to another, use an optional CAMPac. (Note: The model may be

flown directly off the CAMPac's memory, not requiring re-copying into the 2nd

transmitter. For more information on CAMPacs, please see p. 10.)

• With the trainer FUNC mode it is not necessary to have the student radio contain the

setup of the aircraft. See TRAINER, p. 40.

Data cannot be converted from 8U or 9Z memory types. If a CAMPac is installed into the 9C that has data on it from

another radio type, it will have to be re-initialized which deletes all data.

Examples:

• Start a new model that is similar to one you have already programmed.

• Copy the current model data into another model memory as a backup or before experimenting with new settings.

• Store your model data to an optional CAMPac prior to sending your radio for service.

• Edit a copy of your model’s data to fly the model in different conditions (ie. Helicopter using heavier night blades; glider

in extreme wind; airplane model at extreme altitudes).

• Store your model data to an optional CAMPac to use or copy the settings into a friend's 9C (A or H) transmitter so he

can fly your model or use it as a starting point for setting up a similar model.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

*Radio emits a repeating "beep" and shows progress on screen as the model memory is being copied. Note that if the power switch is turned off prior

to completion, the data will not be copied.

26

Copy model 3 into model 5.

NOTE: This is one of several

functions for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Where next?

Open the BASIC menu, then open

MODEL submenu.

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory. (Ex: 3)

Go to MODEL COPY and choose the

model to copy into. (Ex: 5)

Confirm your change.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to MODEL.

If SELECT does not indicate 3,

use MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

to 5.

for 1 second.

sure? displays. *

SELECT the copy you just made: see p. 25.

Rename it (it is currently named exactly the same as the model copied): see p. 25.

Turn off the transmitter and remove the CAMPac for safekeeping or insertion

into another radio to fly.

MODEL NAME: assigns a name to the current model memory. By giving each model a name that is immediately

recognizable, you can quickly select the correct model, and minimize the chance of flying the wrong model memory which

could lead to a crash.

Adjustability and values:

• Up to 8 characters long.

• Each character may be a letter, number, blank, or a symbol.

• The default names assigned by the factory are in MODEL-xx format (MODEL-01 for

first model memory, etc.)

NOTE: When you COPY one model memory over another, everything is copied, including the model's name. Similarly, if you

change MODEL TYPE or do a MODEL RESET, the entire memory is reset, including MODEL NAME. So the first thing you will want

to do after you COPY a model, change its type, or start from scratch, is rename the new copy to avoid confusion.

If using multiple frequency modules to be able to transmit on multiple channels, we recommend using the last 2 characters

to indicate the receiver's channel for clarity. For more information on frequency transmission, see p. 8.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

27

Name model 3 “Cap-232_” (where

the underline represents a blank

space.)

Where next?

Open MODEL submenu.

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory. (Ex: 3)

Go to NAME and change the first

character. (Ex: M to C)

Choose the next character to change.

Repeat the prior steps to complete

naming the model.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to MODEL.

If SELECT does not indicate 3,

perform MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

to C.

to a (note: lower case is available)

Repeat.

Change the MODEL TYPE to glider or helicopter: see p. 28.

Change the receiver modulation setting from PPM to PCM or vice versa: see p. 28.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

PARAMETER submenu: sets those parameters you would likely set once, and then not disturb again.

Once you have selected the correct model you wish to work with, the next step is

setting up the proper parameters for this specific model:

• What is the model's type?

• What type is the receiver’s modulation [PPM (FM) or PCM]?

• Does the model have a normal throttle on channel 3 or do you need full range trim on

channel 3 (ATL)?

• If you are utilizing either of the twin aileron functions, do you need to tell the radio

your receiver is only 5 channels?

First it is important to clear out any old settings in the memory from prior use, using the MODEL RESET.

MODEL RESET: completely resets all data in the individual model you have currently selected. Don't worry - there is no way

you can accidentally delete all models in your radio with this function. Only a service center can completely reset your

radio's entire memory at once. To delete each model in your radio's memory (for example when selling), you must SELECT

each model, reset that memory, then go SELECT the next memory, etc.

Note that when you COPY one model memory into another or change the model's type, you need not delete all existing data

first by using this function. COPY completely overwrites anything in the existing model memory, including MODEL NAME.

The MODEL TYPE function overwrites all data except name and MODUL.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

*Radio emits a repeating “beep” and shows progress on screen as the model memory is being copied. Note that if the power switch is turned off prior

to completion, the data will not be copied.

28

Reset model memory 1.

NOTE: This is one of several

functions for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Where next?

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory. (Ex: 1)

Open PARAMETER submenu.

Reset the Memory.

Confirm the change.

Close.

On home screen, check model name

and number on top left. If it is not

correct, use MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

to PARAMETER.

for one second.

sure? displays. *

Now that the memory is reset, name has returned to the default (Ex: MODEL-01).

NAME the model: p. 25.

COPY a different model into this memory: p. 25.

SELECT a different model to edit or delete: p. 25.

Change the MODEL TYPE to glider or helicopter: see p. 28.

Change the receiver modulation from FM (PPM) to PCM or vice versa: see p. 28.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

MODEL TYPE: sets the type of programming used for this model.

The 9C has 8 model memories, which can each support:

• one powered aircraft (ACRO) memory type (with multiple wing and tail configurations. See twin aileron servos, twin

elevator servos, ELEVON, and V-TAIL for further information.);

• two glider wing types (again with multiple tail configurations). See Glider MODEL TYPE for details, p. 68;

• five helicopter swashplate types, including CCPM. See Helicopter MODEL TYPE for details, p. 77.

Before doing anything else to set up your aircraft, first you must decide which MODEL TYPE best fits this particular aircraft.

(Each model memory may be set to a different model type.) If your transmitter is a 9CA, the default is ACRO. If it is a 9CH,

the default is HELI(SW1).

ACRO is the best choice for most powered airplanes, but in some circumstances, GLID2FLP may be a better choice. ACRO

is usually a better choice because of functions it offers that the GLID types do not:

• ACRO adds:

• SNAP-ROLL

• AILEVATOR (twin elevator servo support)

• AIRBRAKE (a more assignable version of BUTTERFLY)

• For fuel-powered airplanes: IDLE-DOWN, THR-CUT, THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing and THROTTLE DELAY programming.

• But ACRO lacks:

• START and SPEED OFFSETS

• Built-in programming which defaults outboard ailerons as flaperons and sets up two flap servos to

also operate as flaperons for a 4-trailing-edge-surface wing.

If you are using a glider or heli MODEL TYPE, please go to that chapter now to select the proper model type and support

your model setup. Note that changing MODEL TYPEresets all data for the model memory, including its name.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

29

Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your

model. Ex: ACRO.

[NOTE: This is one of several functions

that requires confirmation to make a

change. Only critical changes (see p xxxx

for listing) require additional keystrokes

to accept the change.]

Open the BASIC menu, then open the

PARAMETER submenu.

Go to MODEL TYPE.

Select proper MODEL TYPE.

Ex: ACRO.

Confirm the change. Close PARAMETER.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

then to highlight PARAMETER.

to choose PARAMETER.

to TYPE.

to ACROBATIC. for 1 second.

sure? displays. to confirm.

to return to BASIC menu.

Modulation select (MODUL): sets the type of modulation transmitted.

The modulation of your receiver will determine whether you utilize PPM or PCM setting in MODUL during transmission.

Note that you have to turn your transmitter off and back on before a modulation change becomes effective. If you choose

PCM, be sure you understand and set the FailSafe (F/S) settings as you intended (see p. 43). Both modulations transmit on

FM waves, use the FM trainer cord, and the FM module.

PCM = Pulse Code Modulation PPM = Pulse Position Modulation (also called FM).

Adjustability:

• PCM setting for all Futaba PCM1024 receivers, regardless of number of channels (ie.

R138DP/148DP/149DP, R309DPS);

• PPM setting for all Futaba compatible (negative shift) FM receivers, regardless of

number of channels (ie. R127DF, R123F, R148DF).

• Not compatible with PCM512 receivers such as the R128DP and R105iP.

• Not compatible with other brands of PCM receiver, or positive shift FM receivers

(ie. JR, Airtronics).

• You do not need a different module in the radio to transmit in PCM. For more

information on PCM, please see our website.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Second aileron (AIL-2) (ACRO/ GLID1FLP only): changes the default choice for dual aileron servos from channels 6

(FLAPERON) or 7 (AIL-DIF) to channels 5 and 6. This allows you to utilize these 2 great functions while utilizing a 5-channel

receiver. NOTE: Changing AIL-2 only tells the system which servos to utilize if FLAPERON or AIL-DIF is activated. You still

must activate that function and complete its setup. For details on twin aileron servos, including using AIL-2, see p. 47.

NOTE: When you change models in MODEL SELECT, if the

new model is set to the other modulation type, you must

cycle the transmitter power to change modulations. The

modulation will flash on the home screen to remind you

until you do so. See p. 25, MODEL SELECT, for details.

30

Change model 1 from FM (PPM) to

PCM.

Where next?

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory (Ex: 1)

Open BASIC menu, then open

PARAMETER submenu.

Go to MODUL and change setting.

Close menu and cycle power.

On home screen, check model name and

number on top left and the modulation

on top right. If it is not the correct

model, use MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

to PARAMETER.

to MODUL. to PCM.

cycle power flashes on screen

POWER OFF. POWER ON.

Now that the model is in the proper modulation, the 9C should communicate

with the receiver. If it does not, confirm the modulation/frequency of the

receiver. [Futaba receivers ending in F use PPM (ex: R127DF), ending in P use

PCM (ex: R149DP)].

Change MODEL TYPE to glider/helicopter: see p. 28.

Set F/S settings for when PCM receiver sees interference: see p. 43.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Adjustable travel limit (ATL): makes the channel 3 TRIM LEVER (THROTTLE TRIM) effective only at low throttle, disabling the trim

at high throttle. This prevents pushrod jamming due to idling trim changes. This function defaults to ON. If you are not using

channel 3 for throttle, you may want trim operation the same as on all other channels. To do so, set ATL to OFF.

If you need the ATL to be effective at the top of the stick instead of the bottom, reverse the THR-REV setting. Note that this

affects all models in the radio, not just the model you are currently editing. See servo REVERSE, p. 31.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Servo reversing (REVERSE): changes the direction an individual servo responds to a CONTROL STICK motion. [Since channel 9 is

switch only (and only available with a PCM receiver), its servo REVERSE is in the AUX-CH control screen with its switch assignment.

See p. 39.] For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the section on SWASH AFR (p. 79) before reversing any servos.

Except with CCPM helicopters, always complete your servo reversing prior to any

other programming. If you use pre-built ACRO/GLID functions that control multiple

servos, such as FLAPERON or V-TAIL, it may be confusing to tell whether the servo needs

to be reversed or a setting in the function needs to be reversed. See the instructions for

each specialized function for further details.

Always check servo direction prior to every flight as an additional precaution to confirm proper model memory,

hook ups, and radio function.

NOTE: THR-REV is a special function that reverses the entire throttle control, including moving the trim functionality to the

Stick’s upper half. To use THR-REV, turn off the transmitter, hold down the MODE and END keys, turn on. CURSOR DOWN to

THR-REV and turn the DIAL to REV. Turn the transmitter off and back on. This change affects all models in the radio.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

31

Change ATL from ON to OFF for

battling robot, tank, airbrake and

other channel 3 uses.

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open

PARAMETER submenu.

Go to ATL and Change. (Ex: to OFF)

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

to PARAMETER.

to OFF.

Set up ELEVON for tank-style control, throttle/steering on one STICK: see p. 48.

Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT to adjust channel 3 servo at low-stick: see p. 33.

Reassign auxiliary channels 5-9 (ex: from dial to switch/slider): see p. 39.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Reverse the direction of the elevator

servo.

Where next?

Open REVERSE function.

Choose proper channel and set

direction. (Ex: ELE REV)

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to REVERSE.

to ELE.

to REV.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Set up flight timers: see p. 38.

Set up trainer functions: see p. 40.

End Point of servo travel adjustment (END POINT, also called EPA): the most flexible version of travel adjustment

available. It independently adjusts each end of each individual servo’s travel, rather than one setting for the servo that

affects both directions. Again, for CCPM helicopters, be sure to see SWASH AFR (see p. 79) prior to adjusting end points.

Adjustability:

• Can set each direction independently.

• Ranges from 0% (no servo movement at all) to 140%. At a 100% setting, the throw of

the servo is approximately 40° for channels 1-4 and approximately 55° for channels 5-8.

• Reducing the percentage settings reduces the total servo throw in that direction.

Examples:

• Adjust the throttle high end to avoid binding at the carburetor, and low end to allow for proper carburetor closure.

• Adjust flap so up travel is only sufficient for straight and level flight trimming, with full down travel.

• END POINT may be adjusted to 0 to keep a servo from moving one direction, such as flaps not intended to also operate

as spoilers.

• Retract servos are not proportional. Changing END POINT will not adjust the servo.

END POINT adjusts only the individual servo. It will have no effect on any other servo that is operated in conjunction with

this servo via mix or preset programming such as FLAPERON, AILEVATOR, etc. This is so that each individual servo can be

carefully fine-tuned to avoid binding and other conflicts. To adjust the total travel of a function such as FLAPERON, make

the adjustments in that function's controls. For CCPM helicopters, adjust the total travel of the function, such as collective

pitch, in SWASH AFR.

Adjust the linkage or the END POINT? It is nearly always best to adjust your linkages to get as close as possible prior to

utilizing END POINT. The higher the END POINT setting, the better position accuracy and the more servo power available at

nearly any position (except if using digital servos). Higher END POINT values also mean longer travel time to reach the

desired position, as you are utilizing more of the servo's total travel. (For example, using 50% END POINT would give you

only half the steps of servo travel, meaning every click of trim has twice the effect and the servo gets there in half the time).

• end point (and moving the linkage) = torque, accuracy, but transit time to get there.

• end point (instead of adjusting linkages) = travel time, but torque, accuracy.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

*You can reset to the initial values by pressing the DIAL for one second.

32

Decrease the flap servo throw in the

upward direction to 5% to allow

trimming of level flight only and down

travel to 85% to prevent binding.

Where next?

Open END POINT function.

Choose proper channel and set

direction. (Ex: flap up 5%)

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to END POINT.

to flap.

flap control [default is VR(A)].

to 5%.*

VR(A). to 85%.

Go to SERVO display to confirm desired end result: see p. 42.

Move auxiliary channels 5-9 to different dial(s)/switch(es)/slider(s): see p. 39.

Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT to slow/cut the engine: see p. 33.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Set up flight timers: see p. 38.

Set up trainer functions: see p. 40.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 44.

Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 49.

Engine idle management: IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT: functions which work with the digital THROTTLE TRIM to provide a

simple, consistent means of engine operation. No more fussing with getting trim in just the right spot for landings or take

offs! For additional engine adjustments, see THROTTLE-NEEDLE (p. 56) and THROTTLE DELAY (p. 57).

If your throttle cut and idle down are working at the wrong end of your travel — full throttle not idle — then your

THR REV feature has been reversed. Please see page 31 for instructions.

IDLE-DOWN (ACRO only): lowers the engine idle for: sitting on the runway prior to take off, stalls and spins, and landings.

The normal idle setting is a little higher for easier starts and safe flights with less risk of dead sticks.

Important note: The IDLE-DOWN function is not normally used when starting the

engine, and its accidental operation may keep your engine from starting. The 9C

warns that IDLE-DOWN is on when the transmitter is turned on. Be sure to turn off the

function, or override the warning by pressing both 2 SELECT/CURSOR keys in unison

and holding for 1 second if you intended the function to be on.

This may be assigned to any switch/position. Some modelers accidentally assign IDLE-DOWN to one side of a switch

and THR-CUT to the other. There is no “normal” setting to start the engine. By default IDLE-DOWN is set to SWITCH

C center and down. This works well with THR-CUT also on SWITCH C down. The SWITCH up is normal flight/starting,

center for slower maneuvers/landing, and down to cut the engine. If you assign IDLE-DOWN or THR-CUT to the springloaded

TRAINER SWITCH F (9CA) or H (9CH), then use the trainer function, you may risk loss of throttle control or

deadstick for your student.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

*Normally a value of 10- 20%. Secure the fuselage, engine running. Set the THROTTLE STICK to idle. Adjust the IDLE-DOWN rate while flipping the

switch ON and OFF until the desired idle is achieved. Be sure to throttle up periodically to allow the engine to “clean out” and idle reliably.

33

Decrease the throttle setting at idle

with the flip of a switch for spins and

landings.

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open IDLEDOWN

function.

Activate the function.

With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust

the rate until engine idles as desired.*

Optional: change switch assignment.

Choose desired switch and position.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to IDLE-DOWN.

THROTTLE STICK.

until engine idles as desired.

to SW. to desired SWITCH.

to POSI. to desired position.

THR-CUT: see p. 34.

Throttle cut (THR-CUT) (ACRO/HELI): provides an easy way to stop the engine by flipping a switch (with THROTTLE STICK

at idle). The movement is largest at idle and disappears at high throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. In HELI, there is an

additional setting, THR. See p. 82.

The switch's location and direction must be chosen. It defaults to OFF to avoid

accidentally assigning it to a switch, which might result in an unintentional dead stick in

flight. Please see for IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT on p. 33.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

*Normally, a setting of 10-20% is sufficient. Viewing the carburetor barrel until it fully closes is adequate to get an approximate setting; then test with

engine running to confirm.

34

Decrease the throttle setting (at idle) to

stop the engine with the flip of a switch.

(Note that you MUST assign a switch.

The default is NULL. We recommend

SWITCH C in the down position, with

IDLE-DOWN programmed to SWITCH C

in the center and down positions.)

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open

THR-CUT function.

Activate the function. Choose desired

switch, and the position which

activates the function.

With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust the

rate until the engine consistently shuts

off but throttle linkage is not binding.*

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to THR-CUT.

to MIX.

to SW. to C.

to POSI. to DOWN.

C to down position.

THROTTLE STICK.

to RATE. until shuts off.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 40.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 44.

Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 49.

Dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): assigns adjusted rates and exponential.

Dual/Triple Rates: reduce/increase the servo travel by flipping a switch, or

(ACRO/GLIDER) they can be engaged by any stick position. Dual rates affect the control

listed, such as aileron, not just a single (ex: channel 1) servo. For example, adjusting

aileron dual rate will affect both aileron servos when using FLAPERON or AIL-DIF, and both

aileron and elevator servos’ travel when using AILEVATOR or ELEVON or a CCPM helicopter.

Activation:

• Any SWITCH, A-H. If you choose a 3-position switch, then that dual rate instantly becomes a triple rate (see example).

• Stick position (ACRO/GLIDER). (Ex: On rudder you normally use only the center 3/4 of the stick movement except

for extreme maneuvers such as snaps/spins/stalls. As long as your RUDDER STICK does not exceed 90% of maximum

throw, the rudder responds at your lower rate, allowing small, gentle corrections. When the stick passes 90% (ie. stall

turn), the rudder goes to high rate’s 90%, which is a MUCH higher amount of travel than your low rate at 89%.)

Ex: EPA = 1” Low Rate = 50% High Rate = 100%

At 89% Low Rate = .45”

At 90% High Rate = .9”

Adjustability:

• Range: 0 - 140% (0 setting would deactivate the control completely.)

Initial value=100%

• Adjustable for each direction(ACRO/GLIDER). (ie. Up/down,

left/right) (Ex: Most models fly upright without any elevator trim,

but require some down elevator when inverted just to maintain

level flight. By increasing the down travel by the amount required

to hold the model inverted, the model now has equal travel

available from level upright or level inverted.)

Exponential: changes the response curve of the servos relative to the stick position to make flying more pleasant. You

can make the servo movement less or more sensitive around neutral for rudder, aileron, elevator, and throttle (except HELI

type - use THROTTLE CURVE instead).

Why use expo? Many models require a large amount of travel to perform their best tricks. However, without exponential,

they are “touchy” around neutral, making them unpleasant to fly and making small corrections very difficult. Additionally,

by setting different exponentials for each rate, you can make the effectiveness of small corrections similar in each rate, as

in our example below.

The best way to understand exponential is to try it:

• Having made no changes yet in the D/R,EXP screen, move SWITCH D to “down” (toward the AILERON STICK).

• Cursor down to EXP and dial to 100%.

• Move SWITCH D up. Hold the AILERON STICK at ¼ stick and move SWITCH D down.

• Notice how much less travel there is.

• Go to 3/4 stick and repeat. Notice how the travel is much closer, if not identical.

High Rate

High Rate

High Rate Low Rate

Low Rate

100% 100%

100% 30% 0%

90% 90% 0%

35

Adjustability:

• More sensitive around neutral. (positive exponential, see example)

• Less sensitive around neutral. (negative exponential, see example)

• Adjustable for each direction. (ACRO/GLIDER)

For throttle, exponential is applied at the low end to help nitro and gasoline engines have a linear throttle response, so that

each 1/4 stick increases engine RPM 25% of the available range. (In most engines this ranges from 5-60%.)

Special note for helicopters: Helicopter model types have just a single rate for each switch position rather than a rate for

each side of the servo’s travel per switch position. Additionally, setting the D/R,EXP for each switch position requires

cursoring back to the No. setting and changing the switch position here. Just flipping the switch does not affect the screen

setting, allowing dual rates to be assigned with idle-up and other features on certain switches, and does not require putting

the model in that condition to make modifications.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

36

Set up dual rates and exponential in a

HELI model.

Open D/R,EXP.

Choose channel.

Choose first switch position.

Set rate and exponential (Ex: high rate

= 95%, 0% exponential.)

Go to 2nd switch position and set rate

and exponential.

Optional: if using a 3 position switch,

set 3rd rate.

Optional: assign dual rates to have

one for each condition.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to D/R,EXP.

to desired channel.

to UP.

to 95%.

Confirm 0% EXP.

to DN.

Repeat above.

to CT.

Repeat above.

to COND.

Repeat steps above to adjust for each

condition.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

37

Set up aileron triple rates on SWITCH C

with travel settings of 75% (normal),

25% (slow roll) and 140% (extreme

aerobatics) and exponential settings of

0%, +15%, and -40% respectively.

NOTE: This normal rate has no

exponential so it has a very linear,

normal feel. This slow roll rate has

positive exponential (the opposite of

what most people normally use),

which makes the servos more

responsive around center. This makes

the servos feel the same around center

in the normal and low rates, but still

gives a very slow roll rate at full stick.

The 3D rate (extreme aerobatics) has a

very high distance of travel B nearly

twice that of the normal rate.

Therefore, using a very high negative

exponential setting softens how the

servos respond around center stick.

This makes the servos respond

similarly around center stick for a

more comfortable feel.

Many modelers like to set up all 3

triple rates on a single 3-position

switch, creating a “slow and pretty

mode”, a “normal mode”, and a “wild

stunts mode” all with the flip of a

single switch. To do so, simply set up

rates for all 3 controls and assign all 3

to the same 3-position switch.

Where next?

Open D/R,EXP function.

Choose the channel to change

(Ex: aileron is already selected)

Optional: change switch assignment.

Confirm switch is in desired position

and set rate. (Ex: up = high rate, 75%).

Move SWITCH to 2nd rate position and

set this particular rate.

(Ex: center = low rate, 25%).

Optional: if using a 3 position

SWITCH, move SWITCH to 3rd position

and set this rate (Ex: down = 3D rate,

140%).

Optional: instead of using a switch,

you can set high rates to be triggered

when the stick moves past a certain

point. To test this, set aileron high

rate to 25%. Now set switch

assignment to AIL (90%). Move

AILERON STICK to the right and notice

the huge jump in travel after the stick

moves 90% of its distance.

Set each rate’s EXP.

(Ex: 0%, +15%, -40%)

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to D/R,EXP.

to desired channel.

to C.

C to up position.

AILERON STICK. to 75%.

AILERON STICK. to 75%.

C to center position.

AILERON STICK. to 25%.

AILERON STICK. to 25%.

C to down position.

AILERON STICK. to 140%.

AILERON STICK. to 140%.

C to up position.

AILERON STICK. to 25%.

AILERON STICK. to 25%.

to SW. to ail (90%).

AILERON STICK and watch

screen graph. See the change?!

You may also change the trigger point

by holding the stick at the desired point,

then pressing and holding the DIAL.

C to up position.

confirm EXP reads 0.

C to down position.

AILERON STICK. to +15%.

AILERON STICK. to + 15%.

C to center position.

repeat to set low rate expo to -40%.

Set up flight timers: see p. 38.

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 40.

Adjust the sensitivity of the trims: see p. 41.

Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 44.

Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 49.

Set up programmable mixes to meet your specific needs: see p. 53.

www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html for all triple rates on a single switch, etc.

Repeat above steps for elevator and rudder.

TIMER submenu (stopwatch functions): controls two electronic clocks used to keep track of time remaining in a competition time

allowed, flying time on a tank of fuel, amount of time on a battery, etc.

Adjustability:

• Count down timer: starts from the chosen time, displays time remaining. If the time is exceeded, it continues to count

below 0.

• Count up timer: starts at 0 and displays the elapsed time up to 99 minutes 59 seconds.

• Independent to each model, and automatically updates with model change.

• In either TIMER mode, the timer beeps once each minute. During the last twenty seconds, there's a beep each two seconds.

During the last ten seconds, there's a beep each second. A long tone is emitted when the time selected is reached.

• To Reset, choose the desired timer with the SELECT key (while at the startup screen), then press and hold DIAL for 1 second.

• Activation by either direction of SWITCH A-H, by THROTTLE STICK (STK-THR) (Using the THROTTLE STICK is convenient if you

are keeping track of fuel remaining, or for an electric, how much battery is left); or by the power SWITCH (PWRSW).

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

38

Set timer 2 to count down 4-1/2

minutes, being controlled by

THROTTLE STICK position. This is

utilized to keep track of actual

Throttle on time to better correlate

with fuel/battery usage.

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then

open TIMER function.

Go to TIMER<2>.

Adjust time to 4 min. 30 sec., count down.

Assign to THROTTLE STICK and set

trigger point (if timer is to trigger

BELOW this throttle point, so

arrow points down).

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to page 2.

to TIMER.

to 4. to 30.

to SW. 2 steps to STK THR.

to POSI.

THROTTLE STICK to desired

position (Ex: 1/4 stick).

for 1 second to set.

Adjust END POINTs after first flight test: see p. 32.

Adjust auxiliary channel assignments (ex: move flaps to a switch): see p. 39.

Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 40.

Auxiliary channel function (including channel 9 controls) (AUX-CH): defines the relationship between the transmitter

controls and the receiver output for channels 5-9. Also, the CH9 SERVO REVERSE is used to change the CH9 servo direction.

Note that the CH9 functions are only visible in the AUX-CH screen when PCM modulation is selected. The 9th channel is

not supported in FM modulation.

Adjustability:

• channels 5-9 may be assigned to any SWITCH (A-H), slider [VR(D) and VR(E)], or

knob [VR(A-C)] (for example, moving flaps to a switch or slider), but not the

primary control sticks (use programmable mixes to do so, p. 59);

• multiple channels may be assigned to the same switch, slider or knob;

• channels set to “NULL” are only controlled by mixes. (Ex: utilizing 2 channels for 2

rudder servos. See mixes, p. 59.)

Remember that if you assign primary control of a channel to a switch which you later use for other functions (like

dual/triple rates or airbrakes), every time you use that other function you will also be moving the auxiliary channel.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

39

Assign flaps to the right slider [VR(E)]

and set channel 7 to NULL in preparation

to use it as a smoke system control (the

smoke system being activated later by a

throttle-to-ch.-7 mix).

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then

open AUX-CH function.

Choose the channel to change. (ex: ch. 6.)

Change primary control. (ex: to slider.)

Repeat as needed. (ex: ch. 7 to NULL.)

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to page 2.

to Vr-E.

to Ch 7. to NULL.

Programmable mixes: see p. 53.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Adjust SUB-TRIM of auxiliary channel to adjust center SWITCH position: see p. 41.

Adjust END POINTs (sets end points of travel even when using a switch): see p. 32.

TRAINER: for training novice pilots with optional trainer cord connecting 2 transmitters. The instructor has several levels

of controllability.

Adjustability:

• NORM: When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can be

controlled by the student. The set channel is controlled according to any

programming set at the student's transmitter.

• FUNC: When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can be controlled

by the student, controlled according to any mixing set at the instructor's transmitter.

• OFF: The channel set to this mode cannot be controlled by the student even when the TRAINER SWITCH is ON. The set

channel is controlled by the instructor only, even when the TRAINER SWITCH is ON.

• SWITCH: controlled by spring-loaded SWITCH F (9CA) or H (9CH) only. Not assignable.

• Compatibility: The 9C may be master or student with any Futaba FM transmitter compatible with the cord. Simply

plug the optional trainer cord (For 9C series, sold separately) into the trainer connection on each transmitter, and

follow the guidelines below.

Examples:

• When throttle/collective are set to FUNC, 5-channel helicopter practice is possible with a 4-channel transmitter.

• Set up the model in a second transmitter, use NORM mode to quickly and safely check proper operation of all

functions, then allow the student radio to fully fly the model.

• Using NORM mode, set lower throws, different exponentials, even different auxiliary channel settings on the student

radio (if it has these features).

• To ease the learning curve, elevator and aileron may be set to the NORM or FUNC mode, with the other channels set to

OFF and controlled by the instructor.

Precautions:

• NEVER turn on the student transmitter power.

• ALWAYS set the student transmitter modulation mode to PPM.

• BE SURE that the student and instructor transmitters have identical trim settings and control motions. Verify by

switching back and forth while moving the control sticks.

• FULLY extend the instructor's antenna. Collapse the student's antenna.

• Always remove the student transmitter's RF module (if it is a module-type transmitter).

• When the TRAINER function is active, the snap roll function is deactivated. Other functions, such as IDLE-DOWN and

THR-CUT, which have been assigned to the same switch, are not deactivated. Always double check your function

assignments prior to utilizing the TRAINER function.

• When you select a different model, the TRAINER function is deactivated in the current model for safety reasons.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

40

Turn on the TRAINER system and set

up so student has: fully functional

control of aileron and elevator to

support FLAPERON and AILEVATOR;

normal control of rudder to allow

lowered travel; and no throttle

channel control (with the instructor

for safety).

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open

TRAINER function.

Activate TRAINER.

Choose desired channel(s) and proper

training type(s).

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to page 2. to TRAINER.

to OFF.

past AIL and ELE (default OK).

to THR, to OFF.

to RUD, to NORM.

TEST student radio function fully prior to attempting to fly!

Set student 9C to PPM (required regardless of receiver’s modulation): see p. 28.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP) on student 9C: see p. 35.

Reset trims on student 9C: see p. 41.

TRIM submenu: resets and adjust effectiveness of digital trims.

The 9CA has digital trims which are different from conventional mechanical trim sliders.

Each TRIM LEVER is actually a two-direction switch. Each time the TRIM LEVER is

pressed, the trim is changed a selected amount. When you hold the TRIM LEVER, the trim

speed increases. The current trim position is graphically displayed on the start up screen.

The TRIM submenu includes two functions that are used to manage the trim options.

HELI models only: OFFSET is available in the idle ups. If OFFSET is inhibited, adjustment of the TRIM LEVERS will adjust the

trims for all flight conditions. If OFFSET is active, then moving the trims within any one condition will effect only that

condition. See OFFSET, p. 86.

Trim reset (RESET): electronically centers the trims to their default values. Note that the SUB-TRIM settings and the trim

STEP rate are not reset by this command.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Trim step (STEP): changes the rate at which the trim moves when the TRIM LEVER is activated. It may be set from 1 to 40

units, depending on the characteristics of the aircraft. Most ordinary aircraft do well at about 2 to 10 units. Generally larger

trim steps are for models with large control throws or for first flights to ensure sufficient trim to properly correct the model.

Smaller trim steps are later used to allow very fine adjustments in flight.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

41

Reset trims to neutral after having

adjusted all linkages.

NOTE: This is one of several

functions for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open

TRIM submenu.

Request and confirm the reset.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to TRIM.

for 1 second.

Beep sounds.

Adjust SUB-TRIMs: see p. 42.

Adjust trim rate (STEP): see below.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Double the sensitivity (larger step) of

the AILERON TRIM LEVERS for a first

flight of an aerobatic model to ensure

sufficient range to trim the model for

level flight.

Where next?

Open TRIM submenu and choose the

STEP you wish to change. (Ex: aileron)

Adjust the size of the step. (Ex: incr. to 8)

Repeat as desired for other channels.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to TRIM.

to 8.

to ELEV. to new setting.

Repeat as needed.

Adjust sub trims: see p. 42.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

SUB-TRIM: makes small changes or corrections to the neutral position of each servo. Range is -120 to +120, with 0 setting,

the default, being no SUB-TRIM.

The recommended procedure is as follows:

• measure and record the desired surface position;

• zero out both the trims (TRIM RESET menu) and the SUB-TRIMs (this menu);

• mount servo arms and linkages so that the control surface’s neutral is as correct as possible; and

• use a small amount of SUB-TRIM to make fine corrections.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

SERVO display and cycle submenu: displays radio's output to channels 1-8.

The servo submenu includes two features:

• real-time bar-graph display to demonstrate exactly what commands the transmitter is

sending to the servos. (This can be particularly handy in setting up models with

complicated mixing functions, because the results of each stick, lever, knob, switch

input and delay circuit may be immediately seen.); and

• servo cycle function to help locate servo problems prior to in-flight failures.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

We recommend that you center the digital trims before making SUB-TRIM

changes, and that you try to keep all of the SUB-TRIM values as small as

possible. Otherwise, when the SUB-TRIMs are large values, the servo's

range of travel is restricted on one side.

42

Adjust the flap servo’s SUB-TRIM until

its center exactly matches the aileron

servo’s center, as they are to work

together as flaperons.

Where next?

Open BASIC menu, then open

SUB-TRIM.

Choose the channel to adjust, and

adjust until surfaces match. (Ex: flap)

Repeat for other channels.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to SUB-TRIM.

as needed. to each channel,

as needed.

Adjust trim steps: see p. 41.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

View the result of reassigning channel

6 from VR(A) knob to three-position

SWITCH C.

Cycle the channel 6 servo.

Where next?

Complete desired programming function.

(Ex: in AUX-CH, move ch. 6 to SWITCH C)

Open the SERVO function.

Move each control to see exactly how

operating. (Ex: SWITCH C in all positions)

Prepare all servos to be cycled and cycle.

End cycling and close.

See AUX-CH for details. (p. 39.)

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

1 step to SERVO.

C to center position.

Note change in position of ch. 6 servo.

Plug in servos. POWER ON.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Set up desired programmable mixes: see p. 54.

Set up dual aileron servos: see p. 44.

Set up dual elevator servos: see p. 49.

FailSafe (loss of clean signal and low receiver battery) submenu (PCM mode only) (F/S): sets responses in case of loss

of signal or low Rx battery.

FailSafe (F/S): instructs a PCM receiver what to do in the event radio interference is received.

Adjustability:

• Each channel may be set independently.

• The NORM (normal) setting holds the servo in its last commanded position.

• The F/S (FailSafe) function moves each servo to a predetermined position.

• NOTE: the setting of the throttle's F/S also applies to the Battery F/S (see below).

Examples:

• The F/S setting is used in certain competitions to spin the aircraft to the ground prior to flying away and doing potential damage

elsewhere. Conversely, may also be used to go to neutral on all servos, hopefully keeping the plane flying as long as possible.

• Competition modelers often maintain the NORM function so that brief interference will not affect their model's maneuver.

• Set the throttle channel so that the engine idles when there is interference (ACRO). This may give enough time to fly away

from and recover from the radio interference and minimize damage if crashed.

• For helicopters, NORM is typically the safest choice.

• We also recommend setting a gasoline engine's electronic kill switch to the OFF position in the F/S function for safety reasons.

Updating F/S Settings: If you specify a F/S setting, the FailSafe data is automatically transmitted once each two minutes.

When you choose the F/S mode, check that your settings are as desired by turning off the transmitter power switch and

verifying that the servos move to the settings that you chose. Be sure to wait at least two minutes after changing the setting

and turning on the receiver power before turning off the transmitter to confirm your changes have been transmitted.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Battery FailSafe (F/S): a second battery low warning feature (separate from the transmitter low voltage warning). When

the airborne battery voltage drops below approximately 3.8V, the PCM receiver’s battery F/S function moves the throttle

to a predetermined position. When the Battery F/S function is activated, your engine will move to idle (if you haven't set

a position) or a preset position. You should immediately land. You may temporarily reset the Battery F/S function by

moving the THROTTLE STICK to idle. You will have about 30 seconds of throttle control before the battery function

reactivates.

Adjustability:

• NOR F/S setting for throttle results in Battery F/S going to the servo position reached by moving THROTTLE STICK to the

bottom with TRIM LEVER centered;

• POS F/S setting for throttle results in Battery F/S also going to the same throttle servo position as the regular F/S.

If using a 6V (5-cell) receiver battery, it is very likely that your battery will be rapidly running out of charge before

battery FailSafe takes over. It is not a good idea to count on battery FailSafe to protect your model at any time, but

especially when using a 5-cell battery.

43

Change the receiver FailSafe command

for channel 8 (gasoline engine kill

switch) to a preset position.

NOTE: This is one of several functions

for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Where next?

Open the BASIC menu, then open

F/S function.

Choose Channel to change. (ex: Ch. 8)

Set and confirm fail safe command.

Repeat as desired.

Close.

for 1 second. (If ADVANCE, again.)

to F/S.

to Ch 8.

that controls channel 8 to desired

OFF position.

for 1 second to store.

Wait two minutes and confirm F/S settings as described above.

Read below for information on Battery FailSafe.

Adjust END POINTs to gain proper F/S responses if needed: see p. 32.

Adjust SUB-TRIM to gain proper F/S responses if needed: see p. 41.

ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS:

Aircraft wing types (ACRO/GLID):

There are 3 basic wing types in aircraft models:

• Simple. Model uses one aileron servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness into a single receiver channel) and has a tail.

This is the default setup and requires no specialized wing programming.

• Twin Aileron Servos. Model uses 2 aileron servos and has a tail. see Twin Aileron Servos.

• Tail-less model (flying wing). Model uses 2 wing servos working together to create both roll and pitch control.

see ELEVON.

Twin Aileron Servos (with a tail) (ACRO/GLID): Many current generation models use two aileron servos, plugged into two

separate receiver channels. (If your model is a flying wing without separate elevators, see ELEVON, p. 48.)

Benefits:

• Ability to adjust each servo's center and end points for perfectly matched travel.

• Redundancy, for example in case of a servo failure or mid-air collision.

• Ease of assembly and more torque per surface by not requiring torque rods for a single servo to drive 2 surfaces.

• Having more up aileron travel than down travel for straighter rolls – aileron differential. (see glossary for definition.)

• Using the two ailerons not only as ailerons but also as flaps, in which case they are called flaperons.

• Set a negative percentage to reverse the operation of one of the servos.

Options:

• 5-channel receiver? Set up AIL-2 (see p. 47) prior to continuing with FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF.

• FLAPERON:

• Uses CH6 for the second servo (see AIL-2 to use CH5.)

• Allows flap action as well as aileron action from the ailerons.

• Provides FLAP-TRIM function to adjust the neutral point of the flaperons for level flight.

• Also allows aileron differential in its own programming (instead of activating AIL-DIFF).

• Aileron Differential (AIL-DIFF):

• Uses CH7 for the 2nd servo (see AIL-2 to use CH5.)

• Leaves CH6 free for flap operation, such as flaperon and flap action together, in AIRBRAKE. (see p. 55).

• Allows for more up aileron travel than down for straighter rolls.

You will need to choose which is the better choice for your model's setup – FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF. If you need the ailerons

to also operate as flaps, you most likely want to use FLAPERON. If your model has 2 aileron servos and flaps, then AIL-DIFF

is probably the easiest choice. (For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, such as one with 4 wing servos using

full span ailerons and full span flaps, as well as AIRBRAKE/crow and other features, please visit our FAQ at

www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html. Many other setup examples are also available at this location.)

NOTE: Only one of the three wing-type functions (FLAPERON, AIL-DIFF, and ELEVON) can be used at a time. All three

functions cannot be activated simultaneously. To activate a different wing type, the first must be deactivated.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

44

De-activate FLAPERON so that AIL-DIFF

or ELEVON can be activated.

Where next?

Open the FLAPERON function.

De-activate the function.

Close function.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to FLAPERON.

to MIX. to INH.

Set up AIL-DIFF (see p. 47) or ELEVON (see p. 48).

Using FLAPERON (ACRO/GLID):

The FLAPERON mixing function uses one servo on each of the two ailerons, and uses them

for both aileron and flap function. For flap effect, the ailerons raise/lower simultaneously.

Of course, aileron function (moving in opposite directions) is also performed.

Once FLAPERON is activated, any time you program CH6 or “flap” (ie. FLAP-ELEVATOR mixing), the radio commands both

servos to operate as flaps. The amount of travel available as flaps is independently adjustable in FLAPERON. A trimming

feature is also available (see FLAP-TRIM) to adjust both neutral positions together for straight-and-level flight or slight

increases/decreases of the flap angle. END POINT and SUB-TRIM both still adjust each servo individually.

Adjustability:

• Each aileron servo's up travel can be set separate from its down travel, creating aileron differential. (See example).

• Each aileron servo's travel when actuated as a flap is separately adjustable.

• AIL2 can be utilized to use a 5-channel receiver and still have flaperons. NOTE: The AIL2 function only commands the

channel 5 servo to operate with the aileron servo as ailerons, and to obey the primary flap control (travel adjusted in

FLAP-TRIM.) It does not provide full flap mix capability as when using a 6+ channel receiver and channel 6.

NOTE: Activating flaperons only makes the ailerons work as ailerons and tells the radio how far you want them to move

as flaps IF you then activate other programming that moves them as flaps.

FLAP-TRIM is the flap-trimming feature that allows the flaps to move in reaction to the channel 6 control. It is meant only

for trimming the flaps' center but can also be used as full flap control. (See p. 46).

AIRBRAKE is a feature that drops flaperons as flaps, and also compensates with elevator if desired. (See p. 55).

FLAP-ELEVATOR would add elevator mixing into the flap movement from the flap dial after FLAP-TRIM is activated.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

* If you receive an error message that OTHER WING MIXING IS ON, you must deactivate AIL-DIFF or ELEVON. see p. 44.

45

Activate twin aileron servos, FLAPERON.

Input 10% less down travel than up

travel (aileron differential) within the

FLAPERON programming. (Decrease right

aileron’s down travel to 90%, decrease

left aileron's down travel to 90%.)

Adjust total flap travel available to

50% of aileron travel available.

Where next?

Open the FLAPERON function.

Activate the function.

Optional: adjust the up/down travel

separately for the 2 servos.(Ex: 90%

down.)

Optional: adjust the aileron's travel

so they move as flaps. (Ex: each servo

flap travel to 50%.)

Close menu.

for 1 second. (If basic, again.)

to FLAPERON. *

AILERON STICK. to 90%.

AILERON STICK. to 90%.

to 50%.

to -50%.

Set FLAP-TRIM: see p. 46.

Set up AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 55.

Mix flaperon's flap motion to another inboard flap (plugged into aux1): see p. 54.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com/faq/faq-9c.html

Using FLAP-TRIM (camber) to adjust flaperons: (ACRO/GLID)

FLAP-TRIM assigns the primary flaperon control [defaults to VR(A)] to allow trimming in

flight of the flap action of flaperons. (Note: even if FLAP-TRIM is made active with AIL-DIFF,

it will not have any effect. The ONLY function that allows control of the ailerons as flaps

in the AIL-DIFF configuration is AIRBRAKE.) Most modelers use AIRBRAKE, or programmable

mixes, to move the flaps to a specified position via movement of a switch.

FLAP-TRIM may also be used as the primary flap control in flight. By doing so, you can

assign CH6 to a 3-position switch, with a "spoileron", neutral, and "flaperon" position, and even adjust the percentage traveled

as flaperon/spoileron by changing the Flap Trim travel. (Note that there is only one setting, not independent settings for up and

down travel.)

46

Add FLAP-TRIM to allow the model's

ailerons to be trimmed together as

flaps at any time during the flight,

with a maximum travel of 5% of the

total flap travel set in FLAPERON.

Where next?

Open the FLAP-TRIM function.

Adjust the travel available to the

flaperons when turning the CH6 DIAL.

(Ex: 5%).

Optional: Use as total flap control.

Reassign CH6’s primary control in

AUX-CH to your desired flap control.

(Ex: right slider)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to FLAP-TRIM.

to 5%.

to 50%.

to AUX-CH.

to CH6. to Vr-E.

Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 41 and END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 55 and ELEV-FLAP mix: see p. 54.

Mix flaperon's flap movement to an additional inboard flap (plugged into aux1):

see p. 54.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

The function is automatically activated with FLAPERON; however, the default travel is 0.

Using Aileron Differential (AIL-DIFF) (ACRO/GLID):

Aileron differential is primarily used on 3-servo wings,

with one servo operating inboard flap(s) on CH6, and

AIL-DIFF controlling proper aileron operation of 2 aileron

servos, plugged into CH1 and CH7. The ailerons can

not be moved like flaps when using AIL-DIFF, except if

using AIRBRAKE (see p. 55.) (Note that even if you make

FLAP-TRIM active while using AIL-DIFF, it will not have

any effect. ONLY AIRBRAKE controls the ailerons as

flaps in the AIL-DIFF configuration .)

*If you receive an error message that OTHER WING MIXING IS ON, you must deactivate ELEVON or FLAPERON. see p. 44.

Using Twin Aileron Servos with a 5-channel receiver, AIL-2 (ACRO/GLID):

AIL-2 allows FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF with a 5-channel receiver. AIL-2 only tells the radio

that you are using CH5 and CH6, not CH6 or CH7, as the second servo in FLAPERON or

AIL-DIFF. You still must activate and set up the FLAPERON/AIL-DIFF function.

Note that selecting CH5&6 does NOT free up CH6 to be used for other functions when using a receiver with more than 5

channels. Both 5 and 6 are dedicated to the FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF programming. [This is beneficial with four aileron servos

that need to have their end points or sub-trims set separately. CH1, CH5 and CH6 are already fully set up to operate as

ailerons. Mix CH7 or CH8 (the second aileron servo on the other side) into ailerons to function properly.]

Aircraft tail types (ACRO/GLID):

CH7 CH1

47

Activate twin aileron servos using AIL-DIFF.

Note that the function defaults to no

difference in down travel vs. up

travel. If you want differential travel,

simply adjust each side. (Ex: 90%)

Where next?

Open the AIL-DIFF function.

Activate the function.

Optional: adjust the up/down travel

separately for the 2 servos. (Ex:

adjust to 100%.)

Close menu.

for 1 second. (If basic, again.)

to AIL-DIFF. *

AILERON STICK. to 90%.

AILERON STICK. to 90%.

Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 41 and END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 55.

Set up ELEV-FLAP mix (only if model has a flap servo in CH6): see p. 54.

Set up SNAP-ROLL Function: see p. 51.

View additional model setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

Adjust the second aileron servo output

from CH6or7 to channels CH5&6.

Allows twin aileron servo operation

with a 5-channel receiver.

Where next?

Open the PARAMETER submenu.

Select AIL-2 and change to CH5&6.

Close menu.

for 1 second. (If advance, again.)

to PARAMETER.

to CH5&6.

Finish setting up FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF. see Twin Aileron Servos: p. 41.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

There are 4 basic tail types in aircraft models:

• Simple. Model uses one elevator servo and one rudder servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness). This is the default.

• Dual Elevator servos. Model uses 2 elevator servos. see AILEVATOR (ACRO) see p. 49.

• Tail-less model. Model uses 2 wing servos together to create roll and pitch control. see ELEVON (ACRO/GLID). see p. 48.

• V-TAIL. Model uses 2 surfaces, at an angle, together to create yaw and pitch control. see V-TAIL (ACRO/GLID). see p. 50.

Note: Only one of the three tail-type functions (AILEVATOR, V-TAIL, and ELEVON) can be used at a time. The radio provides

a warning and will not allow the activation of another tail type until the first is deactivated. An error message of OTHER

WING MIXING IS ON will display. (See the wing type example on page 44.)

Using ELEVON (ACRO/GLID): used with delta wings, flying wings, and other tailless aircraft that combine aileron and

elevator functions, using two servos, one on each elevon. The aileron/elevator responses of each servo can be adjusted

independently. This is also popular for ground model use, such as tanks, which drive two motors together for forward, and

one motor forward/one backward for turning.

Adjustability:

• Requires use of CH1 and CH2.

• Independently adjustable aileron travel allows aileron differential.

• Independently adjustable elevator travel allows for differences in up vs. down travel.

NOTE: If ELEVON is active, you cannot activate FLAPERON, AIL-DIFF, or AILEVATOR. An error message OTHER WING MIXING

IS ON displays and you must deactivate the last function to activate ELEVON.

NOTE: Be sure to move the elevator and aileron sticks to full deflection during setup. If large travels are specified, when

the AILERON and ELEVATOR STICKS are moved at the same time the controls may bind or run out of travel.

(For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, such as “space shuttle” style controls, please visit

www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html. Many other setup examples are also available at this location.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

48

Activate ELEVON.

Adjust aileron down travel to 90% of

up travel, creating aileron differential.

Where next?

Open the ELEVON function.

Activate the function.

Optional: adjust the up/down travel

separately for the servos as ailerons.

(Ex: down to 90%.)

Optional: adjust the elevator travel of

each servo. (Ex: right servo elev. travel

to 98%, left to 105%.)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to ELEVON.

AILERON STICK. to 90%.

AILERON STICK to 90%.

to 98%.

to 105%.

Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 41 and END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html

Dual Elevator Servos (with a rudder) (AILEVATOR) (ACRO/GLID): Many models use two elevator servos, plugged in separate

receiver channels. (Flying wings without a separate aileron control use ELEVON. V-shaped tail models use V-TAIL, p. 50.

Benefits:

• Ability to adjust each servo's center and end points for perfectly matched travel.

• Ease of assembly, not requiring torque rods for a single servo to drive 2 surfaces.

• Elevators acting also as ailerons for extreme stunt flying or more realistic jet

flying (optional).

• Redundancy, for example in case of a servo failure or mid-air collision.

Adjustability:

• CH2 and CH8 only. (With programmable mixing, could utilize CH5 as the 2nd elevator servo.

See www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html for examples.) THROTTLE-NEEDLE uses CH8 and cannot be active simultaneously.

• Direction of each servo's travel may be reversed in REVERSE or the set percentages may be reversed here.

• Elevator travels independently adjustable (both directions and percent).

• Optional action as ailerons (defaults to 50% response). This response cannot be activated/deactivated in flight.

Setting AIL1 and 2 to 0 disables this feature. Note: if you want this, but on/off with a switch, set AIL1 and 2 to 0 here, and use 2

mixes – AIL-to-ELEV and AIL-to-AUX2 (link/trim off, assign a switch)– to get aileron action from the elevator servos when the

assigned switch is on. See p. 59.

(For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, such as one with 4 wing servos, full span ailerons/flaps, AIRBRAKE/crow etc,

please visit www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html. Many other setups are also available.)

The AILEVATOR mixing function uses one servo on each of the two elevators, and combines the elevator function with the

aileron function (unless aileron travel is set to 0). For aileron effect, the elevators are raised and lowered opposite of one

another in conjunction with the ailerons.

Once AILEVATOR is activated, unless you zero out the aileron figures (see below), any time you move your ailerons or any

programming moves your ailerons (ie. RUDDER-AILERON mixing), the radio automatically commands both elevator servos

to also operate as ailerons. To deactivate this action, simply set the 2 aileron travel settings to 0 in the AILEVATOR function.

This way the elevators will work only as elevators.

If using the elevators as ailerons as well, be sure to move the elevator/aileron stick while checking the servo motions. If a

large travel is specified, when the sticks are moved at the same time, controls may bind or run out of travel.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

49

Activate twin elevator servos.

Deactivate the elevator-acting-asailerons

portion of this function.

Note: Depending upon your model's

geometry, you may need to reverse one

servo or set a negative percentage here.

Where next?

Open the AILEVATOR function.

Activate the function.

Optional: adjust up/down travel

when operating as ailerons. (Ex: 0.)

Optional: adjust total elevator travel

of each servo. (Ex: right servo

elevator travel to 98%, left to 96%.)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to AILEVATOR.

to 0%.

to 0%.

to 98%.

to 96%.

Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 41 and END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up Twin Aileron Servos: see p. 44.

Set up AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 55.

Using V-TAIL (ACRO/GLID):

V-TAIL mixing is used with v-tail aircraft so that both elevator and rudder functions

are combined for the two tail surfaces. Both elevator and rudder travel can be

adjusted independently on each surface.

NOTE: If V-TAIL is active, you cannot activate ELEVON or AILEVATOR functions. If one of these functions is active, an error message

will be displayed and you must deactivate the last function prior to activating ELEVON. see the wing example on page 44.

NOTE: Be sure to move the elevator and rudder sticks regularly while checking the servo motions. If a large value of travel

is specified, when the sticks are moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of travel. Decrease the travel

until no binding occurs.

Adjustability:

• Requires use of CH2 and CH4.

• Independently adjustable travels allow for differences in servo travels.

• Rudder differential is not available. (To create rudder differential, set RUD1 and 2 to 0, then use two programmable

mixes, RUD-ELE and RUD-RUD, setting different percents for up and down. These are your new rudder travels. Trim and

link off, switch assignment null so you can’t accidentally turn off rudder. see PROG.MIX, p. 59.)

(For details on setting up a complex plane, such as one with a v-tail AND a separate steerable nosewheel, please visit our

FAQ at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html. Many other setup examples are also available at this location.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

50

Activate V-TAIL.

Adjust left elevator servo to 95%

travel to match to right servo's travel.

Where next?

Open the V-TAIL function.

Activate the function.

optional: adjust the travels separately

for the 2 servos as elevators. (Ex: set

left to 95%.)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to V-TAIL.

to 95%.

Repeat as necessary for other servos.

Adjust END POINTs: see p. 41 and SUB-TRIMs: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Set up ELEV-FLAP mix: see p. 54.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

Snap Rolls at the flick of a switch (SNAP-ROLL) (ACRO/GLID):

This function allows you to execute snap rolls by flipping a switch, providing the

same input every time. It also removes the need to change dual rates on the 3

channels prior to performing a snap, as SNAP-ROLL always takes the servos to the

same position, regardless of dual rates, inputs held during the snap, etc.

Note: Every aircraft snaps differently due to its C.G., control throws, moments, etc.

Some models snap without aileron; others snap on elevator alone. Most models snap

most precisely with a combination of all 3 surfaces. Additionally, rate of speed and

acceleration when using the snap switch will affect how the model snaps. For

information on using gyros with airplanes for cleaner precision maneuvers, such as

snaps and spins without over rotation, see p. 64.

Adjustability:

• Travel: Adjust the amount of elevator, aileron and rudder travel automatically applied.

• Range: -120 to +120 on all 3 channels. Default is 100% of range of all 3 channels.

• Directions: Up to 4 separate snaps may be set up, one for each of the 4 direction choices (up/right, down/right,

up/left, down/left). Each snap is fully adjustable regarding travels and direction on each of the 3 channels.

Note: for simplicity, the radio refers to snaps that use “UP” or positive elevator as “U” or “UP” snaps. This is more commonly

referred to as a positive or inside snap. “D” or “DOWN” snaps are more commonly referred to as negative or outside snaps.

• R/U = Right positive R/D = Right negative L/U = Left positive L/D = Left negative snap roll

• Assignment of the 2 switches (DIR-SW1/2) to change snap directions is fully adjustable and optional. If you wish to

have only one snap, leave the switches as NULL. (If assigned, SW1 = up/down, SW2 = left/right.)

• Caution: it is critical that you remember if you assigned switches to select the three additional snaps.

• For example, assign SWITCH A for U/D snap direction, and then also assign SWITCH A for elevator dual rates. While

flying on elevator low rate (SWITCH A DOWN) you pull your snap SWITCH. The model will:

• use the throws set in the snap programming (the low rate elevator has no effect); and

• be a down (negative/outside) snap, not an up (positive/inside) snap.

• Both of these may come as a great surprise and risk crashing if you are unprepared.

• Safety Switch (SAFE-MOD): a safety may be set up on your landing gear SWITCH, preventing accidental snap rolls while

the landing gear is down. The safety switch is turned on and off with the landing gear SWITCH.

• ON: the safety mechanism is activated when the landing gear SWITCH is in the same position as at the time this

feature is changed to ON. Snap rolls will not be commanded even if the snap roll SWITCH is turned on with the gear

SWITCH in this position. When the landing gear SWITCH is moved to the opposite position, snap rolls may be

commanded.

• OFF: activates the safety mechanism in the opposite position from the ON function.

• FREE: the safety mechanism is completely turned off. Snaps can be commanded regardless of the gear SWITCH POSITION.

Note: The location of the safety switch always follows channel 5. If channel 5 is reassigned to switch C, for example, switch

C is now the safety. If channel 5 is nulled or used as the second aileron servo, the safety function will not be available.

• Trainer Safety: SNAP-ROLL is automatically disabled when the trainer function is activated.

51

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

52

Activate SNAP-ROLL. Adjust elevator

travel to 55%, rudder travel to 120% in

the right/up snap. Activate SAFE-MOD

so snaps can not be performed when

gear is down.

Adjust rudder travel in the left/down

snap to 105%.

(Note: using negative percents can

change any of the 4 snaps’ directions.

For example, change snap 1 to

“down” by changing the elevator

percent to –100%.)

Where next?

Open the SNAP-ROLL function.

Activate the function.

Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex:

elevator to 55%, rudder to 120%.)

Optional: Activate SAFE-MOD. [Ex: ON

when SWITCH E (9CA) or G (9CH) is

down, meaning snap function is

deactivated when that switch is in the

down position.]

Optional: Assign switches to up/down and

left/right. (Ex: Change to the left/down

snap and adjust rudder to 105%.)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to SNAP-ROLL.

to OFF or ON.

to 55%.

to 120%.

E or Gup. to ON.

snap switch.

Notice mix reading is still OFF.

E or G down.

Notice MIX reading changes to ON.

to A.

to B.

A down B down.

Repeat steps above to set percentages.

Set up programmable mixes: see p. 53.

View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

MIXES: the backbone of nearly every function

Mixes are special programs within the radio that command one or more channels to act together with input from only one

source, such as a stick, slider or knob.

There are a variety of types of mixes.

Types:

• Linear: Most mixes are linear. A 100% linear mix tells the slave servo to do exactly what the master servo is doing,

using 100% of the slave channel’s range to do so. An example is FLAPERON – when aileron stick is moved, the flap servo

is told to move exactly the same amount. A 50% linear mix would tell the slave servo, for example, to move to 50% of

its range when the master’s control is moved 100%. (see p. 54.)

• Offset: An OFFSET mix is a special type of linear mix. When the mix is turned on (usually a flip of a switch), the slave

servo is moved a set percent of its range. An example of this is AIRBRAKE – moving flaps, flaperons, and elevator all to

a set position at the flip of a switch. (see p. 55.)

• Curve: Curve mixes are mostly used in helicopters, but may also be used in airplanes and gliders. An example is THROTTLENEEDLE

mixing, where the in-flight needle’s servo is moved, changing the mixture, as the throttle servo is moved. (see p. 56.)

• Delay: Delay mixes are part of a few very special functions that make the servo move to its desired range more slowly.

THROTTLE DELAY (simulates turbine engines, p. 57) and the elevator delay in AIRBRAKE are two examples of this

(see p. 55). DELAY in HELI (see p. 87) is another example that slows the servo movement to the trim settings for the other

conditions. The 9C does not offer fully programmable delay mixes.

Essentially every feature in the radio’s programming is really a mix, with all assignments/programming set up and ready

to use. Additionally, the 9C ACRO and GLID programs both provide 5 linear and 2 curve fully-programmable mixes (HELI

provides two linear and one curve) that allow you to set up special mixes to resolve flight difficulties, activate additional

functions, etc.

Let’s look quickly at a few examples that are features we’ve already covered. This may help to clarify the mix types and

the importance of mixes.

Additional examples:

• Exponential is a preprogrammed curve mix that makes the servos’ response more (+) or less (-) sensitive around center

stick (works in conjunction with dual rate, a linear mix that adjusts the total range). see D/R,EXP, p. 35.

• IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT are two OFFSET pre-programmed mixes. These tell the throttle servo, when below a certain point, to

move toward idle an additional set percentage to help close the carburetor. see p. 33.

• ELEV-TO-FLAP mixing is a pre-programmed linear mix to move the flaps proportionally to elevator control, helping the model

loop even tighter than it can on elevator alone. (see p. 54.)

• THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing is a curve mix (like PROG.MIX 6 and 7) for proper in-flight needle setup. (see p. 56.)

• THROTTLE DELAY mixing is a pre-programmed delay mix that slows down the response of the CH3 servo. (see p. 57.)

Next, we'll get an in-depth look at some pre-programmed mixes (mixes whose channels are predefined by Futaba for

simplicity) we’ve not covered yet, and last, look at the fully-programmable mix types.

53

ELEV-FLAP mixing (ACRO/GLID):

ELEV-FLAP mixing is the first pre-programmed mix we’ll cover. This mix makes the

flaps drop or rise whenever the ELEVATOR STICK is moved. It is most commonly used

to make tighter pylon turns or squarer corners in maneuvers. In most cases, the flaps

droop (are lowered) when up elevator is commanded.

Adjustability:

• Rate: –100% (full up flap) to +100 (full down flap), with a default of +50% (one-half of the flap range is achieved

when the ELEVATOR STICK is pulled to provide full up elevator.)

• Switch: fully assignable, or null, so mix is always active.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

54

Activate ELEV-FLAP mixing. Adjust

flap travel to 0% flaps with negative

elevator (push) and 45% flaps with

positive elevator.

Set switch assignment to null so the

mix is always active.

Where next?

Open the ELEV-FLAP function.

Activate the function.

Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex: 0%,

to 45%.)

Optional: change SWITCH control. Ex:

change to NULL so flaps only respond

to ELEVATOR STICK input.

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to ELEV-FLAP.

ELEVATOR STICK. to 0%.

ELEVATOR STICK. to45%.

to NULL.

Adjust flaperons’ flap travel available (FLAPERON): see p. 45.

Set up AIRBRAKE (crow/butterfly): see p. 55.

Set up programmable mixes (ex: FLAP-ELEVATOR): see p. 59.

View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

AIRBRAKE/BUTTERFLY (crow) mixing (ACRO/GLID):

Like FLAPERON and AILEVATOR, AIRBRAKE is one function that is really made up of a series of pre-programmed mixes all

done for you within the radio. AIRBRAKE (often called “crow” or BUTTERFLY - see GLID, p. 69 for details) simultaneously

moves the flap(s) (if installed), twin ailerons (if installed) and elevator(s), and is usually used to make steep descents or to

limit increases in airspeed in dives.

This function is often used even on models without flaps as an easy way to use the flaperons and FLAP-ELEVATOR mixing together.

Adjustability:

• Activation: Proportional by moving the THROTTLE STICK, or set positions by flipping SWITCH C (ACRO only).

• Lnear (Inversely proportional to THROTTLE STICK): provides a proportional increase in amount of AIRBRAKE action as

THROTTLE STICK is lowered (when SWITCH C (ACRO) or A (GLID) is in down position). Provides gradually more

AIRBRAKE as you slow the engine. Includes selectable stick position where AIRBRAKE begins, gradually increasing to

the same setting as MANUAL as the THROTTLE STICK is lowered. If you would like to have the airbrake be directly

proportional to throttle stick, you will need to reverse the THR-REV function. Note that this changes the throttle stick

direction for all mmodels. See page 31 for instructions.

• MANUAL (ACRO only): Provides AIRBRAKE response immediately upon switch movement, going to a pre-set travel on

each active channel without any means of in-flight adjustment. (MANUAL option not available in GLID modes.)

• Delayed reaction: You can suppress sudden changes in your model's attitude when AIRBRAKE is activated by setting

the delay (DELAY-ELE) item, to slow down the elevator response, allowing the flaps/ailerons/elevator to all reach their

desired end point together. A setting of 100% slows the servo to take approximately one second to travel the

prescribed distance.

• Adjustable in flight: Using the elevator trim lever in flight will adjust the elevator settings in your airbrake rather than

adjusting the model's actual elevator trim. This allows easy adjustment for any ballooning while in flight. When the

airbrake switch is moved to off the trims are again adjusting the normal elevator trim.

• Channels controlled: Elevator(s), twin ailerons and flap(s) may be set independently in AIRBRAKE, including set to 0

to have no effect.

• Twin aileron servos: If FLAPERON, ELEVON and AIL-DIFF functions are inhibited, then AIL1 and AIL2 settings will have

no effect.

• If FLAPERON is active, the travel of the ailerons can be independently adjusted for the servos plugged into CH1

and CH6. The flap choice has no effect on the flaperons.

• If AIL-DIFF is active, then CH1 and CH7 may be independently adjusted.

• Normally both ailerons are raised equally in AIRBRAKE, and the elevator motion is set to maintain trim when

the ailerons rise. Different amounts may be set for each aileron to correct for torque reactions and other unique

characteristics of the model.

Be sure you understand what dropping ailerons will do when in AIRBRAKE/BUTTERFLY. Along with creating an

enormous amount of drag (desirable for spot landings), this also creates "wash-in", a higher angle of attack where

the ailerons are, and encourages tip stalling. If you are using this for aerobatic performance and not "sudden stops",

consider raising the ailerons and dropping the flaps instead as shown in the diagram above.

• Twin elevator servos:

• If AILEVATOR is active, the AIL1 and AIL2 settings still only affect FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF servos, NOT the

elevator servos. (they would have the AIL3 and AIL4 settings.)

55

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

56

Activate AIRBRAKE on a FLAPERON

model. Adjust the flaperon travel to 75%,

with negative elevator (push) of 25%.

Where next?

Confirm FLAPERON is active.

Open the AIRBRAKE function.

Activate the function.

Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex:

Ailerons each 75%, Elevator –25%.)

Optional: delay how quickly the

elevator servo responds.

Optional: change the mixing from full

amount upon switch to proportional to

the THROTTLE STICK’s proximity to idle.

Close menu.

see FLAPERON instructions.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to AIRBRAKE.

Switch C in up position.

to OFF.

to 75%.

to –25%.

to 75%.

to 25%.

to Lnear (0%).a

THROTTLE STICK to desired 0 point.

for 1 sec., until beeps

(display changes if new setting is different

from prior setting).

Adjust flaperons’ total flap travel available (FLAPERON): see p. 44.

Set up ELEV-FLAP mixing: see p. 54.

Set up programmable mixes, for example, FLAP-ELEVATOR: see p. 59.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing (ACRO/HELI):

THROTTLE-NEEDLE is a pre-programmed mix that automatically moves an in-flight

mixture servo (CH8) in response to the THROTTLE STICK inputs for perfect engine tuning

at all throttle settings. This function is particularly popular with contest pilots who fly in

a large variety of locations, needing regular engine tuning adjustments, and requiring

perfect engine response at all times and in all maneuvers. Also popular to minimize

flooding at idle of inverted engine installations or installations with a high tank position.

Not needed for fuel injection engines, which do this automatically.

Adjustability:

• Five-point curve allows adjustment of engine mixture at varied throttle settings.

• The in-flight mixture servo must connect to receiver CH8.

• In-flight mixture servo may also be used as a second servo for tuning a twin.

• Throttle cut feature also moves the in flight needle servo.

• The CH8 knob adjusts the high throttle mixture (may be deactivated. see AUX-CH).

• Because both use CH8, this function cannot be used simultaneously with AILEVATOR.

• An acceleration (ACCE) function (ACRO only) helps the engine compensate for sudden, large amounts of throttle input

by making the mixture suddenly richer, then easing it back to the proper adjustment for that throttle setting. This

function requires some adjustment to best fit your engine and your flying style. Adjust engine’s response until no

hesitation occurs on rapid throttle input.

• Separate curves are available (HELI only) for normal, idle-ups 1 and 2 combined, and idle-up 3. Immediately below

THR-NEEDLE the radio displays the curve you are editing; ex: >NORML; and then which condition is currently active by

your switches ex: (ID1/2). Note that you can edit the mix for a different condition without being in that condition, to

allow editing without having to shut off the helicopter’s engine every time. Be sure you are editing the proper curve

by checking the name after the > and not the one in parentheses.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

57

Activate THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing.

Adjust the points as follows to

resolve a slight lean midrange

problem:

1: 40%

2: 45%

3: 65%

4: 55%

5: 40%

Where next?

Open the THROTTLE-NEEDLE function.

Activate the function.

HELI only. Select the condition to edit.

Adjust the travels as needed to match

your engine by slowly moving the

stick to each of the 5 points, then

adjusting the percentage at that point

until the engine is properly tuned.

ACRO only. Optional: increase mixture

when throttle is applied rapidly-ACCE.

(see above for details.)

HELI only: set curves for other

conditions.

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to THROTTLE-NEEDLE.

as needed.

THROTTLE STICK. to 40%.

until POINT 2 is highlighted.

to 45%.

to POINT 3. to 65%.

to POINT 4. to 55%.

to POINT 5. to 40%

THROTTLE STICK to idle.

THROTTLE STICK full open quickly.

as needed.

to condition name.

to next condition to edit.

Repeat above steps as needed.

Set up THROTTLE DELAY to imitate a jet engine’s lag: see p. 57.

Adjust throttle and Ch8 END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up programmable mixes, for example, AILERON-to-RUDDER: see p. 59.

View additional model setups on the www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

THROTTLE DELAY (ACRO):

The THROTTLE DELAY function is used to slow the response of the throttle servo

to simulate the slow response of a turbine engine. A 40% delay setting

corresponds to about a one-second delay, while a 100% delay takes about eight

seconds to respond. For helicopters, see DELAYS, p. 87.

This function may also be used to create a “slowed servo” on a channel other than throttle. This is accomplished by plugging the

desired servo (Ex: gear doors) into CH3 (THR), throttle into an auxiliary channel such as 8, and then using some creative mixes.

Please see our Frequently Asked Questions area at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html for this specific example.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

58

Activate THROTTLE DELAY for a ductedfan

replica of a turbine-powered

aircraft. Slow the servo response by

one second.

Where next?

Open the THROTTLE DELAY function.

Activate the function.

Adjust the RATE to match the desired

servo speed. (Ex: 40%.)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to THROTTLE DELAY.

to 40%.

Set up THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing: see p. 56.

Adjust throttle’s END POINT: see p. 32.

Adjust throttle exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Set up AILEVATOR: see p. 49.

Set up programmable mixes, for example, RUDDER-AILERON: see p. 59.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

LINEAR PROGRAMMABLE MIXES (PROG.MIX1-5):

Your 9C contains five separate linear programmable mixes (ACRO and GLID. HELI has 2). (Note that mixer #6-7’s mixing

RATEs are set with a 5-point curve. see CURVE MIXES, p. 62.)

There are a variety of reasons you might want to use these mixes. A few are listed here. All of the adjustable parameters

are listed below, but don’t let them scare you. For your first few times experimenting with mixes, just turn on the default

mixes, adjust them how you think they need to be, then use the servo screen to check and see if you were correct. As with

all functions, a sample setup follows, step by step, to assist you.

Sample reasons to use linear programmable mixes:

• To correct bad tendencies of the aircraft (such as rolling in response to rudder input).

• To operate 2 or more servos for a single axis (such as two rudder servos).

• To automatically correct for a particular action (such as lowering elevator when flaps are lowered).

• To operate a second channel in response to movement in a first channel (such as increasing the amount of smoke oil

in response to more throttle application, but only when the smoke switch is active).

• To turn off response of a primary control in certain circumstances (such as simulating one engine flaming-out on a

twin, or throttle-assisted rudder turns, also with a twin).

Adjustability:

• ACRO/GLID Defaults: The 5 programmable mixes default to the most frequently used mixes for simplicity. If you want

to use one of these mixes, simply select that mix number so that the master and slave servos are already selected for

you. (HELI mixes default to ail-to-rudd and elev-to-pitch.)

• PROG.MIX1 aileron-to-rudder for coordinated turns

• PROG.MIX2 elevator-to-flap for tighter loops

• PROG.MIX3 flap-to-elevator to compensate pitching with flaps

• PROG.MIX4 throttle-to-rudder ground handling compensation

• PROG.MIX5 rudder-to-aileron roll coupling compensation

• Channels available to mix: All five mixes may use any combination of CH1-8. (CH9 is not proportional and cannot be

mixed.) Offset and dials may also be set to the master channels. (see below.)

• Master: the controlling channel. The channel whose movement is followed by the slave channel.

• Another channel: Most mixes follow a control channel. (Ex: rudder-to-ailerons, 25%, no switch, corrects roll coupling.)

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET

RUDD AILE ON OFF ANY NULL 25% 0

• Offset as master: To create an OFFSET mix, set the master as OFST. (Ex: move flaperons as flaps 20% of their total

throw when SWITCH C is in down position.)

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET

OFST FLAP ON N/A C DOWN 20% 0

59

• Dial as master: To directly effect one servo’s position by moving a dial, set the master as the desired dial.

(Ex: create a second throttle trim on left slider.)

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET

VR(D) THRO OFF N/A ANY NULL 5% 0

• Slave: the controlled channel. The channel that is moved automatically in response to the movement of the master

channel. The second channel in a mix’s name (ie aileron-to-rudder).

• Link: link this programmable mix with other mixes.

Ex: PMIX FLAP-ELEVATOR mixing to correct for ballooning when flaps are lowered, but model has a V-tail. Without

LINK, this mix only moves CH2 elevator when flap is commanded, resulting in a dangerous combination of yaw and

roll. With LINK ON, mixing is applied to both CH2 and CH4.

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET

FLAP ELEV ON OFF ANY NULL 5% 0

• Trim: master’s trim affects slave. Not displayed if master is not CH 1-4, because 5-9 have no trim. Ex: two rudder

servos. With TRIM OFF, rudder trim would bind the two servos. TRIM ON resolves this.

• On/off choices:

• SWITCH: Any of the positions of any of the 8 switches may be used to activate a mix. Up&Cntr, Cntr&Dn options

allow the mix to be ON in 2 of the 3 positions of a 3-position SWITCH.

• NULL: No SWITCH can turn this mix OFF. This mix is active at all times.

• STk-THR: Turned on/off by THROTTLE STICK movement. Trigger point/direction are selectable. Ex: OFST-to-(gear

doors) mix to open gear doors at idle, which is only active if throttle is below half.

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET

OFST AUX2 OFF NO STk-THR Stick at ½, 100% 0

for 1 sec.

• Rate: the percentage of the slave’s range it will move upon maximum input from the master channel. Ex: RUDDERAILERON

mix, 50%. Ail range=1”. When rudder is moved full right, ailerons move ½”.

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET

RUDD AILE OFF OFF ANY NULL 50% 0

• Offset: Offsets the slave’s center relative to the master. Ex: Smoke valve opens wider per throttle servo position when

smoke SWITCH is ON. Smoke servo’s neutral is moved down from THROTTLE STICK center to the bottom.

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET

THRO AUX2 OFF OFF E DOWN 100% 100%

60

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

Other Examples:

• RUD-THR (HELI) mix: When right rudder is applied, additional torque is needed from the motor to drive the tail left. Left

rudder requires less torque. A rudder-throttle mix, positive on the left side and negative on the right, adjusts for this.

• RUD-ELEV (ACRO/GLID) mix: Compensate for pitching up or down when rudder is applied.

• AIL-RUD mix: Coordinate turns by applying rudder automatically with aileron input. All model types.

• ELEV-PIT (HELI) mix: compensate for the loss of lift of tilting the model.

61

Set up a FLAP-ELEV mix:

ON when SWITCH C is in the

down position.

No elevator movement when flaps

move up (spoilers),

5% elevator movement when flaps

move down,

LINK should be ON if model has twin

elevator servos. Otherwise, LINK

remains OFF.

(Flap has no trim lever, so TRIMis not

an option.)

Where next?

Open an unused programmable mix.

(Ex: use PROG.MIX3 since it is already

set-up for FLAP-ELEVATOR.)

Activate the function.

Choose master and slave channels.

(Ex: no need to change MAS/SLV.)

Optional: set Master as OFST or

VR(A-E). See above for details.

Set LINK and TRIM as needed.

(Ex: leave LINK OFF, TRIM not

available.)

Assign SWITCH and position.

(Ex: change from G to C, DOWN.)

Optional: set switch to STk-THR to

activate mix with THROTTLE STICK.

(See above for details.)

Optional: set switch position to NULL.

Makes mix active at all times. Not

compatible with STk-THR.

Set rates. (Ex: Lo=0%, Hi=5%.)

Set OFFSET, if needed. (Ex: 0.)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to PROG.MIX3.

already FLAP

already ELEV

to desired choice.

(If TRIM is available, .)

to C.

to DOWN.

to STk-THR.

THROTTLE STICK to desired point.

for 1 second to set.

to NULL.

VR(A) past center. Leave at 0%.

VR(A) past center. to 5%.

Leave at 0%.

Adjust servo END POINTs: see p. 32.

Setup dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

Set up additional programmable mixes, ex: RUDDER-AILERON: see p. 59.

View numerous additional mix setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

CURVE PROGRAMMABLE MIXES (PROG.MIX6, PROG.MIX7):

Your 9C’s ACRO/GLID programs contain two separate curve programmable mixes. HELI contains one. There are a variety

of reasons you might want curve mixes — usually where a linear mix doesn’t fit your needs along the whole range. One

pre-programmed curve mix is the THROTTLE-NEEDLE function. This curve is adjustable at 5 points, allowing you to adjust

the motor’s tuning at 5 points along its RPM range.

One programmable curve mix defaults to RUDDER-AILERON. A linear mix that keeps the model from rolling in knife-edge

is probably too much aileron when rudder is applied in level flight. Create a curve mix and set all 5 points to match the

linear mix. Inhibit the linear mix, then adjust the curve to get the right response all along the rudder channel’s travel.

Adjustability: for detailed definitions, see Linear Programmable Mixes and Glossary.

• ACRO Defaults: The 2 programmable curve mixes default to the most frequent choices, but can be set to any channel.

• PROG.MIX6 rudder-to-aileron for roll coupling compensation

• PROG.MIX7 rudder-to-elevator for pitch coupling compensation

• GLID/HELI Defaults:

• PROG.MIX6 aileron-to-elevator for coordinated turns

• PROG.MIX7 elevator-to-airbrake for quicker braking (GLID only)

• Master: The controlling channel can only be a channel. Cannot be OFFSET or dial.

• Trim: not available in curve mixes.

• Offset: not available in curve mixes.

62

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

63

Set up a RUDD-ELEV curve mix on a

model that pitches down severely at

full rudder and not at all with minimal

rudder input, and pitches worse on

right rudder than left:

Point 1: 25%

Point 2: 8%

Point 3: 0%

Point 4: 10%

Point 5: 28%

ON when SWITCH C is down.

LINK should be ON if model has twin

elevator servos. Otherwise, LINK

remains OFF.

(Note that point 3 is 0%. Otherwise,

the elevator would be retrimmed

when the mix is active and no rudder

input is given.)

Where next?

Open an unused curve programmable

mix. (Ex: use PROG.MIX7 since it is

already set-up for RUDDER-ELEV.)

Activate the function.

Choose master and slave channels.

(Ex: do not change MAS or SLV).

Set LINK as needed. (Ex: off)

Assign SWITCH and position.

(Ex: change from H to C, DOWN.)

Optional: set switch to STk-THR to

activate mix with THROTTLE STICK.

(See above for details.)

Optional: set switch position to NULL.

Makes mix active at all times.

Set desired percent at the stick points.

(Ex: listed at left.)

Close menu.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to PROG.MIX7.

5 times.

to C. to DOWN.

to STk-THR.

throttle to desired point.

for 1 second.

to POSI. to NULL.

to 25%.

Repeat for points 2-5.

Adjust servo END POINTs: see p. 32.

Set up AILEVATOR: see p. 49.

Set up linear programmable mixes, ex: RUDDER-to-Aux2 (twin rudder servos):

see p. 59, or additional curve mix, ex: RUDDER-AILERON: see p. 62.

View numerous mix setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html

Special Additions, Functions, And Added Equipment Commonly Used On Powered Aircraft

Gyros: Just as torque rotates an aircraft on the runway during take-off, helicopters struggle with torque twisting the model

every time throttle is applied. For many years gyroscopes have been used on model helicopters to control this. In

competition aerobatics and scale aircraft competition alike, the usefulness of gyros has recently come to light. For in-depth

information on gyro types, please see p. 89.

For aerobatics, gyros on rudder and elevator fix over-rotation of snaps and spins as well as tail wagging in stall turns. (Futaba

offers a twin-axis gyro, GYA-352, that controls two axes with a single gyro.) For 3D aerobatics (below stall speed, such as torque

rolls), heading-hold/AVCS gyros on rudder and elevator dramatically simplify these maneuvers. For scale models, gyros are

frequently used to simplify take-offs and landings by keeping the model straight during throttle application.

Always be careful if using a heading-hold/AVCS gyro, as it will correct any change in yaw that is not caused by

movement of the rudder (like making a turn with just aileron and elevator). Typically, modelers use headinghold/

AVCS settings only for specific maneuvers, such as take-offs and torque rolls, then switch to normal mode or

OFF for the remainder of the flight to avoid this risk.

While the 9C’s ACRO/GLID programming does not offer gyro-specific programming, simply adjusting the END POINTs of

the channel that is used to control the gyro’s gain will adjust the gyro’s performance in flight. For details on gain and other

gyro functions, please see the HELI GYRO programming, p. 89.

Retracts: Retractable landing gear is often used on scale models for increased realism and on high performance models to

decrease drag. The gear servo is typically plugged into CH5, which defaults to a 2-position switch for simplicity.

Mechanical retracts require the use of a specialized non-proportional retract servo. Retract servos go from full

travel one direction to full travel the other direction, then mechanically hold the gear into the locked position. A

regular servo used for mechanical retracts will continue to draw full power the entire time, prematurely draining

the battery and risking crash of your model. End point will not adjust a retract servo.

Pneumatic (air driven) retracts use a standard servo to control an air valve which directs air into or out of the retract units,

moving the gear up or down. Pneumatics are easier to install but require added maintenance of the air system.

Gear Doors: Some scale models with retracts also have separate gear doors to cover the scale gear. For one example of

how to operate the gear doors separately from the retracts, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

Smoke Systems: Many scale and aerobatic models use smoke systems to provide increased realism or a more impressive

demonstration. There are many smoke systems available, with varying types of control. Most use a servo to increase/decrease the

flow of smoke fluid into the specialized smoke muffler. The oil is heated in the muffler, creating smoke.

It is a good practice to set up a “safety” that shuts off the smoke oil if the throttle is lowered below half-stick. For a detailed

example of a smoke system setup, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

Kill Switches: For safety reasons, it is strongly recommended that an electronic kill switch be installed in all gasolinepowered

aircraft. In case of any type of in-flight problem (such as prop failure, exhaust vibrating off, throttle servo failure,

radio interference), the modeler can shut the engine off quickly and safely in flight. Additionally, FailSafe (F/S) settings

are recommended to shut the engine off in case of sufficient interference to trigger the PCM FailSafe settings.

Lastly, an electronic kill switch set to “off” prior to the aircraft’s power being shut off adds an additional safety should

someone accidentally turn on the mechanical kill switch on the exterior of the model.

Bomb Drops, Paratroopers, and other Released Items: Many sport and scale models include one or more of these fun

add-ons. Typically, all are controlled by a simple micro-switch plugged into CH9. The switch is assigned in AUX-CH.

64

GLIDER MODEL FUNCTIONS

Please note that nearly all of the BASIC menu functions are the same for airplane (ACRO setup), sailplane (GLID1FLP/2FLP

setups), and helicopter (HELISWH1/SWH2/SWH4/SR-3/SN-3) setups. The features that are identical refer back to the ACRO

chapter. The glider BASIC menu does not include IDLE-DOWN or THR-CUT.

Note that in all cases where ACRO programming labels channel 3 as throttle, GLID programming labels channel 3 as ARB

(airbrake), since airbrakes are normally operated on channel 3 in gliders. This includes STk-THR reading STk-ARB.

Glider Setup Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 66.

GLID1FLP/GLID2FLP BASIC MENU

MODEL SUBMENU:

• MODEL SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 25.

• MODEL COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 26.

• MODEL NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 27.

PARAMETER SUBMENU:

• MODEL RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 28.

• MODEL TYPE: Specific to GLID models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 68.

• MODUL (Modulation, PPM or PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 30.

• ATL [CHANNEL 3 TRIM LEVER (THROTTLE/AIRBRAKE TRIM) function] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 31.

• AIL-2 (Twin ailerons with a 5 channel receiver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 30.

REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 31.

END POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 32.

D/R,EXP (Dual/Triple rates and Exponential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 35.

TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 38.

AUX-CH [Auxiliary Channel assignment (incl, ch9 servo reverse)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 39.

TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 40.

TRIM SUBMENU:

• RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 41.

• STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 41.

SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 42.

SERVO DISPLAY AND CYCLE SUBMENU:

• Servo display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 42.

• TEST (Servo cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 42.

F/S [FAILSAFE (loss of clean signal and low receiver battery) SUBMENU (PCM mode only):

• F/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 43.

• Battery FailSafe (F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 43.

GLID1FLP/GLID2FLP ADVANCE MENU

Basics on wing types and tail types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 45.

• FLAPERON (GLID1FLP only) (aileron servos as ailerons and flaps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 45.

• FLAP TRIM (camber) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .see ACRO, p. 46.

• AIL-DIFF (Aileron Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 47.

• ELEVON (Flying wings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 48.

• V-TAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 50.

• AILEVATOR: not available in GLID model types.

Mixes:

• PROG.MIX1-5 (Linear Programmable Mixes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 59.

• PROG.MIX6-7 (Curved Programmable Mixes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 62.

• ELEV-FLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 54.

• BUTTERFLY (modified version of AIRBRAKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 69.

• FLAP-AILE (GLID2FLP only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 70.

• AILE-FLAP (GLID2FLP only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 70.

• START OFS (Launch/Start setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 71.

• SPEED OFS (Minimum drag setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 71.

65

GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC 4-CHANNEL (Aileron/Flap/Rudder/Elevator) GLIDER

This guideline is intended to help you get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, and

to give you some ideas and direction in how to do even more with this powerful system than you may have already

considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages: a big picture overview of what we’re trying to

accomplish; a “by name” description of the steps to help acquaint you with the radio; and a step-by-step instruction to leave

out the mystery and challenge of setting up your model.

For additional details on utilizing each function, see that function’s section in this manual – the page numbers are indicated

in the first column as a convenience to you.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

66

Prepare your aircraft. Install all servos, switches, receiver per your model’s instructions.

Turn on transmitter then receiver; adjust all linkages so surfaces are nearly centered.

Mechanically adjust all linkages to get as close as possible to proper control

throws and minimize binding prior to radio set up.

Check servo direction and throws.

Make notes now of what you will need to change during programming.

Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your

model. (Ex: GLID1FLP.) See p. 68.

[NOTE: This is one of several functions

that requires confirmation to make a

change. Only critical changes such as a

MODEL RESET require additional

keystrokes to accept the change.]

NAME the model.

P. 25.

(Note that you do not need to do

anything to “save ”or store this data.)

REVERSE servos as needed for proper

control operation.

P. 31.

In the BASIC menu, open the

PARAMETER submenu.

Go to MODEL TYPE.

Select proper MODEL TYPE. Ex:

GLID1FLP.

Confirm the change.

Close the PARAMETER submenu.

In the BASIC menu, open the MODEL

submenu.

Go to MODEL NAME.

Input aircraft’s name.

Close the MODEL submenu when done.

In the BASIC menu, open (servo)

REVERSE.

Choose desired servo and reverse

its direction of travel. (Ex: reverse

rudder servo.)

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

then to highlight PARAMETER.

to choose PARAMETER.

to MODEL TYPE.

to GLID(1FLP).

for 1 second.

Sure? Displays. to confirm.

to return to BASIC menu.

as needed to highlight MODEL.

to choose MODEL.

(1st character of model’s name is

highlighted.)

to change first character.

When proper character is displayed,

to move to next character and repeat.

to return to BASIC menu.

4 steps to REVERSE.

to choose REVERSE.

to CH4: RUDD.

so REV is highlighted.

Repeat as needed.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

67

Adjust travels as needed to match

model’s recommended throws (usually

listed as high rates).

P. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential

(D/R,EXP)

P. 35.

(Note that in the middle of the left side

of the screen is the name of the channel

and the SWITCH position you are

adjusting. Two or even three rates may

be set per channel by simply choosing

the desired SWITCH and programming

percentages with the SWITCH in each of

its 2/3 positions.)

Move flap control from the VR(A) dial

to the left slider [VR(D)]. (AUX-CH)

p. 39.

Where next?

In the BASIC menu, choose END POINT.

Adjust the servos’ end points.

(Ex: flap servo)

Close the function.

Choose D/R,EXP.

Choose the desired control, and set

the first (Ex: high) rate throws and

exponential.

Set the second (low) rate throws and

exponential.

Optional: change dual rate SWITCH

assignment. Ex: elevator to SWITCH G

with 3 positions.

In the BASIC menu, open AUX-CH.

Choose CH6 (flap).

Change primary control to VR(D).

Change other channels as needed.

Return to the home screen.

2 steps to END POINT.

to choose END POINT.

to FLAP.

VR(A) until travel as desired.

VR(A). Repeat as needed.

to D/R,EXP.

to choose D/R,EXP.

to CH>.

to choose CH>2 (elevator).

A to up position. [Note screen reads ELEV (UP)]

to D/R.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

(Normally the same for both directions.)

to EXP.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

ELEVATOR STICK. to set.

to D/R. A to down position.

Repeat above to set low rate.

to SW. to G. G to

center position.

Repeat steps above to set 3rd rate.

to AUX-CH. to choose AUX-CH.

to CH6.

to VR(D).

Repeat as required.

(Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)

TRAINER p. 40.

Multiple wing or tail servos. See wing types and tail types: p. 44, 48.

START and SPEED OFFSETS, BUTTERFLY (AIRBRAKE/crow), and other

programmable mixes p. 53.

Retractable Gear, Smoke systems, kill switches, and other auxiliary channel

setups: p. 39.

Adjusting SUB-TRIMs to match servo centers: p. 41.

A LOOK AT THE RADIO’S GLID-SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS STEP BY STEP. Those functions which are identical to

the ACRO setups are referred directly to those pages.

MODEL TYPE: This function of the PARAMETER submenu is used to select the type of model programming to be used.

GLIDER TYPES:

Before doing anything else to set up a glider or sailplane, first you must decide which MODEL TYPE best fits your aircraft.

• ACRO: for some aerobatic/slope gliders, ACRO is a better choice because of functions it offers that the GLID types do not.

• ACRO provides:

• SNAP-ROLL,

• AILEVATOR (twin elevator servo support),

• AIRBRAKE (a more assignable version of BUTTERFLY).

• For nitro-powered sailplanes: IDLE-DOWN, THR-CUT, THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing and THROTTLE DELAY programming.

• But ACRO lacks programming for full-span ailerons and START and SPEED OFFSETS.

• GLID1FLP: The GLID1FLP MODEL TYPE is intended for sailplanes with one or two aileron servos (or none), and a single

flap servo (or two connected with a y-connector). This TYPE is meant to be a very simplistic version to set up a basic

glider without a lot of added features. Full-span ailerons are not possible in this MODEL TYPE.

• GLID2FLP: The GLID2FLP MODEL TYPE supports dual flap servos that can also act as ailerons, creating full-span

ailerons and flaps.

NOTE: This is one of the several functions that the radio requires confirmation to make a change.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

CH1

CH2

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

Glider2 FLP Configuration

CH1

CH2

CH4

CH6

CH6

CH7

Glider1 FLP Configuration

68

Change model 1’s MODEL TYPE to

GLID1FLP.

NOTE: This is one of the several

functions that the radio requires

confirmation to make a change.

Where next?

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory. (Ex: 1)

Open PARAMETER submenu.

Change the MODEL TYPE.

Confirm the change.

Close.

On home screen, check model name

and number on top left.

If it is not the correct model (Ex: 1),

use MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

for 1 second. (If Advance menu again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

1 step to PARAMETER.

to TYPE. to GLID1FLP

for one second.

sure? Confirmation displays.

to confirm.

Remember: Now that you changed MODEL TYPE, the model memory is almost

completely reset. Only the modulation remains intact.

NAME the model: p. 25.

Change the receiver modulation from FM (PPM) to PCM or vice versa: see p. 28.

Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.

Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.

GLIDER ADVANCE MENU

Varied wing types and tail types (twin aileron servos, twin elevator servos, elevon, v-tail, etc). See p. 44-50 for basic information.

• FLAPERON (GLID1FLP only): 2 aileron servos operate in opposite directions as ailerons and same direction as flaps. See p. 45.

• FLAP TRIM: provides camber movement or trimming of flaperons as flaps. See p. 46.

• For sailplanes, this function is also used as wing camber. The amount depends on the model, but usually a

small amount (less than 10%) is preferred, since too much camber produces excess drag. Don’t use more than

about 1/16” travel up or down for glider camber. Some airfoils, such as the RG-15, should be flown with NO

reflex/camber. Be sure to consult your model’s manual for guidelines.

• Note that even though you may make FLAP-TRIM active while using AIL-DIFF, it will not have any effect. The

ONLY function that allows control of the ailerons as flaps in the AIL-DIFF configuration is airbrake.)

• Aileron Differential (AIL-DIFF): allows twin aileron servos to provide differential down travel from up travel. See p. 47.

• Using a 5-channel receiver with FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF. See AIL-2, p. 47.

• ELEVON: for flying wings. See p. 48.

• V-TAIL: for models with 2 servos operating together to create roll and pitch control. See p. 50.

• AILEVATOR: not available in GLID model types.

Mixes:

• Linear Programmable mixes (PROG.MIX1-5): fully assignable programmable mixes with a linear response. see p. 59.

• Curved Programmable mixes (PROG.MIX6-7): fully assignable programmable mixes with a curved response. See p. 62.

• ELEV-FLAP: pre-programmed mix creates elevator movement from the inboard flaps as well as elevators. See p. 54.

• BUTTERFLY: Often called crow, BUTTERFLY is the glider version of AIRBRAKE. (BUTTERFLY does not have the option

to activate it solely from a switch, and its activation switch is not assignable. BUTTERFLY may only be turned on/off

by SWITCH A, and always provides progressively more BUTTERFLY as the CHANNEL 3 (THROTTLE) STICK is lowered,

or raised if used THR-REV, p. 31.) See AIRBRAKE, p. 55.

Full Span Mixing: Flap-to-Aileron and Aileron-to-Flap

• FLAP-AILE (GLID2FLP only): This pre-programmed mix is used to create full span flap action on a glider with 4 wing servos.

This changes the camber over the entire wing, which produces less drag than just dropping the flaps by themselves. Since

FLAP-AILE and AILE-FLAP are generally utilized together, one example is shown below setting up both. NOTE: When you

have ELEV-FLAP mixing also, the trailing edge droops with the elevators, increasing pitch response.

Adjustability:

• RATE range of -100 to +100. Negative setting would result in up flaperon with down flap and vice versa.

• OFFSET range of –30 to +30. Setting offset position sets the flap position at which the flaperons are neutral. Intended

for models that do not have the flaps positioned neutral at the flap servo’s center. (ie. down travel only)

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable.

• POSITION fully assignable, including NULL (mix always on) and Up&Cntr and Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2

separate positions of the same SWITCH. (This allows easy setup of one SWITCH position which is no FLAP-AILE

or AILE-FLAP mixing, one with both FLAP-AILE and AILE-FLAP mixing, and one with just FLAP-AILE mixing.)

69

• AILE-FLAP (GLID2FLP only): This pre-programmed mix is used to create full span aileron action on a glider with 4

wing servos. This increases the roll rate and decreases induced drag. For normal flying, a value of about 50% is

often used. For slope racing or F3B models in speed runs, you may wish to use a larger value approaching 100%.

Adjustability:

• RATE range of -100 to +100. Negative setting would result in opposite aileron action from flaps.

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable.

• POSITION fully assignable, including NULL (mix always on) and Up&Cntr and Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2

separate positions of the same SWITCH. (This allows easy setup of one SWITCH position which is no FLAP-AILE

or AILE-FLAP mixing, one with both FLAP-AILE and AILE-FLAP mixing, and one with just FLAP-AILE mixing.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

REAR VIEW OF MODEL WITH LEFT AILERON COMMAND

70

Turn on FLAP-AILE mixing. Set RATE to

48%, which is the portion of the total

aileron travel that matches the maximum

flap travel.

Ex: Set up SWITCH C as follows:

UP = no full span mixing.

CTR = flap-ail and ail-flap

DWN = flap-ail mixing only.

Assign to SWITCH C center and down.

Turn on AILE-FLAP mixing. Set rate to

100% for maximum possible flap

travel with ailerons.

Assign to SWITCH C center.

Where next?

Open FLAP-AILE mixing function.

Activate the function.

Set the rate. (Ex: 48%)

Optional: adjust the flap position at

which the flaperons are zeroed.

Assign the SWITCH and position.

(Ex: C Cntr&Dn)

Close the function.

Open AILE-FLAP submenu.

Activate the function.

Set the rate. (Ex: 100% each way)

Assign the SWITCH and position.

Close.

for 1 second. (If BASIC menu , again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

to FLAP-AILE.

to ON.

to +48%.

or VR(A) as needed.

for 1 second to set.

to SW. to C.

to Cntr&Dn.

to AILE-FLAP.

to ON.

AILERON STICK. to +100%.

AILERON STICK. to +100%.

to SW. to C.

to CENTER.

ELEV-FLAP mixing. See p. 54.

BUTTERFLY. See p. 55.

Use a mix to OFFSET the flaps a set distance on a specified switch: see p. 59.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html

• Launch (Start) Offset (START OFS): The Start function is used to offset the aileron, elevator, and flap servos to the

position that provides maximum lift during launch. Normally the ailerons and flaps are drooped about 20-30, with

the flaps drooped slightly more to prevent tip-stalling on tow. The elevator can also be offset in order to trim out

any pitch changes caused by the flap and aileron presets.

Adjustability:

• This function is only activated by flipping SWITCH G to the back position. If you wish to have this threeposition

switch above the left-hand stick (position E), you should purchase a 9CH transmitter.

• Separate adjustments for each aileron and flap servo (two flap settings for GLID2FLP) and for elevator.

• RANGE for each adjustment is –100 to +100.

• Optional assignable dial (VR) to adjust all 4 wing servos in unison, 1% at a time, across all 4 servos in flight.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

71

Set up a START OFS to gain maximum

possible lift on launch.

Each Aileron: 50%.

Each Flap: 100%.

Elevator: -5% to compensate.

Note: switch is not assignable. Must be

SWITCH (9CA=G, 9CH=E.)

Where next?

Open START OFS function.

Activate the function.

Set the rates. (Ex: AIL1 and 2, 50%,

FLAP1 and 2, 100%, ELEV –5%.)

Optional: set a knob to adjust travel

of all 4 wing servos in flight.

Close the function.

for 1 second. (If BASIC menu , again.)

to 2nd page. to START OFS.

Flip switch G toward you.

to OFF. to AIL1.

to +50%. to AIL2.

to +50%. to ELEV.

Repeat for ELEV, FLP1 and 2, AIL2.

to desired knob.

SPEED OFS mixing. See p. 72.

BUTTERFLY. See p. 55.

Create a programmable mix to meet your model’s setups: see p. 59.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

• SPEED OFS: The Speed function is used to offset the aileron, elevator, and flap servos for minimum drag in cruise

and high-speed flight. Normally the ailerons and flaps are raised about 3-5°. (Some airfoils, notably the RG-15,

have higher drag with reflex, so this function should not be used.)

Adjustability:

• This function is only activated by flipping SWITCH G to the forward position. If you wish to have the threeposition

SWITCH above the left-hand stick (position E), you should purchase a 9CH transmitter.

• Separate adjustments for each aileron and flap servo (two flap settings for GLID2FLP) and for elevator.

• Range for each adjustment is –100 to +100.

• Optional assignable dial to adjust all 4 wing servos in unison, 1% at a time across all 4 servos in flight.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

72

Set up a SPEED OFS to gain maximum

possible lift on launch.

Each Aileron: 5%.

Each Flap: 3%.

Elevator: -1% to compensate.

Note: switch and position are not

assignable. Must be the upper 3-

position SWITCH (G on 9CA, E on 9CH.)

Where next?

Open SPEED OFS function.

Activate the function.

Set the rates. (Ex: AIL1 and 2, 5%,

FLAP1 and 2, 3%, ELEV –1%.)

Optional: set up a dial to adjust travel

of all 4 wing servos in flight.

Close the function.

for 1 second. (If BASIC menu , again.)

to 2nd page. to SPEED OFS.

Flip switch G away from you.

to OFF. to AIL1.

to +5%. to AIL2.

to +5%. to ELEV.

Repeat for ELEV, FLP1 and 2, AIL2.

to desired knob.

START OFS mixing. See p. 71.

BUTTERFLY. See p. 55.

Create a programmable mix to meet your model’s setups: see p. 59.

View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.

HELICOPTER MODEL FUNCTIONS

Please note that nearly all of the BASIC menu functions are the same for airplane (ACRO setup), sailplane (GLID1FLP/2FLP

setups), and helicopter (HELISWH1/SWH2/SWH4/SR-3/SN-3) setups. The features that are identical refer back to the ACRO

chapter. The Helicopter BASIC menu includes the normal condition’s throttle and collective pitch curves and revo. mixing.

(idle-ups and throttle hold are advanced features and are in the ADVANCE menu).

Helicopter Setup Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 74.

HELI (SWH1/2/4, SN-3, SR-3) BASIC MENU

MODEL SUBMENU:

• MODEL SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 25.

• MODEL COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 26.

• MODEL NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 27.

PARAMETER SUBMENU:

• MODEL RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 28.

• MODEL TYPE: Information specific to HELI models, including CCPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 77.

• MODUL (Modulation, PPM or PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 30.

• ATL [CHANNEL 3 TRIM LEVER (THROTTLE/AIRBRAKE TRIM) Function] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 31.

REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 31.

SWASH AFR (swashplate control direction and travel correction) (not in SWH1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 79.

END POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 32.

Setting Up the NORMAL Condition: (TH-CV/NOR, PI-CV/NOR, REVO./NOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 81.

THR-CUT (specialized settings for helicopter specific models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 82.

D/R,EXP (Specialized settings for helicopter specific models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 35.

TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 38.

AUX-CH [Auxiliary Channel assignment (including ch9 servo reverse)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 39.

TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 40.

TRIM SUBMENU:

• RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 41.

• STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 41.

SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 42.

SERVO DISPLAY AND CYCLE SUBMENU:

• Servo display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, P. 42.

• TEST (Servo cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 42.

F/S [FAILSAFE (loss of clean signal and low receiver battery) SUBMENU (PCM mode only):

• F/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 43.

• Battery FailSafe (F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 43.

HELI (SWH1/2/4, SN-3, SR-3) ADVANCE MENU

THROTTLE HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 83.

THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, and REVO. MIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 84.

IDLE-UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 85.

TRIMS/OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 86.

DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 87.

HOVERING SETUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 88.

GYROS and GOVERNORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 89.

Mixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 53.

• PROG.MIX1-2 (Linear Programmable mixes, default to AIL-RUD, ELEV-PIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 59.

• PROG.MIX6 (Curved Programmable mix, default AIL-ELEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 60.

• THROTTLE-NEEDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 56.

73

GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC HELICOPTER

This guideline is intended to help you set up a basic (SWH1) heli, to get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start

on using your new radio, and to give you some ideas and direction on how to do even more with this powerful system than

you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages – a big picture overview of what

we're trying to accomplish; a “by name” description of the steps to help acquaint you with the radio; and then a step-bystep

instruction to leave out the mystery and challenge of setting up your model.

Briefly, the typical helicopter’s controls are as follows:

• Aileron: changes cyclic lateral (roll) . Rolls the helicopter. Tilts the swashplate to the left or right. CH1.

• Elevator: changes cyclic pitch. Changes the helicopter’s angle of attack (nose up or nose down). Tilts the entire

swashplate fore and aft. CH2.

• Rudder: changes the angle of the tail rotor. Yaws the helicopter left or right. CH4.

• Collective Pitch: adjusts main rotor collective [angle of the paddles], changing the main blades’ pitch. Increased collective

pitch (with throttle) causes the helicopter to rise. Moves in conjunction with throttle on the THROTTLE STICK. CH6.

• Throttle: opens/closes carburetor. Moves in conjunction with collective pitch on the THROTTLE STICK. CH3.

• REVO: mix that adds rudder in conjunction with pitch. This helps compensate for rotation of the helicopter caused by

the increased engine torque. (Never use revo. mixing with a heading-hold/AVCS gyro; the gyro already does this.)

For additional details, see that function's section in this manual — the page numbers are indicated in the first column for you..

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

74

Prepare your helicopter.

Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your

model. Ex: HELI (SWH1). See p. 77.

[NOTE: This is one of several

functions for which the radio requires

confirmation to make a change. Only

critical changes require additional

keystrokes to accept the change.]

(If the correct model type was already

displayed, be sure to do a model reset

to discard any unwanted settings.)

Then, NAME the model. P. 25.

(You do not need to do anything to

“save” or store this data.)

In the BASIC menu, open the

PARAMETER submenu.

Go to MODEL TYPE.

Select proper MODEL TYPE.

Ex: HELI(SWH1).

Confirm the change. Close PARAMETER.

In the BASIC menu, open the MODEL

submenu.

Go to MODEL NAME.

Input aircraft's name.

Close the MODEL submenu when done.

Turn on the transmitter.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

then to highlight PARAMETER.

to choose PARAMETER.

to TYPE.

to HELI(SWH1). for 1 second.

sure? displays. to confirm.

to return to BASIC menu.

as needed to highlight MODEL.

to choose MODEL.

(First character of model's

name is highlighted.)

to change first character.

When proper character is displayed,

to move to next character. Repeat.

to return to BASIC menu.

Install all servos, switches, receiver per your model's instructions. Set all trims,

dials and sliders to neutral.

Confirm all control linkages are 90 degrees (or per instructions) from the servo

horn to the ball link for proper geometry and that no slop is present.

Mechanically adjust all linkages to get as close as possible to proper control

throws and minimize binding prior to radio set up.

75

Reverse servos as needed for proper

control operation. Ex: LEFT RUDDER

STICK results in leading edge of tail

rotor blades moving left. Reverse to

operate properly. P. 31.

Adjust Travels as needed to match

model's recommended throws (usually

listed as high rates).

P. 32.

Activate THR-CUT. P. 82.

Set up throttle curve for normal.2

(Usually changes will not need to be

made prior to first flight.) P. 81.

Set up collective pitch curve for

normal as base of –4, center of +5,

end of +8 to +10 degrees of blade

pitch for aerobatics.2 (If just learning

to fly, ask your instructor.) P. 81.

Set up revo. mixing for normal. (For

heading-hold gyros, inhibit revo.) P. 81.

Confirm Gyro direction. (Note: if

using a heading-hold/AVCS gyro, use

the GYRO programming for proper

setup. See p. 89.)

In the BASIC menu, open REVERSE.

Choose desired servo and reverse its

direction of travel.

(Ex: reverse rudder servo.)

In the BASIC menu, choose END POINT.

Adjust the servos’ end points.

(Ex: flap servo)

Return to BASIC menu.

Open THR-CUT function.

Activate the function. Choose desired

switch and position to activate.

With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust the

rate until the engine consistently shuts

off, but throttle linkage is not binding.1

Close.

Open the THR-CV/NOR function.

Adjust if needed. Close the function.

Open the PIT-CV/NOR function.

Adjust each point to match desired

curve. (Ex first point: 8%.)

Close the function.

Open the REVO./NOR function. Adjust to

your desired starting point. (Ex: 10%.)

Close the function.

4 steps to REVERSE.

to choose REVERSE.

to CH4: RUDD.

so REV is highlighted.

Repeat as needed.

2 steps to END POINT.

to choose END POINT.

to ELEV.

ELEVATOR STICK.

until down travel is as desired.

ELEVATOR STICK.

until down travel is as desired.

Repeat as needed.

4 steps.

to SW.

to C. to DOWN.

C to down position.

THROTTLE STICK.

to RATE. until shuts off.

to THR-CV/NOR.

to 5%. to next point. Repeat.

to PIT-CV/NOR.

to 8%. to next point. Repeat.

to REVO./NOR.

to 10%. to next point. Repeat.

With radio on, move helicopter’s tail to the right by hand.

The gyro should give right rudder input (leading edge of the tail rotor blades

move left).

If the gyro gives the opposite input, reverse direction on the gyro unit itself.

1 Periodically move the throttle stick to full and back down to ensure proper servo settings.

2 It is critical that dials A and C be centered when the pitch and throttle curves are setup.

76

Learn how to operate HOVERING PITCH

and HOVERING THROTTLE. See p. 88.

Notice at half throttle, the VR(C) dial

adjusts the throttle separately from the

pitch. VR(A) adjusts the pitch

separately from the throttle.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

1 step to SERVO.

throttle to center

VR(C) VR(A) center dials.

Be sure to follow your model’s instructions for preflight checks, blade tracking, etc. Never assume a set of blades are

properly balanced and will track without checking.

Check receiver battery voltage! Always check voltage with a voltmeter prior to each and every engine start.

(Never assume being plugged in all night means your radio gear is ready to fly). Insufficient charge, binding servo linkages,

and other problems can result in a dangerous crash with the possibility of injury to yourself, others and property.

Confirm the swashplate is level at 0 travel. Adjust arms if needed.

Apply full collective and check that the swashplate remained level and there is no binding. Repeat for full cyclic pitch and

roll. If not, adjust as needed to correct in END POINT: see p. 32.

Important note: prior to setting up throttle hold, idle-ups, offsets, etc, be sure to get your normal condition operating properly.

Where next?(Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)

THROTTLE HOLD: P. 83.

SUB-TRIM p. 41 and separate trims for conditions (OFFSETS): p. 86.

Governor setup: p. 89.

IDLE-UP p. 85.

DELAYS to ease servo response when switching idle-ups: p. 87.

Rudder-to-throttle and other programmable mixes p. 59.

Checking setup prior to going airborne: Check voltage! Then, with the assistance of an instructor, and having completed

all range checks, etc, gradually apply throttle until the helicopter becomes “light on the skids.” Adjust trims as needed to

correct for any roll, pitch, or yaw tendencies. If the tail “wags,” the gyro gain is too high. Decrease gyro gain.

HELI-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS

MODEL TYPE: This function of the PARAMETER submenu is used to select the type of model programming to be used.

Before doing anything else to set up your model, first you must decide which MODEL TYPE best fits your aircraft. If

your transmitter is a 9CA, the default is ACRO. If it is a 9CH, the default is HELI(SW1).

HELICOPTER SWASHPLATE TYPES:

The 9C radios support 5 basic swashplate setups, including “single servo” (SW1 – most helicopters use this type) and 4

types of CCPM (cyclic and collective pitch mixing). A “single servo” swashplate uses one servo for each axis: aileron,

elevator (cyclic pitch), and collective pitch. CCPM helicopters utilize a combination of servos working together to achieve

the 3 axes of motion. There are 4 basic CCPM types, displayed below. CCPM has several advantages, the most obvious

of which is far less mechanical complexity to properly move the swashplate of the helicopter. Additionally, several servos

working in unison (ex: SR3, all 3 servos together create elevator movement) dramatically increases the torque available as

well as the precision and centering.

Please note that some helicopters are type SR-3 or SN-3, except off by 180 degrees. For example, the Kyosho® Caliber™ is

SR-3 but with the 2 parallel servos to the rear of the helicopter, not front. If your model’s swashplate is off by 180 degrees,

you will still use that swashplate type, but also use SWASH AFR (p.79) to adjust the functions as needed until it operates

properly. Additionally, different angles of CCPM may also be created utilizing the fully assignable programmable mixes.

(See our Frequently Asked Questions area at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html for specific examples.)

Not operating quite like you expected? In many CCPM installations you need to either reverse the direction of a specific

function (SWASH AFR) or reverse a single servo’s direction (REVERSE). See SWASH AFR for details.(p.79)

Swashplate Type Setting Procedure

HELISWH1 Type: Independent aileron, pitch and elevator servos linked to the

swashplate. Most kits are HELISWH1 type.

HELI SWH2 Type: pushrods positioned as shown. Elevator operates with a mechanical

linkage. With Aileron inputs, the aileron and pitch servos tilt the swashplate left and

right; with Pitch inputs, the aileron and pitch servos raise the swashplate up and down.

HELI SWH4 Type: pushrods positioned as shown. With Aileron inputs, the aileron and

pitch servos tilt the swashplate left and right; with Elevator inputs, the servos tilt the

swashplate fore and aft; with Pitch inputs, all four servos raise the swashplate up and down.

HELI SR-3 Type: pushrods positioned as shown. With Aileron inputs, the aileron and

pitch servos tilt the swashplate left and right; with Elevator inputs, the three servos tilt

the swashplate fore and aft; with Pitch inputs, all three servos raise the swashplate up

and down.

HELI SN-3 Type: pushrods positioned as shown. With Aileron inputs, the three servos

tilt the swashplate left and right; with Elevator inputs, the elevator and pitch servos tilt

the swashplate fore and aft; with Pitch inputs, all three servos raise the swashplate up

and down.

Pitch Aileron

Front

Aileron Pitch

Front

(Pitch) (Aileron)

Elevator 1

Elevator 2

(CH8)

Aileron

(Pitch)

Pitch

(Aileron)

Front

Elevator

120

120 120

Aileron

Pitch

Front

Elevator

120

120

120

77

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

1Radio emits a repeating “beep” and shows progress on screen as the model memory is being copied. Note that if the power switch is turned off prior

to completion, the data will not be copied.

78

Change the MODEL TYPE of model #3

from aircraft to 120 degree CCPM with 2

servos working in unison for collective

pitch and aileron [HELI(SR-3)].

Where next?

Confirm you are currently using the

proper model memory. (example: 3)

Open PARAMETER submenu.

Change to the desired MODEL TYPE

(example, SR3.)

Confirm the change.

Close.

On home screen, check model name

and # on top left.

If it is not the correct model (example:

3), see MODEL SELECT, p. 25.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

to 2nd page of menu.

1 step to PARAMETER.

(example: 2 steps.)

for one second.

“sure?” displays. to confirm.1

If a single servo is not operating properly, REVERSE: see p. 31.

If a control is operating backwards (i.e. Elevator), see SWASH AFR, p. 79.

If unsure see SWASH AFR.

SWASH AFR [HELI(SWH2/4/SN-3, SR-3) only]:

Swashplate function rate settings (SWASH AFR) reduce/increase/reverse the rate (travel)

of the aileron, elevator (except SWH2) and collective pitch functions, adjusting or

reversing the motion of all servos involved in that function, only when using that

function. Since these types utilize multiple servos together to create the controls, simply

adjusting a servo’s REVERSE or END POINT would not properly correct the travel of any

one control. Since SW1 uses one servo for each function, there is no need for AFR in SW1.

This is fairly hard to explain but easy to see, so let’s set up Kyosho Caliber’s swashplate settings as an example. With

everything installed per factory instructions, set the model to HELI(SR-3). Now let’s adjust the swashplate properly.

Since aileron always uses no more than 2 servos, check it first. Either both operate properly (no change needed), both

operate backwards (reverse the whole function), or one servo operates backwards (reverse that servo alone).

Next check elevator. Remember, the aileron servo(s) operate correctly, so if elevator does not, we should only have 2

choices left – the whole function needs to be reversed, or the servo(s) not shared with aileron need to be reversed.

Last is collective. If aileron and elevator are working properly, the only thing that could be wrong is the whole direction

collective operates (reverse the whole function). In our example, SR-3 is 180 degrees off from the swashplate of the Caliber.

Therefore, it is very likely that several functions will not operate properly. The collective pitch operation is backwards; but

reversing all three servos would also reverse the aileron and elevator operations. Changing the collective pitch rate,

however, from +50% to –50%, will reverse the collective pitch without affecting the aileron action.

79

CHECKING FOR PROPER MOTION ON AN SR-3 SWASHPLATE

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

80

Adjust the travel of the collective pitch

from +50% to –23%, reversing the

travel of all 3 servos and decreasing

their travel in collective pitch only, on

an SR-3 MODEL TYPE.

Where next?

Open SWASH AFR function.

Adjust PIT travel to –23.

Close the menu.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

to SWASH AFR.

to –23%.

Confirm the swashplate is level at 0 travel. Adjust arms if needed.

Apply full collective and check that the swashplate remained level. If not, adjust

servo’s travels as needed to correct. END POINT: see p. 32.

Set up the normal condition: (TH-CV/NOR, PI-CV/NOR, REVO./NOR): see p. 81.

Set up D/R,EXP: see p. 35.

SR-3 Swash Type

AILERON STICK.

ELEVATOR STICK.

RUDDER STICK.

THROTTLE STICK.

PROPER MOTION

Swashplate tilts right.

Front of swash plate moves

down; back of swashplate

moves up.

The leading edges of tail

blades rotate left.

Entire Swashplate lifts.

WRONG MOTION

Swashplate tilts left.

Back of Swashplate moves up.

Back of Swashplate moves

down.

Swashplate moves the

opposite.

Entire swashplate moves up.

Blades rotated right.

Swashplate lowers.

HOW TO FIX

Reverse AIL setting in

SWASH to -50%.

Ch6 servo moves

incorrectly; REVERSE.

Ch1 servo moves

incorrectly; REVERSE.

Reverse ELE setting in SWASH.

(ex: +50 to –50)

Ch2 servo moves

incorrectly; REVERSE.

REVERSE the rudder servo.

Reverse PIT setting in SWASH.

Setting up the Normal Flight Condition: The Normal flight condition is typically utilized for hovering. The throttle and

collective pitch curves are adjusted to provide consistent engine RPM despite the increase/decrease in collective pitch of

the blades. This keeps the engine from “bogging down” under excessive load (like trying to accelerate a car on a steep hill

in 5th gear) or excessive RPM under insufficient load (like flooring the throttle while in neutral), risking engine damage.

As the 2 curves and revo. mixing are all interrelated, we will discuss all three first, then complete a sample setup.

Note that the normal throttle, pitch and revo curves are all available in the BASIC menu for simplicity. These may also be updated

later in the ADVANCE menu with the settings for the other 4 conditions [idle-up 1 (IDL1), idle-up 2 (IDL2) and idle-up 3 (IDL3), plus

throttle hold (HOLD)]. Note: The throttle and pitch curves for the normal condition are always on. They cannot be inhibited. The

other four conditions are activated with their throttle curves or throttle hold. For idle-ups, see p. 85. For throttle hold, see p. 83.

• TH-CV/NOR: inputs the normal (NORM) throttle curve, which is usually not a linear response to THROTTLE STICK motion.

Adjusting point 3 of the curve adjusts the engine’s RPM at the THROTTLE STICK midpoint – the desired position for

hovering. The other 4 points are then adjusted to create the desired idle and maximum engine speed, and a smooth

transition in-between. For more on throttle curves, see p. 85.

• PI-CV/NOR: inputs the normal (NORM) collective pitch curve, the collective pitch curve for flight near hover. The

normal collective pitch curve is adjusted to match the throttle curve, providing the best vertical performance at a

constant engine speed, with a starting curve of –4 base, +5 neutral, and +8 to +10 degrees of blade pitch maximum*.

You can program the response over a 5-point curve for the best collective pitch angle relative to THROTTLE STICK

movement. For more on collective pitch curves, see p. 85.

• REVO./NOR: mixes collective pitch commands to the rudder (a PITCH-RUDDER mix) to suppress the torque generated

by changes in the main rotor's collective pitch angle, keeping the model from yawing when throttle is applied. REVO.

is extremely helpful in “taming the tail” of models not using heading-hold/AVCS gyros. NOTE: There are three revo.

mixes available: normal (NORM), idle-up 1 / 2 (IDL1/2), and idle-up 3 (IDL3). All 3 are adjustable in the ADVANCE

menu. Never use revo. mixing in conjunction with heading-hold/AVCS gyros.For details on revo, including default

points for clockwise and counterclockwise rotating rotors, see p. 85.

*These default recommendations assume you are doing forward flight. If you are just learning, please follow your instructor’s guidance. Some

instructors like a +1 base point for training so that the helicopter comes down very slowly, even if your instincts pull the throttle/collective stick to

the bottom in a hurry.

81

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

THROTTLE CUT: The THR-CUT function is used to kill the engine at the end of a flight. The engine can be stopped with

one touch of any switch, eliminating the need to move the trim to kill the engine and then readjust prior to each flight. The

helicopter THR-CUT includes an ON/OFF throttle position (normally a little above idle). You must move the THROTTLE

STICK back below the set point before the THR-CUT function can be reset, to avoid sudden engine acceleration. For a detailed

example of throttle cut setup, see ACRO p. 34.

Creating a throttle cut that operates only in Normal and not in any Idle-Ups:

http://www.futabarc.com/faq/faq-9c-q506.html

Note: Be sure to add the step of setting a trigger point by cursoring to THR, then putting the

THROTTLE STICK in the desired position and pressing and holding the dial for one second.

Notice that this function cannot be reversed to trigger only above the stick point.

82

Set up Normal Flight Condition

Throttle/Collective Pitch Curves

and Revo.

Base point: Adjust base point of

throttle curve until engine idles

reliably on ground. Adjust base point

of collective pitch curve to achieve –4

degrees of blade pitch.

Apply throttle until the model sits

‘light’ on its skids. Adjust base point

of REVO. until model does not rotate

its nose at all.

Hover point: Adjust collective pitch curve

to +5 degrees. Ease heli into a hover.

Land/shut engine off. Adjust throttle

curves and rudder trim. Repeat until

model hovers smoothly at half throttle.

Rapidly apply throttle from ¼ to ½

stick. Adjust REVO. points 2 and 3

until the model does not rotate its

nose up on throttle application.

High point:Adjust collective pitch

curve to +8 to +10 degrees. From

hover, throttle up rapidly. If engine

bogs, increase the throttle curve. If

engine over-revs, increase the

collective pitch curve at points 4 or 5.

Apply full throttle while hovering, then

descend back to hover. Adjust REVO.

until the nose does not change heading.

Where next?

Open the THR-CV/NOR function.

Adjust the first point. (Ex: 5%.)

Open the PIT-CV/NOR function.

Adjust the first point. (Ex: 8%.)

Open the REVO./NOR function.

Adjust the first point. (Ex: 4%.)

Adjust THR-CV/NOR.

Adjust PIT-CV/NOR.

Adjust REVO./NOR.

Adjust THR-CV/NOR.

Adjust PIT-CV/NOR.

Adjust REVO./NOR.

for 1 second.(If ADVANCE, again.)

to THR-CV/NOR.

to 5%.

to PIT-CV/NOR.

to 8%.

to REVO./NOR.

to 4%.

Repeat above as needed.

Repeat above as needed.

Repeat above as needed.

Repeat above as needed.

Repeat above as needed.

Repeat above as needed.

GYRO function: see p. 89.

Adjust HOV-THR and HOV-PIT if needed: see p. 88.

Setting up Throttle Hold: see p. 83.

Setting up idle-ups 1, 2 and 3: Throttle and collective pitch curves and revo.

mixing (TH-CURVE, PI-CURVE, REVO. MIX): see p. 85.

GOVERNOR function: see p. 89.

D/R,EXP: see p. 35.

HELI-SPECIFIC ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS

THR-HOLD: This function holds the engine in the idling position and disengages it from the THROTTLE STICK when SWITCH

E (9CH) or G (9CA) is moved. It is commonly used to practice auto-rotation.

Prior to setting up THR-HOLD, hook up the throttle linkage so that the carburetor is

opened fully at high throttle, then use the digital trim to adjust the engine idle

position. To have THR- HOLD maintain idle, move the THROTTLE STICK to the idle

position, then move the hold SWITCH on and off and keep changing the offset value

until the servo does not move. To lower the engine idle speed, or if you want to shut

off, input a more negative number.

Adjustability:

• Idling position: Range of –50% to +50% centered about the throttle idle position to get the desired engine RPM.

• Rudder offset: Offsets the tail rotor pitch. Keeps the fuselage from rotating in throttle hold.

• Time delay: A rudder offset time delay may be set up within the DELAY function (see p. 87) to ease in rudder and

prevent tail wag.

• Switch assignment: Assigned to SWITCH G (9CA) or E (9CH) down. Not adjustable.

• Throttle curve: Since the throttle is moved to a single preset position, no curve is available for THR-HOLD.

• Collective pitch curve: Independent curve, typically adjusted to create a blade pitch range of -4° to +10° to +12°, is

automatically activated with THR-HOLD.

• Revo. mix: Since revo. mix adjusts for torque from the engine, no revo. mix is available for THR-HOLD.

• Priority: The throttle hold function has priority over idle-up. Be sure that the throttle hold and idle-up SWITCHES are in the

desired positions before trying to start the engine. (We recommend starting your engine in throttle hold for safety reasons.)

• Gyro: Gyro programming includes an option to have a separate gyro setting for each condition, including THR-HOLD.

This avoids the potential problem of the user being in the wrong gyro setting when going to THR-HOLD, resulting in an

improper rudder offset and the model pirouetting.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

83

Set up throttle hold.

Determine desired throttle position by

idling engine, turn on THR-HOLD, and

adjust percentage as required to reach

the desired running point.

Where next?

Open THR-HOLD function.

Activate the function.

Set desired engine position.

Optional: set up a rudder offset. (If a

slowed reaction is desired, go to DELAY.)

Close.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to THR-HOLD.

to OFF.

to desired percent.

to OFF. to desired offset.

PIT-CURVE for THR-HOLD: see p. 85.

DELAY for THR-HOLD (to ease collective pitch response): see p. 87.

GYRO setup: see p. 89.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing

(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING) for idle-ups: see p. 85.

D/R,EXP: see p. 35.

THR-CURVE and PIT-CURVE: These 5-point curves are utilized to best match the blade collective pitch to the engine RPM for

consistent load on the engine. Curves are separately adjustable for normal, idle-up 1, idle-up 2, and idle-up 3. In addition,

a separate collective pitch curve is available for throttle hold. Sample curves are displayed in the appropriate setup types

(ex: normal flight condition, p. 81) for clarity.

Suggested defaults:

• Normal: Collective pitch curve that results in points 1, 3 and 5 providing –4, +5, (+8 to +10)* degrees pitch. A throttle

curve setting of 0, 30, 50, 70, 100%.

• Idle-ups 1 & 2: Idle-ups 1 and 2 are typically the same except for the gyro settings, with one being headinghold/

AVCS and the other being normal mode. The pitch curve will likely be similar to the normal curve above.

• Idle-up 3: Collective pitch curve that results in points 1, 3 and 5 providing (–8 to –10), 0, (+8 to +10) degrees. A

throttle curve of 100, 75, 50, 75, 100 to provide full throttle for inverted maneuvers.

• Throttle Hold pitch curve: Start with the normal pitch curve (for inverted autos, start from the idle-up 3 pitch curve), but

increase the last point approximately 1-2°, if available, to ensure sufficient pitch at landing.

*(These default recommendations assume you are doing forward flight. If you are just learning, please follow your instructor’s guidance. Some

instructors like a +1 base point for training so that the helicopter comes down very slowly, even if your instincts pull the throttle/collective stick to

the bottom in a hurry.)

Adjustability:

• Normal condition curves are editable in the BASIC menu for convenience.

• All curves may be adjusted in the ADVANCE menu.

• Automatically selected with the proper condition.

• The idle-up curves are programmed to maintain constant RPM even when the collective pitch is reduced during flight

(including inverted).

• To change which condition’s curve is being edited, cursor up above point 1 and change the curve named.

• For clarity, the name of the condition currently active (switched on in the radio) is shown in parentheses behind name

of condition whose curve is being edited. (Example: see curve displays below. Note that the normal condition is active

but the idle-up 1 condition’s curves are currently being edited.

• Idle-ups and throttle hold pitch curves may be edited even before the conditions have been made active. Activating

their throttle curves activates these conditions.

REVO. MIX: This 5-point curve mix adds opposite rudder input to counteract the changes in torque when the speed and

collective pitch of the blades is changed.

Adjustability:

• Three separate curves available: normal for hovering; idle-ups 1 and 2 combined; and idle-3.

• Normal condition curves are editable in the BASIC menu for convenience.

• All curves may be adjusted in the ADVANCE menu.

• Correct mix is automatically selected in-flight with each condition and automatically activated when the throttle setup

for that condition is activated in the programming (i.e. THROTTLE HOLD or THR-CURVE.)

• To change which condition’s curve is being edited, cursor up above POINT1 and select. For clarity, the name of the

condition currently active (switched on at the radio) is shown in parentheses behind the name of the condition whose

curve is being edited.

84

• Revo. mixing rates are 5-point curves. For a clockwise-turning rotor, the rudder is mixed in the clockwise direction

when collective pitch is increased; for counterclockwise-turning, the opposite. Change the operating direction setting

by changing the signs of the numbers in the curve from plus (+) to minus (–) and vice versa. Suggested defaults:

• Clockwise rotation: -20, -10, 0, +10, +20% from low throttle to high.

• Counterclockwise rotation: +20, +10, 0, -10, -20% from low throttle to high.

• Adjust to the actual values that work best for your model.

• Revo. curves for idle-ups are often v-shaped to provide proper rudder input with negative pitch and increased throttle

during inverted flight. (Rudder is needed to counter the reaction whenever there is increased torque. In inverted flight,

throttle stick below half has increased throttle and negative pitch, therefore increasing torque and rotating the

helicopter unless the revo. mix is also increasing appropriately.)

IDLE-UPS: additional flight conditions available specifically for helicopters. These additional flight conditions contain

different throttle curves, collective pitch curves, revo. mixing, and trims (except IDLE-3) to make the helicopter perform

certain maneuvers more easily. Lastly, the gyro and dual rate functions may be set to provide separate rates per condition

selected, including one for each idle-up.

One of the most common flight conditions can easily flip from upright to inverted and back. To do so, the pitch curve is

set to 0 pitch at half stick, positive pitch (climb upright) above half, and negative pitch (climb when inverted) below half

stick. The throttle curve is adjusted to allow the engine to run consistently throughout the changes in pitch.

Additional idle-ups may be used to maximize the helicopter’s flight characteristics in certain types of flight (i.e. fast

forward motion, backward) or maneuvers (loops, rolls, stall turns), or even the same maneuver but changing from headinghold/

AVCS gyro mode to normal gyro mode. The 9C provides 3 idle-ups to allow the modeler 3 additional setups along

with the normal flight condition. (Note that IDL3 does not include governor settings.)

Adjustability:

• SWITCH G (9CA) or E (9CH) is programmed for normal (NORM), idle-up 1 (IDL1), and idle-up 2 (IDL2) curves. This

switch/position assignment is not adjustable.

• Activated with the throttle curve for that condition in THR-CURVE.

• Curves are adjusted to maintain constant RPM even when the collective pitch is negative (inverted).

• Note that REVO. mixing has one curve for idle-ups 1 and 2 and a second curve just for idle-up3.

• Gyro settings may be set separately for each idle-up. (See p. 89.)

• Governor settings may be set up to follow Normal/Idle1/Idle2, but do not offer a setting to adjust for each of the 5

conditions like gyro. (See p. 89.)

• Activating OFFSET makes the TRIM LEVERS adjust the trim separately in each of the idle-up conditions.

For an example of throttle and pitch curves and revo, please see Normal Flight Condition Setup, p. 81.

85

OFFSET: Optional separate trims in addition to those for the normal condition. This function is used to automatically change

the trim of a helicopter, for example, when transitioned from hover to flying at high speed. A clockwise-rotation rotor

helicopter tends to drift to the right at high speed, so an aileron offset may be applied to offset the helicopter to the left.

The necessary elevator offset varies with model geometry, so it must be determined by noting collective pitch changes at

high speed. The rudder offset is affected by both revo. mixing and trim lever movement while in the offset function.

Adjustability:

• Complete switch assignability, plus a CONDITION option that creates/switches between individual trims for each of the

idle-ups.

• When OFFSET is active (its switch is on), moving the TRIM LEVERS adjusts the stored offset, not the trims in the normal

condition.

• When OFFSET is inactive (its switch is off), the OFFSET and any trim adjustments to it have no effect (model obeys the

trim settings of the currently-active flight condition.)

• Defaults to ON.

• When OFFSET is inhibited, trim adjustments made in any flight condition affect all flight conditions.

• Rapid jumps caused by large offsets can be slowed using the DELAY function.

NOTE: Remember, offsets and revo. mixes are not recommended when using heading-hold/AVCS gyros because they

conflict with the automatic corrections to trim and torque that AVCS provides.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

86

Set up separate trims for each of the

three idle-up conditions.

Adjust the idle-up 2 rudder trim to

correct for torque at high speeds.

Where next?

Open the OFFSET function.

Change switch setting to COND

Select IDL2.

Adjust trim settings as needed. (Ex:

rudder to +8%.)

Close menus and confirm difference in

trims between normal and idle-up 2.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to OFFSET.

to COND.

to IDL2.

to +8%.

E (9CH) or G (9CA) from

NORMAL to IDL2. Check that rudder

trim changes.

DELAY: see p. 87.

THR-HOLD: see p. 83.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing

(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING for idle-ups: see p. 85.

DELAY: The Delay function provides a smooth transition between the trim positions whenever OFFSET, REVO. MIXING, or

THROTTLE HOLD functions are turned on and off.

Adjustability:

• Separate delay times are available for aileron (SW1), elevator (SW1), and rudder, depending upon swashplate type.

• With a 50% delay setting, the servo takes about a half-second to move to its new position…quite a long time.

• In general, delays of approximately 10-15% are sufficient.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

87

Set up a delay on all 3 channels to ease

the transition from one flight condition

to another so there are no “hard jumps.”

Where next?

Open the DELAY function.

Adjust AIL response as needed. (Ex:

aileron to +8%.)

Repeat for other channels.

Close menus and confirm slowed

transitions.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to DELAY.

to +8%.

to ELE. Repeat step above.

E (9CH) or G (9CA) from

NORMAL to IDL2. Check that servos

move gradually to new positions.

THR-HOLD: see p. 83.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing

(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING for idle-ups: see p. 85.

HOVERING ADJUSTMENTS (HOV-THR and HOV-PIT):

Hovering throttle and hovering pitch are fine-tuning adjustments for the throttle and collective pitch curves individually,

affecting performance only around the center point and only in the normal condition. They allow in-flight tweaking of the

curves for ideal setup.

Adjustability:

• Rotor speed changes caused by temp., humidity, altitude or other changes in flying conditions are easily accommodated.

• Both adjustments may be inhibited if not desired.

• Both adjustments may also be set to NULL, temporarily turning off the knob but maintaining the last memorized setting.

• Adjustments may be memorized and then the knobs returned to center point to use that amount of adjustment. Allows

easy use of the trimming knobs for multiple models. (Note that when memorization is repeated with the knob offset

from center, the trim value accumulates.)

• Adjustments are quickly reset to the initial value by turning the dial until the trim reads 0%, memorizing, then

returning the knob to its center position.

• Note that all functions, including these, assume the model hovers at half stick.

• Available in normal condition only.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

88

Fine-tune hovering with the hovering

adjustments. Remember these affect

only the hovering (normal) condition.

Adjust throttle and collective pitch

curves until model hovers nicely. In

flight, adjust collective pitch and

throttle curves near hover point

independently with HOV-THR and HOVPIT

knobs.

Store new settings after flight.

Where next?

Open the HOV-THR function.

Optional: change which knob adjusts

each hovering curve. NULL locks in

curve in last stored position.

Store the current dial settings prior to

selecting another model.

Close.

Open the HOV-PIT function.

Store the current dial settings prior to

selecting another model.

Close.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to HOV-THR.

to desired knob.

for one second to store.

or VR(C) to center.

to HOV-PIT.

for one second to store.

or VR(A) to center.

THR-HOLD: see p. 83.

Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing

(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING for idle-ups: see p. 85.

D/R,EXP: see p. 35.

GYROS and GOVERNORS: Using electronics to take some of the complexity out of setups and flight.

What is a gyro? A gyroscope is an electronic unit that senses motion and corrects for it. For example, if the wind blows

your helicopter’s tail to the left, a gyro will sense that motion (and confirm that no input was given) and will correct for it.

How does it help in helicopter setup? A good gyro will totally eliminate the need for revo. mixing. The gyro will sense

and correct the unwanted motion for you, so you don’t have to spend time to get a complex curve operating properly.

Gyro sensor kinds: There are many different kinds of gyros. Early gyros were mechanical, with a spinning drum similar

to a child’s gyroscope toy. The next generation utilized a special type of crystal, called piezoelectric, which sensed the

motion and provided an electrical pulse. The finest gyros at the time of this writing are SMM technology. These silicone

micro machines, or computer chips, sense the motion. SMM is far more accurate and less susceptible to inaccuracies

caused by temperature changes, etc.

Types of gyro responses:

• Normal: sense motion and dampen it (if the gyro rotates off course for 2 seconds, it corrects for 2 seconds).

• Heading-hold/AVCS: calculate the angle of rotation (by tracking the time/rate of change) and then provide correction

until the same rotation is achieved.

• Stick priority: a feature on most high-end gyros. The more input given on the channel the gyro controls, the less

sensitive the gain is automatically. This way, if you give a large input for a stall turn, for example, the gyro turns itself

off and does not fight the stall turn. As you ease off the rudder, the gain increases again, minimizing tail wag and

keeping the model straight. (If your gyro does not include stick priority, you can manually create it. Please see

www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.)

Choosing the right gyro for your skills, your helicopter, and your budget:

• Mechanical: some are still available. They are very challenging to set up and not as reliable as piezo or SMM.

• Non-Heading-Hold Piezo: these are now inexpensive gyros that are reliable and easy to set up. Some have dual rates

and remote gain control to adjust sensitivity in flight. Lack heading-hold capabilities for precision flying.

• Heading-Hold Piezo: Until recently, the cream of the crop. Expensive, and more complex to set up. Adds GPS-like heading

recognition. Exhibits minor difficulties with temperature drift (position setting varying with unit’s temperature).

• Heading-Hold SMM: 21st Century gyro technology. Computer chip technology. Expensive, easier set up, higher durability.

Significant decrease in temperature sensitivity. Many include frame rate settings to allow faster response when using

specialized digital servos. Examples:

• GY401: Simpler set up. Ideal for learning aerobatics through 3D.

• GY502: Better centering than 401 for more advanced aerobatics. Ideal through Class III competition.

• GY601: Exceptional center. Extremely fast response time. Requires specialized servo.

GYRO: simplifies adjusting/selecting the gyro sensitivity, and can provide more than 2 gyro gain settings. (The higher the

gain, the more correction the gyro provides and the “softer” or less responsive the helicopter feels.) This function

makes the best possible use of the inflight adjustable gain of most gyros..

Adjustability:

• Plug the gyro’s sensitivity adjustment to channel 5 of the receiver. (not assignable)

• STD and AVCS/Heading-hold (GY) setup types available to simplify adjustments for AVCS/Heading-hold gyros.

• Full switch assignability or may select Cond. option.

• Cond. option provides separate gyro settings, one for each condition, automatically selected with the condition. Allows

changes in gain to meet the specific needs of each flight condition.

• Each gyro setting may be set from –100 to +100 gain, equating to ATV settings of –100% to +100%.

• Dual mode gyros (heading-hold/AVCS and normal) are easily triggered to each mode by changing the gyro setting’s

sign. Negative settings trigger normal mode; positive settings are AVCS mode.

• Larger percentages indicate more gain, or gyro responsiveness.

• Tail wagging or shaking indicates excessive gain settings. Turn down gyro setting until wag stops.

89

Gain Example for AVCS/Heading-hold Gyros (GY)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

0% -100% +100%

"Heading Hold Mode" "Normal Mode"

100% NOR 0% 100% AVC

GY

STD

90

Set up a heading-hold/AVCS gyro with

heading-hold/AVCS setting in idle-ups

1 and 2 and normal mode setting in

idle-up3 and normal.

Where next?

Open and activate the GYRO function.

Optional: change gyro type to

Heading-hold (GY).

Optional: change switch assignment.

Ex: select Cond.

Adjust gyro rates as needed. (Ex:

NORM, IDL3 to –50%. IDL1 and 2 to

+50% as starting points.)

Close the function.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to GYRO.

to SW.

to Cond.

to NORM 50%.

to AVC 50%. Repeat as needed.

GOVERNOR: see p. 91.

D/R,EXP: see p. 35.

DELAY: see p. 87.

GOVERNORS:

What is a governor? A governor is made up of a set of sensors which read the RPM of the helicopter’s head, and a control

unit that automatically adjusts the throttle setting to maintain a constant head speed regardless of changes in pitch of blades,

weather conditions, etc. Governors are extremely popular in competition helicopters due to the consistency provided.

How does it help in helicopter setup? The governor eliminates the need to spend large amounts of time setting up throttle

curves, as it automatically adjusts the engine’s RPM to maintain the desired head speed.

GOVERNOR: The Governor mixing function is used to adjust the GV-1 (Governor) speed settings (rS1, rS2, rS3) from the transmitter.

(If you are using a different governor, follow the manufacturer's instructions.)

Adjustability:

• On/off may be separate from speed switching by plugging governor on/off into ch8 and changing CUT-CH setting.

• If using separate on/off, switch assignment is totally adjustable. Be careful not to assign governor off to a condition

switch if you want the governor to function in that condition.

GV-1 connections

Magnetic sensor

Throttle servo

Control amp

Mixture servo

Connected only when

fuel mixture function

used.

Throttle

channel

Speed setting channel

Connected when speed set from

transmitter

Governor ON/OFF / Mixture trim channel

Connected when the governor is turned on and off

from transmitter and when mixture trim function is

used, or when mixture curve data is sent from transmitter

to governor

Receiver

91

• Speed switching and governor ON/OFF may be together using one switch or ON/OFF switching may be performed

using an independent switch/channel.

• When speed setting control uses CH7 and separate ON/OFF switch is not used, CH8 can be used for other functions.

• In-flight adjustment of the head speed (for easy adjustment during tuning) may be created using an additional channel

and a programmable mix. See www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html for details.

The GV-1 controls throttle when it is active, so the throttle will not obey any FailSafe settings preset for throttle in

the transmitter. Always set the FailSafe setting for the GV-1’s on/off channel to OFF. This way the governor is shut

off and the throttle obeys the FailSafe throttle commands.

Setting example: When speed and ON/OFF are using one switch:

• The relationship of the governor speed setting rS1~rS3 and the switch positions conforms to the table above.

• In throttle hold, always check that the governor is off.

• If the speed value rises when the cut switch is activated, reverse the “DIR” setting from +LIMIT to -LIMIT or vice versa.

Expert Tip: Mounting the GV-1 to the counter gear instead of the fan

dramatically simplifies installation in many models.

92

Governor Speed

RS1: OFF

RS2: 1400

RS3: 1700

Switch Position

(Switch C or G)

Up or NORM

CNTR or IDL1

DOWN or IDL2

Rate (%)

0

50

100

Adjustment from Tx.

Use up to 0%. (Governor

speed display reads “off”.)

Speed adjusted by raising

and lowering rate.

Speed adjusted by

lowering rate.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:

93

Set up a GV1 governor to use both

channels into the receiver and switch

between the governor settings

automatically when changing conditions.

Consider setting the battery FailSafe

settings and other helpful functions on

the GV-1 itself.

Where next?

Open and activate the GOVERNOR

function.

Optional: change cut-off channel to

channel 8 and assign switch and

direction for on/off (channel 8).

Optional: change switch assignment

to select governor settings. Ex: select

switch that selects the conditions.

Adjust governor speed settings per

switch position or condition as needed.

(Ex: defaults are fine.) Allows head

speed adjustment from transmitter.

Close the function.

for 1 second.(If basic, again.)

to GOVERNOR.

to ACT.

to CH8.

to - if opposite switch

direction is desired.

to desired SWITCH.

to SW.

to G.

to each SWITCH position.

or as needed.

to next SWITCH position. Repeat.

GYRO: see p. 89.

Adjust FailSafe (F/S) settings (p. 43).

Adjust idle-up 3 collective pitch curve for same rates of climb upright/inverted.

See p. 85.

Adjust elevator/aileron response to fit your flying style: see D/R,EXP and END

POINT/SWASH AFR: pp. 35, 32, 79.

94

GLOSSARY

3D: Common name for certain types of aerobatic maneuvers. Aircraft: flying below the model’s stall speed, such as

torque rolls. Helicopters: combining 2 or more maneuvers, such as rolling loop.

4.8V: 4.8 volt battery pack, made of 4 Ni-Cd 1.2V cells. See Accessories.

5-cell: 6.0 volt battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories.

6V (6Volt): battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories.

ACCELERATION: a delay mix which richens engine mixture and then returns to normal to compensate for abrupt throttle

changes. See THR-NEEDLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Accessories: additional optional items which may be used with your 9C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

ACRO: model type designed for use with powered aircraft. Selected in the MODEL submenu under TYPE . . . . . . . . . . ..29

ACRO vs GLID comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

ACT. Active. Make a feature able to be utilized. Opposite of INH. Only visible in certain features.

Adjustable Function Rate: see SWASH AFR.

Adjustable Servo Travel (AST): a specific type of end point adjustment. See END POINT.

Adjustable Travel Limited (ATL): End point adjustment for low end only, for throttle channel. See ATL.

Adjustable Travel Volume (ATV): an older, less specific term for end point adjustment. See END POINT.

ADVANCE menus: Specific menus for each model type which allow the modeler to access and program the radio’s more

advanced features.

AFR: Adjustable function rate. Used only in HELI model types with CCPM heads. See SWASH AFR.

AIL-2: second aileron servo assignment. See Twin aileron servos.

AIL1/2/3/4: Designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the aileron command. Ex: when using

ailevators, the two elevator servos are also acting as ailerons 3 and 4 (unless you set their values to 0). See Twin aileron

servos and Twin elevator servos.

Aileron: surface that controls the roll of the model. Also called cyclic roll on a helicopter.

Aileron-to-flap mixing: Mixing used to create full-span aileron action. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable

mix. This is the default setup of one mix in GLID.

Aileron-to-rudder mix: Mixing that automatically creates a “coordinated turn”. Not a preprogrammed mix. See

Programmable mix. This is the default setup of one curve mix in HELI / GLID.

Aileron Differential: Decreased down aileron travel when compared to up aileron travel. Minimizes “dragging” the low

wing and creates more axial rolls. See Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Ailevator: two elevators on separate channels, also capable of acting as additional ailerons. See Twin elevator servos.

AILEVATORS: (ACRO) Twin elevator servos plugged into separate channels, used to control elevator with the option to

also act as ailerons in conjunction with the primary ailerons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Airbrake-to-elevator mixing: (GLID) Applies up or down elevator when airbrakes are deployed, correcting for any pitch

change from the added drag. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.

Airbrake: (GLID) Leading edge flaps on gliders, controlled by CHANNEL 3 (NORMALLY THROTTLE) STICK.

AIRBRAKE: (ACRO) Combines elevator, flap, and optionally spoilers to suddenly slow the model for spot landings. May

be triggered by THROTTLE STICK POSITION. For similar glider programming, see BUTTERFLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

AMA: Academy of Model Aeronautics. Non-profit organization governing model aircraft flight in the US. . . . . . . . . .5

AST: Adjustable Servo Travel. See END POINT.

ATL: Adjustable Travel Limited. Standard type of trim used for throttle, where the trim is effective only in the idle portion of the

THROTTLE STICK POSITION. Normal trims affect the entire travel of the servo (ex: elevator trims), but ATL trims only the low end

of the throttle movement, allowing throttle idle adjustments that don’t over-drive the servo at full throttle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

ATV: Older, less clear terminology for end point adjustment. See END POINT.

Autorotation: The ability of a helicopter to land safely without engine power, using the stored energy in the blade’s

rotation to produce lift for flaring.

AUX-CH: Auxiliary channel setup. Used to assign which KNOBS/SWITCHES/SLIDERS control channels 5-9. Includes CH9 servo

reverse. Also allows assignment of a channel to mixing only (assigned as NULL), with no primary control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Backup battery: battery used to protect data storage in case of removal of master transmitter battery. In most Futaba

radios, including the 9C, EEPROM data storage is used, so no backup battery is used or needed.

BACKUP ERROR: transmitter’s hard-coded memory has been lost. Send for service immediately. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Base-Loaded antenna: also called Whip antenna. Aftermarket equipment not approved by Futaba.

Basic model setups: guidelines to setting up the most basic models of each type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 22

GLID 61

HELI 74

BASIC menus: Specific menus with most commonly used features for each model type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 25

GLID 68

HELI 74

Battery care and charging. (Charging the Ni-Cd batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Battery FailSafe: determines how the receiver indicates an airborne pack low-battery warning. Defaults: 56% throttle,

requires throttle to idle to override. To adjust the warning point, set a THROTTLE STICK POSITION in F/S. . . . . . . . . . . . .43

BEEP: tone emitted by transmitter to signify a variety of situations. See Error messages.

Binding: friction in a joint exceeding the movement of the linkage. Sticking or inability to continue movement. The servo

continues to attempt to move the surface beyond its power/capabilities, rapidly draining battery power as it continues to struggle.

Brake flap mixing: (GLID) Three mixes: brake flap- to-elevator, to-aileron and to-speed flaps. 1) compensate for

unwanted reaction to lowering the brake flap, 2) increase brake flap area by including the flaperons, and 3) add lift to

increase maneuverability. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.

Buddy Box: see Trainer box.

BUTTERFLY: (GLID) [also called crow, AIRBRAKE (ACRO)]. Activates up flaperons and down flaps for gliding speed control

without spoilers or airbrakes. Note: More adjustable programming is available in ACRO, AIRBRAKE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

CAMPac: Optional extended data storage module. Futaba stock # DP16K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

CCPM: Cyclic (pitch and roll) Collective Pitch Mixing. Multiple servos work in unison on the helicopter’s head to create one

or more of the control functions. Ex: 3 servos set at 120 degrees operate the entire head. The 2 forward servos work together to

rotate both the blade’s pitch and the roll cyclic (aileron) in a SR3 head type. See MODEL TYPE, HELI.

CH5&6: setting in AIL-2 that allows the second aileron servo to be in channel 5. See Twin aileron servos.

CH6 or 7: default setting in AIL-2. Second aileron servo is in channel 6 or 7 depending on function used. See Twin aileron servos.

Channel 9 switch selection and direction control: See AUX-CH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Channel delay: see THROTTLE DELAY (ACRO) and DELAY (HELI).

Charge: to increase the electrical energy, measured as voltage, available in a battery pack. See Battery care and charging.

Condition: (HELI) separate flight setup that has significant adjustability separate from the basic model setup. See IDLEUP

1, 2, 3 and THROTTLE HOLD.

Contact information, North American Service Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

95

Copy model: see MODEL COPY.

Crow: see BUTTERFLY (GLID) and AIRBRAKE (ACRO).

Cursor: See SELECT BUTTONS.

Curve Mix: a mix that does not have the same reaction at all points along the master channel. See Programmable mix.

Cyclic: horizontal controls on a helicopter. Cyclic pitch is typically called elevator. Cyclic roll is typically called aileron.

Data reset: erase all data in a specific model. See RESET.

DELAY: (HELI) slows the servo’s reaction time when changing from one condition to another. Eases any “jumps” in

transition from one pitch setting to another, etc. Also see THROTTLE DELAY, p. 57 (ACRO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

DELAY-ELE: (ACRO) portion of AIRBRAKE that slows the input of the elevator to avoid sudden jumps in pitch. See AIRBRAKE.

Delta peak charger: common name for a specialized charger designed and required to properly peak charge both NiMH

and NiCd batteries, actually called a Zero Delta V Peak Charger. See Battery Care and Charging.

Dial: transmitter’s rotary control and button used in various ways during programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Dial mix: mix that uses a knob or slider as the master control, moving the slave servo based upon the movement of the

knob or slider. See Prog. mix.

Differential: uneven movement in each direction of a control surface. Usually used when discussing ailerons or when

describing an undesirable unevenness in movement of other controls. See Twin aileron servos.

Diode: an electronic device which only allows current to flow one direction. Used to protect radio against power surge

and reversed polarity during charging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

DIR-SW: switches that change between the 4 separate directions of snaps available. See SNAP ROLL.

Discharge: to deplete the electrical energy in a battery pack, usually to its lowest safe voltage, for storage or as a part of

regular maintenance. See Battery care and charging.

DP16K: see CAMPac.

DSC: direct servo control. Programming and cable combination which allows operation of all receiver channels and

functions without the transmitter transmitting. Plugs into trainer port of transmitter and special plug on receiver. Leave

power off for both transmitter and receiver. Only the R149DP and R309DPS receivers currently support DSC.

Dual aileron servos: (ACRO / GLID) a model using 2 servos on 2 separate channels to operate ailerons. May include

flaperon action or aileron differential. See Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Dual elevator servos: (ACRO / GLID) a model using 2 servos on 2 separate channels to operate elevators. Includes elevon,

V-tail, ailevator. See Twin elevator servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Dual rates (D/R,EXP): reduce/increase the servo travel by flipping a switch (or by stick position). Used to make model

more comfortable to fly in different maneuvers. 9C supports triple rates by simply assigning dual rates to 3 position

switches. Includes exponential function, see EXP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Elapsed Time Counter reset: see TIMER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

ELE1/2/3/4: designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the elevator command. Ex: when

using elevon, the two wing servos are acting as elevators 1 and 2. See Twin elevator servos.

Elevator: surface which controls the model’s rate of climb or descent. Also called cyclic pitch on helicopters.

Elevator-to-airbrake mix: (GLID) used to allow the model to loop even tighter on elevator input by having airbrakes

work with elevators. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default programming for one

curve mix in GLID.

Elevator-to-flap mix: (ACRO / GLID) Used to apply flaps along with elevators to increase lift, allowing modeler to fly at

slower speeds, make tighter loops or turns, etc. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default

setting of one mix in ACRO and GLID.

96

Elevator-to-pitch mix: (HELI) used to adjust pitch to counter the loss of angle of attack when elevator input is given. Not

a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default setting of one mix in HELI.

ELEVON: flying wing configuration with 2 servos working together to create both aileron and elevator action. See Twin

elevator servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Elevons: two surfaces, one on each wing, which work as both ailerons and elevators. See ELEVON.

END BUTTON: control button used during programming to return to previous menu or close menu altogether.

END POINT: often abbreviated EPA. Adjusts the total travel in each direction of proportional servos regardless of their control

assignment. Ex: adjustment to AIL channel will adjust only the servo plugged into channel 1 even if being used as one of two

flaperons or elevons. Note: End point is not an absolute; mixing can still drive the servo farther than this setting. . . . . . . . . . .32

Engine cut: see THR-CUT.

EPA: see END POINT.

Error messages: warnings/cautions provided by the radio when potential problems may exist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Exponential (D/R,EXP): adjustment to the relationship of STICK MOVEMENT to servo movement, typically used to soften

overly sensitive models around center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

FailSafe (F/S): sets servo positions when interference is encountered or signal is lost. Available only in PCM

transmission mode. Also includes Battery FailSafe settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

FLAP1/2/3/4: designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the flap commands. Ex: when acting as

flaperons, the two aileron servos are ailerons 1 and 2 and also flaps 1 and 2 (unless you set their values to 0, then they move

only as aileron no matter what flap commands are given). See Twin aileron servos and Twin elevator servos.

Flap-to-aileron mix: (ACRO / GLID) used to create full span flap reaction in flight. Not a preprogrammed mix. See

Programmable mix. This is the default setup of one mix in GLID.

Flap-to-elevator mix: (ACRO / GLID) used to counteract unwanted changes in pitch when flaps are deployed. Not a

preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default setup of one mix in ACRO and GLID.

FLAPERON: one servo on each aileron, plugged into channels 1 and 6, which operate both as ailerons and as flaps. See

Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

FLAP-TRIM: Adjustment of central position of flaperons, default assigned to CHANNEL 6 KNOB. May also be used as

primary or only control of flaperons acting as flaps, or other mixes may be set up. See Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . .46

Frequency: channel on which radio transmits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Frequency band: In the entire spectrum, transmissions are designated in terms of “frequency bands” which exhibit similar

properties. In the US, specific frequencies within the 72MHz band are regulated by the FCC to be used solely for remote

control aircraft. 50MHz band is available for model use by those holding a HAM amateur radio operator’s license. 75MHz

is solely for remote control ground models. 27MHz is legal for air or ground use. To change bands on the 9C, simply

purchase and install a module on the proper band. Receiver band MUST be changed by a service center. . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Fuel mixture control: (ACRO / HELI) see THROTTLE-NEEDLE.

FUNC: function mode of TRAINER, allows student radio to use the computer programming for that channel in the master radio.

Ex: allows a student with a 4-channel transmitter to fly an 8-servo aerobatic plane or a 5-servo helicopter. See TRAINER.

Gain: the responsiveness or amount of control given the gyro. On a high gain, the gyro is very active and overrides

nearly all other actions. Too high a gain may result in “wagging” at the surface as the gyro over-corrects repeatedly in

each direction. See GYRO SENS.

Gear doors: covers for retractable landing gear, may be operated separately from landing gear on some models. . . . .64

GLID: model type, glider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Governor: electronic device that reads the speed at which the head is spinning, and adjusts the throttle servo to maintain

the desired speed.

97

GOVERNOR: (HELI) programming which eases the setup of the GV-1 governor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

GV-1: part number/name for Futaba’s electronic governor. See Gyros and Governors and GOVERNOR for details.

Gyro, gyroscope: equipment that senses change in direction and provides input to compensate for that change. For

description of aircraft use, see p. 64. For description of types, and helicopter use, see GYRO SENS.

GYRO SENS (HELI): gyro sensitivity programming designed to ease the setup and use of gyroscopes on model helicopters.

Manual pages include extensive descriptions of gyro types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Gyros and Governors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Heading-hold gyro: gyro that specifically measures the unwanted deflection angle and compensates until a corresponding angle

has been returned. See Gyros and Governors.

HELI: model type, rotary wing. See MODEL TYPE.

Helicopter radio: transmitter that includes helicopter-friendly switch and control layout and sufficient programming to

at least support a 5-channel helicopter. The 9CA and 9CH radios both contain all needed programming. The 9CH has a

more heli-friendly layout (through switch positioning and no ratchet on throttle for easier hovering)

High band: 72MHz equipment on a channel from 36 to 60. Receiver channel may be changed to any channel within the

high band without needing retuning. Transmitter must not be changed except by certified technician. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

High Rate: See D/R,EXP.

Hover: to maintain a stationary position relative to a point on the ground.

HOVERING PITCH: see Hovering setups.

HOVERING THROTTLE: see Hovering setups.

Hovering setups: in-flight adjustments to pitch and throttle curves around center THROTTLE STICK position (the ideal

hovering point). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Idle management: varying settings and control of the model’s idle. Ex: using IDLE-DOWN to lower engine’s idle point for

landings and certain maneuvers; using THR-CUT function to safely and accurately shut the engine off as needed without

requiring constant adjustment of throttle trims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

IDLE-DOWN: offset mix that slows the engine’s idle point (decreasing the amount of travel of the throttle servo when at

low THROTTLE STICK POSITION). Typically used to keep the model sitting still on the runway prior to take off, for slow

aerobatic maneuvers such as spins, and for landings. See Idle management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

IDLE-UP: separate condition created to allow inverted and other types of flight with a helicopter not easily achieved in

the normal condition. Note: the idle-ups are activated by activating their throttle curves. Also note that OFFSET is

available to create separate trims within each condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

In-flight needle control: see THROTTLE-NEEDLE.

INH: makes a feature inactive/unable to be used. When a function is inhibited, it cannot be used even if the assigned

switch is ON. Turns off functionality without losing any settings. Only visible in specific features.

Inhibit: see INH.

Installation: radio installation and setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Inverted: to fly a model upside-down.

Inverted flight control programming: not available in the 9C. Most modelers no longer use this “crutch” to fly inverted,

instead learning to recognize the model’s behaviors when inverted and compensate appropriately.

Kill switch: (1) throttle cut switch to close carburetor (see THR-CUT, p. 33). (2) gasoline ignition engine kill switch

which removes spark to the plugs to stop the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Launch setting: (GLID) see START-OFS.

98

Linear Mix: a mix that maintains the same relationship of master to slave throughout the whole range. Ex: a mix from

one flap servo to another flap servo at 100% causes the 2nd servo to follow the first servo’s movement exactly through

all points of travel. See Programmable mix.

LINK: mixing function that allows multiple mixes to work in conjunction. See Programmable mix.

Lithium battery: see Backup battery.

Linear: linear, directly proportional. See AIRBRAKE.

Low Band: 72MHz equipment on a channel from 11 to 35. Receiver channel may be changed to any channel within the

low band without needing retuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

LOW BATTERY warning: transmitter’s battery is below a safe flight voltage. Recharge immediately. See Error messages.

Low rate: see D/R, EXP.

MANUAL: controlled by a switch. Ex: see AIRBRAKE.

Master: the primary control. See Programmable mix.

Mechanical gyro: uses a mechanical gyroscope (like a child’s toy gyro) to sense change of angle. See Gyros and

Governors.

MEMORY MODULE INITIALIZE: warning to indicate that the CAMPac installed in the port is not yet formatted or formatted

for a different model of transmitter. Pressing the MODE BUTTON initializes the CAMPac, deleting any existing data and

formatting the CAMPac for use in the 9C. See Error codes.

MHz: Megahertz. Unit used to express frequency. 72MHz channels are aircraft only frequencies; 75MHz are ground model

only frequencies; 27MHz are air and ground both. 50MHz is legal for HAM amateur license holders. See Frequency.

Mix, mixing rate, mix offset, mix links: See Programmable mix.

MIXER ALERT warning: notifies user that a mix is activated which is not considered desirable for engine startup. See

Error messages.

Mode: definition of which channels are assigned to which STICK movements. All 9C radios shipped in the US are Mode

2, with elevator and aileron on the right STICK. To change mode, please visit www.futaba-rc.com.

MODE/PAGE BUTTON: control button on radio’s face used in various parts of programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

MODEL COPY: used to duplicate the settings of one model already in memory into a second model memory. Often used

to set up 2 similar models, or make a copy of a working model to experiment with new setups. Also used to copy

models to/from the CAMpac data storage unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

MODEL NAME: gives each model memory an 8-character name for easy recognition. In MODEL submenu. . . . . . . . . . .27

MODEL RESET: restore all data in a single model memory to defaults, including name and model type. See RESET.

MODEL SELECT: choose the model memory you wish to modify or fly. In MODEL submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

MODEL SELECTION ERROR: the memory last loaded in the transmitter is not currently available (usually because it is on a

CAMPac not currently in the transmitter). See Error messages.

MODEL TYPE: select the type of model the aircraft is, including airplane, 2 glider types, and 5 heli types. . . . . . . . . . . .28

MODUL: modulation, means of transmitting data (PPM, PCM). In PARAMETER submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Module: electronic component which can easily be removed/replaced into the transmitter, which houses all transmission

components. Transmission frequency can be safely, legally and easily changed (including from band to band) by

changing the module. TP-FM is the standard module, available on any 50MHz or 72MHz frequency. You may also

purchase TJ75FM for ground use, 75MHz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Name: see MODEL NAME.

Neckstrap: optional strap to suspend transmitter during use. Futaba stock # FTA8. See Accessories.

99

Ni-Cd: Nickel Cadmium rechargeable battery. Typically used to power transmitter and receiver. See Battery care

and charging.

NiMH: Nickel Metal Hydride rechargeable battery. Newer battery technology than Ni-Cd. Longer run times but more specific

peak charging requirements. [Require a (zero) delta peak charger labeled specifically for use with NiMH batteries.]

NORMAL: trainer mode that does not give student radio the computer programming features of the master radio. See Trainer.

NT8S: standard transmitter battery pack. See Accessories.

NULL: not assigned or never changed. Ex: a mix which has a null switch assignment is always active, and can never be

changed in flight (turned off) no matter which switch is moved.

OFFSET: (HELI) separate trim settings available to each idle-up (using CONDITION) setting, or assigned to separate

switches from the condition switches. When offset is ON, movement of the trim levers adjusts the OFFSET, not the

normal condition’s trims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Offset mix: mix that independently moves the slave servo a set percentage of its total throw, not in relation to any

master. See Programmable mix.

PA2: Pilot Assist. Optional onboard device that uses optical sensors to correct model’s orientation to upright.

PARAMETER submenu: sets specific parameters. Includes reset, type, modulation, second aileron servo setup, and ATL. . . . .28

PCM: Pulse Code Modulation. An electronically encoded method of transmitting data to a receiver to help minimize the effects

of interference. (Transmission is on an FM wavelength, and uses FM crystals, module and trainer cord.). See Modulation.

Peak Charger: charger that automatically stops charging when the battery is fully charged (commonly called “peaked”).

See Battery care and charging.

Piezo gyro: gyro that uses a piezo crystal to sense angular changes. See Gyros and Governors.

Pitch-to-rudder mix: see REVO.

PITCH CURVE: (HELI) curve that sets the response of the collective pitch servo(s) to movement of the throttle/collective

STICK. Independently adjustable in the normal flight mode, one for each of the 3 idle-ups, and one for throttle hold.

Adjusted to provide ideal blade response for various types of maneuvers being performed. For simplicity, the normal

condition’s curve may be set in the BASIC menu. All 5 curves are also adjustable in the ADVANCE menu. . . . . . . . . . . .84

PPM: Pulse Position Modulation. Also known as FM. Type of signal transmission. See Modulation.

Programmable mix: used to cause specific servo responses to specific inputs separate from the basic control setups.

Includes extensive definitions of types and examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Range check or test: to test the transmitter’s control over the model at a specific distance as a precaution in checking its

proper operation prior to flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Rate: amount of control given. Ex: see Programmable mix.

RESET: to delete all data in the existing model only. User CANNOT erase all data in the radio. Only service center can

do so. Part of PARAMETER submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Retractable landing gear: landing gear that is brought up into the model during flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

REVERSE: servo reversing. Used to reverse the direction of a servo to ease installation and set up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Rudder-to-aileron mix: (ACRO / GLID) used to counteract undesirable roll (roll coupling) that happens with rudder input,

especially in knife-edge. Gives proper aileron input to counteract roll coupling when rudder is applied. Not a

preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default programming for one linear and one curve mix in

ACRO and GLID.

Rudder-to-elevator mix: used to counteract undesirable pitch (pitch coupling) with rudder input, especially in knife edge flight.

Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default programming for one curve mix in ACRO.

100

Rudder-to-throttle mix: (HELI) adds throttle to counter the added load from increasing pitch of the tail blades,

maintaining a constant head-speed with rudder. (This is a minor effect and is not critical in most helicopters.) Not a

preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.

Rx: receiver.

SAFE MODE: feature in snap roll programming that does not allow a snap roll if landing gear is lowered. See Snap roll.

Sailplane: glider, non-powered model aircraft type. See GLID / MODEL TYPE.

SELECT (CURSOR) BUTTONS: controls used in various ways during programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Select a model: see MODEL SELECT.

Service Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

SERVO: bar graph display on screen to show real time movement/commands sent to servos by transmitter in response to

user movements. Also includes a servo test feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Servo reversing: see REVERSE.

Servo Slow: see Channel delay.

Servo testing, servo display: See SERVO.

SET: to accept. Usually done by pressing and holding the dial when instructed.

Slave: channel that moves in response to the command of the master. See Programmable mix.

Slaving servos: see programmable mix, p. 59.

Slider assignability: sliders on side of radio, known as VR(D) and VR(E) in programming, may be assigned to control

channels 5-8 in AUX-CH, used as the primary control of a mix in programmable mixes, etc.

Slow: see Channel delay.

Smoke system: injects a specialized smoke oil into the hot exhaust to create air-show like smoke trails. . . . . . . . . . . .64

SNAP ROLL: (ACRO) combines rudder, elevator and aileron movement to cause the aircraft to snap or spin at the flip of a

switch. 9C offers 4 separate snaps with 1 or 2 switches used for selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Speed Flaps: main flaps on a 5-servo glider.

SPEED OFS (GLID): speed run offset programming. Offsets aileron/elevator/rudder settings to provide minimum drag for

high speed flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

START OFS (GLID): start offset programming. Offsets aileron/elevator/rudder settings to provide for maximum lift during launch. . . . . . .71

Stick adjustments: change stick tension and height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

STk-THR: assigned to THROTTLE STICK. See AIRBRAKE for example.

SUB-TRIM: used to fine tune the center or neutral point of each servo. Allows full trim function from the trim sliders for

flight trimming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

SWASH AFR: (HELI, CCPM types only) adjustment of the travel of all servos involved in the particular control’s

movement only during the movement of that control. Ex: reverse the direction of movement of collective pitch while

not affecting the direction of movement of either cyclic control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Swashplate type: (HELI). Part of the model type selection process. Selects specific heli swashplate geometry, such as one

of four available types of “CCPM.” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Switch programmability: MOST features are reassignable to a variety of switches, including simply moving an

auxiliary control such as flaps from the stock dial to a switch or other location. See AUX-CH.

Synthesized module/receiver: The 9C is compatible with the R309DPS Futaba synthesized receiver that can be used on

any 72MHz channel. There is not a synthesized transmitter module that is safe/FCC certified/approved for use with the

9C at the time of this printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

101

Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Thermal hunting setup: using specific programming setups to have the model respond noticeably to the lift of a

thermal. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.

THR-DELAY: (ACRO) throttle delay, slows engine servo response to imitate the spool-up action of a turbine engine. May also

be used creatively to create a delayed servo on a different function (see www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.) . . . . . . . .57

THR-REV: reverses the throttle trim function to the top of the THROTTLE STICK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

THROTTLE-NEEDLE: (ACRO / HELI) curve mix that adjusts a second servo, controlling the engine’s mixture, to get optimum

RPM and performance from the engine at all settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Throttle-to-rudder mix: used to compensate with rudder when throttle is applied on take off. Not a preprogrammed

mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default setting of a mix in ACRO and GLID.

THROTTLE CURVE: (HELI) adjusts how the servo responds to the THROTTLE STICK position along a 5 point curve. Separate

curves available for each idle-up and normal. For simplicity, normal curve may be edited from BASIC menu. All curves

may be edited together in the ADVANCE menu. Activating an idle-up’s throttle curve is what activates that idle-up. .81,84

Throttle cut or throttle kill: THR-CUT. (ACRO / HELI) Offset mix which closes the throttle servo to a set position when the

assigned switch is moved to shut the engine off without having to fiddle with trim settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

THROTTLE HOLD: (HELI) makes the throttle servo non-responsive to THROTTLE STICK position, and moves the throttle to idle.

Used to practice autorotations. NOTE: THR-HOLD must be activated, then the default pitch curve adjusted properly. . . . . . . . .83

Throttle trim adjustment: see ATL to change throttle trim from “idle only” to full trim control like all other channels. See

THR-REV to reverse THROTTLE STICK completely, including moving trim to the top of the THROTTLE STICK. See also Idle

management for details on idle down and throttle cut functions.

TIMER: adjust the timer functions, used to keep track of flight time on a tank of fuel, etc. The “trigger” to turn timers

on/off may be programmed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

TP-FM: single-frequency module. See Module.

TRAINER: software that allows 2 radios to be connected via trainer cord, giving student control of all or some of the

channels of the aircraft at the flip of a switch. FUNC trainer mode allows student to use mixing in the master transmitter,

for example dual rates, exponential, fly a 5-channel helicopter with a 4-channel buddy box, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Trainer box: stripped-down radio system which does not have the ability to transmit, is used only as a student’s radio

when instructing while using a trainer cord and the trainer programming.

Trainer cord: cord used to connect two compatible radios to use for flight instruction. See Accessories.

TRIM menu: adjusts rate at which the trim responds to movement of the trim sliders. Also has a reset function to reset

the model’s electronic trims to zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

TRIM OFFSET: (HELI) sets an offset or adjustment of trim when switching between conditions. See OFFSET.

TRIM option in mixes: ability to adjust the slave servo’s center when the master servo’s center is adjusted using the trim

sliders (for example when using two separate flap servos). See Programmable mix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Triple rate: 3rd control travel setting available in flight. See D/R,EXP.

Twin aileron servos: use of 2 or more servos on separate channels to control aileron action. Includes flaperon, aileron

differential, and elevon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Twin elevator servos: use of 2 or more servos on separate channels to control the elevator of a model. Includes elevon,

ailevator, V-tail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Tx: transmitter.

Voltmeter, voltage reading: displays transmitter voltage on home screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

VR(A-E): variable rate controls. Knobs and sliders on the radio. See switch assignment chart for default assignments.

102

VR(A-C) are knobs; VR(D-E) are sliders on the case sides.

V-tail model Mix: (ACRO / GLID) programming used to control a V-tail model’s tail surfaces, with 2 servos operating 2

control surfaces as both rudder and elevator. See Twin elevator servos.

Warning messages: cautions provided by the radio when certain potential problems exist. See Error messages.

Warranty information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Website: www.futaba-rc.com. Internet location of extensive technical information Futaba products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Whip antenna: aftermarket, shortened antenna. Not approved by Futaba.

103

Futaba 9Z

Digital Servos

Futaba GV-1 Govenor

Bergen Intrepid Gasser Manual

ElectriFly Triton Charger

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

Note: This Quick Reference Guide is a condensed version of only some of the information

given in this manual. It is STRONGLY recommended to read this entire manual before

operating your Triton charger. Refer to the MAIN MENU page of the included programming

flowcharts.

1. Connect Triton to a 12V DC power supply, observing proper polarity.

2. Connect the battery to Triton’s output jacks, observing proper polarity.

3. Determine which battery TYPE you have (NiCd, NiMH, Li-Ion/Li-Po, or Pb).

4. Press the BATT TYPE button to find the correct “charge” screen to match your battery type.

5. To charge a battery:

a. Note: See SETUP MENU on page 13 to make sure all misc. charge parameters are properly set.

b. Determine the appropriate charge current. See “Charging Batteries” on page 8 and the

“R/C Battery Charge / Discharge Chart,” or consult your battery supplier.

c. Press the round dial then rotate to the appropriate charge current. Re-press dial to

confirm setting.

d. *For Li-Ion/Li-Po and Pb batteries only, rotate the dial to the rated voltage of the

battery being charged (check battery label). Re-press dial to confirm setting.

e. Press and hold the dial for 3 seconds to begin charge.

6. To discharge a battery:

a. Determine the appropriate discharge current and cutoff voltage. See “Discharge

Current & Cutoff Voltage” on page 11 and the “R/C Battery Charge / Discharge Chart,”

or consult your battery supplier.

b. While in the “charge” screen for the appropriate battery type, rotate the dial to the

“discharge” screen.

c. Press the dial then rotate to the appropriate discharge current. Re-press dial to

confirm setting.

d. Rotate the dial to set the battery’s appropriate discharge voltage cutoff. Re-press dial

to confirm setting.

e. Press and hold the dial for 3 seconds to start the discharge process.

7. For cycling functions, see the “Charge-To-Discharge and Discharge-To-Charge” section of

this manual.

GMPZ0276 for GPMM3150 Entire Contents Copyright © 2003 V1.1

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Computerized Charger,

Discharger and Cycler

Input Voltage: 10.5 – 15.0V DC

Battery Types, # cells: 1-24 Nickel-Cadmium cells (1.2 – 28.8V NiCd)

1-24 Nickel-Metal Hydride cells (1.2 – 28.8V NiMH)

1-4 Lithium-Ion and Lithium-Polymer cells

(3.6 – 14.8V Li-Ion/Li-Po)

3, 6, 12 Lead-Acid cells (6, 12, 24V Pb)

Fast Charge Current: 0.1 – 5.0A linear (2.5A maximum for Li-Ion/Li-Po)

Fast Charge Termination: “zero deltaV” peak detection for NiCd and NiMH (0∆V)

“constant current / constant voltage” for Pb and

Li-Ion/Li-Po (cc/cv)

*optional thermal cutoff for all battery types

Trickle Charge Current: 0 – 250mA (n/a for Pb and Li-Ion/Li-Po)

Discharge Current: 0.1 – 3.0A (2.5A maximum for Li-Ion/Li-Po)

Discharge Cutoff Voltage: 0.5 – 1.2V per cell NiCd & NiMH (0.8V/cell fixed

during cycle)

Pb fixed at 1.8V per cell

Li-Ion/Li-Po fixed at 3.0V per cell

Cycle Count: one to ten cycles (n/a for Pb and Li-Ion/Li-Po)

Battery Memories: ten battery parameter storage memories

Display Type: 2-line, 32 character LCD

Output Connectors: banana jacks

Case Size: 6.2 x 4.0 x 2.0 in (157 x 102 x 51mm)

Weight: 16.4 oz. (466g)

* Requires thermal probe – GPMM3151

• Great for tiny park flyers, large scale electrics, Tx and Rx batteries, field

batteries, and R/C car batteries!

• Handles 1- 24 NiCd or NiMH cells, 1-4 Lithium-Ion or Lithium-Polymer cells

(Li-Ion/Li-Po), or 6, 12, and 24V lead-acid batteries (Pb).

• “Zero deltaV” peak detection with adjustable sensitivity for NiCd and NiMH

batteries.

• “Constant current / constant voltage” charge method for Pb and Li-Ion/Li-Po

batteries.

• Optional thermal cutoff for fast charge (thermal probe not included).

• 0.1 - 5.0A adjustable charge current (2.5 amps maximum. for Li-Ion/Li-Po).

• Top-off charge feature fully charges NiMHs without overheating.

• 0 - 250mA self-adjusting trickle charge current (NiCd and NiMH only).

• 0.1 - 3.0A adjustable discharge current (2.5A maximum for Li-Ion/Li-Po).

• Adjustable discharge cutoff voltage (fixed for Pb and Li-Ion/Li-Po).

• Charge and discharge currents adjustable in 0.1A (100mA) increments.

• Store parameters for up to 10 batteries in memory.

SPECIAL FEATURES

SPECIFICATIONS

2

• Perform 1 to 10 cycles for battery conditioning and evaluation (NiCd and

NiMH only).

• Recall data for 10 full cycles on a two-line, 32 character LCD.

• Displays input and output voltage, and memorizes peak and average battery

voltages.

• Status screen constantly updates capacity, battery voltage, current, and time

during use.

• Adjustable sound cues.

• Warning messages for improper input voltage, poor connections, unsuitable

battery condition, reverse polarity on output.

• Safety features include cool-off time delay, maximum NiMH charge input, fast

charge safety timer, current overload and reverse polarity protection.

• Built-in cooling fan, for better charge efficiency and extended charger life.

• Do NOT attempt to charge incompatible types of rechargeable batteries as

permanent damage to the battery and charger could result.

• Do not use automotive type battery chargers to power the charger.

• Do not allow water, moisture or foreign objects into the charger.

• Do not block the air intake holes or the fan vent, which could cause the charger

to overheat.

• Do not attempt to use batteries with more cells or total voltage than listed in the

specifications.

• Do not leave the charger unattended while charging. Disconnect the battery

and remove input power from charger immediately if the charger becomes

hot!! Allow the charger or battery to cool down before reconnecting.

• Do not place the charger or battery on a flammable surface or near a flammable

object while in use. Keep away from carpets, cluttered workbenches, etc.

• Always disconnect from power source when not in use.

• Do not overcharge batteries as permanent damage could result. Do not use a

charge or discharge current rate which exceeds the safe level of the battery. Do

not attempt to charge or discharge a battery if it is hot.

• Keep out of reach of children.

While similar in appearance to NiCd batteries and having the same 1.2V rating per

cell, NiMH cells contain a different chemical makeup which requires different care

and handling.

• Do not to allow NiMH batteries to overheat at any time. Heat can adversely

affect the performance of NiMH batteries. If overheating is observed, disconnect

the battery from the charger immediately and allow to cool!

CARE & HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS FOR

NIMH BATTERIES

IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS

3

• Do not deep cycle NiMH batteries as permanent damage could result.

• Do not attempt to use Triton’s NiCd, Pb, or Li-Ion/Li-Po functions with NiMH

batteries.

• NiMH cells do not exhibit the “memory effect” like NiCd cells, so little cycling is needed.

• Store NiMH packs with some voltage remaining on the cells (refer to battery

supplier).

• NiMH cells have a self-discharge rate of approximately 20–25% (compared to

15% for NiCd batteries). It is important to recharge NiMH batteries immediately

prior to use.

Never attempt to care for lithium-ion (Li-Ion) or lithium-polymer (Li-Po) cells in

the same way as other battery types! Li-Ion and Li-Po cells have characteristics

which greatly differ from NiCd, NiMH, or Pb batteries, and thus have different care

and handling requirements. Since all “lithium” batteries are not identical, it is

important to know exactly which specific lithium type cells you have. While different

in physical form, lithium-ion and lithium-polymer batteries do have almost identical

operational characteristics and can be cared for the same way. However, do not

mistake these cell types for lithium-metal or other lithium hybrids, as different care

and handling techniques apply.

• Do not attempt to use Triton’s NiCd, NiMH, or Pb functions with Li-Ion or Li-Po

batteries.

• The Li-Ion/Li-Po chemistry is a very volatile mixture. Misuse can quickly

result in Li-Ion/Li-Po cells getting hot, exploding, or igniting, which could

lead to serious damage or personal injury.

• Li-Ion/Li-Po cells have an 8% self discharge rate, meaning they can hold charge

very well. Thus, there is no need to trickle charge Li-Ion/Li-Po cells.

• Do NOT continue to charge or use Li-Ion/Li-Po cells if they do not recharge

within the specified charging time. Failure to follow this guideline could cause

the battery to become hot, explode, or ignite.

• Li-Ion/Li-Po cells should be charged about once per year at a minimum to

prevent over-discharge.

• Do not discharge Li-Ion/Li-Po cells lower than 3.0V per cell.

• Li-Ion/Li-Po cells have no “memory” effect so little cycling is needed.

• Li-Ion/Li-Po batteries should be stored with about 30%–50% of capacity.

• If Li-Ion/Li-Po cells leak fluid, rinse the affected area well with water and seek

immediate medical care.

• Do NOT continue to charge or discharge a lithium-polymer battery if it overheats

or begins to swell.

WARNING: The Li-Ion/Li-Po chemistry is a very volatile mixture. Misuse and

overcharge can quickly result in Li-Ion/Li-Po cells getting hot, which could lead

to violent explosion and/or fire and serious property damage or personal injury.

CARE & HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS FOR

LITHIUM-ION AND LITHIUM-POLYMER BATTERIES

4

It is strongly recommended to only use lithium-ion/lithium-polymer cells which have

obtained UL1642 approval to ensure they have been produced in accordance with

specific safety criteria. It is also strongly recommended to use UL approved cells

which have been assembled with a charge protection circuit built into the pack. Such

circuits help to regulate cell operation to make sure they operate within specified

current and voltage limits. Batteries not containing a built-in regulative circuit can

accidently be overcharged, thus posing significant risk of fire and/or explosion.

Consult your battery supplier if you are unsure if your lithium-ion/lithiumpolymer

battery has UL1642 approval or includes a built-in protection circuit.

It is strongly recommended to use the Triton Thermal Probe (GPMM3151) anytime

when using a lithium-ion/lithium-polymer battery on the Triton charger. Failure to

do so, and failure to properly program Triton to charge lithium-ion/lithium-polymer

batteries with proper current and temperature cutoff can result in overcharging the

battery. A maximum “temperature cutoff” setting of 100°F (37°C) is recommended.

It is strongly recommended to set Triton’s lithium-ion/lithium-polymer charge

current at a LOW value for safety purposes. Set Triton’s lithium-ion charge current

to NO GREATER than 500mA for initial charges. Closely monitor the temperature of

the lithium-ion/lithium-polymer cells during charge. If cells become excessively

warm to the touch during charge remove them from the charger immediately,

and reduce the level of charge current for future charges to prevent cells from

overheating.

Never attempt to care for Lead-acid (Pb) batteries in the same way as other

battery types! Lead-acid batteries commonly used in R/C hobby field boxes require

unique care and handling methods as they contain different characteristics than

other battery types.

• Do not attempt to use Triton’s NiCd, NiMH, or Li-Ion/Li-Po functions on Pb

batteries.

• Do not exceed 14.7V maximum charge voltage for batteries rated at 12V.

• Pb batteries have a self-discharge rate of 5–10%, meaning they hold charge very

well. Thus, there is no need trickle charge to Pb batteries.

• Pb batteries do not exhibit the “memory effect” like NiCd cells, and therefore little

cycling is needed.

• Do not leave Pb batteries in the full discharge condition, which could cause the

battery to lose its ability to regain full charge.

Triton only accepts DC input power which could come from a power supply or 12V

automotive battery. To achieve Triton’s maximum potential, the power source must

be capable of delivering at least 13 amps of current while maintaining 12 volts DC.

INPUT POWER

CARE & HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS FOR

LEAD-ACID BATTERIES (Pb)

5

Securely connect the charger’s red alligator clip to the positive (+) terminal on the

power source, and the black alligator clip to the negative (-) terminal. Triton will

display an “Input voltage” error message if the input is below 10.5V or above 15.0V.

If this occurs, re-check the input power supply to ensure adequate power is present.

It’s best to use a clean DC power source whose output is filtered to remove unwanted

electrical noise. It’s recommended to disconnect the charger from input power when

not in use.

WARNING! Never accidentally short together the positive (+) and negative (-)

input connections when connected to 12V DC power. Failure to heed this

warning could result in permanent damage to the power source and the charger.

Two banana jacks are located on the right side of the charger for connecting batteries.

Securely connect the battery charge lead to these jacks with the positive (+) lead

connected to the red jack, and the negative (-) lead to the black jack. It is highly

recommended to use pre-assembled charge leads to avoid possible erroneous

operation or data as a result of using poor quality connections. “No battery” will be

displayed if attempting to start a function without a battery connected to Triton’s

output. “Open circuit” will be displayed if the battery becomes disconnected while a

function is in progress. “Reverse polarity” will be displayed if the battery is connected

to Triton’s output backwards.

WARNING! Do not short the battery connections, as permanent damage to the

battery and/or the charger could result and void your warranty.

Three controls make it extremely easy to scroll through menus and select functions.

Under the LCD, the right-hand button marked “BATT TYPE” is typically used to scroll

horizontally in the MAIN MENU to set the battery type. The left-hand “MENU” button

is typically used to jump between the programming menus. The large dial located on

the right side has two modes of operation: rotating the dial in both directions will

scroll through menus and adjust parameters quickly and easily, and pressing down

on the center of the dial acts as another pushbutton which is often used to select

objects on-screen.

Triton contains three menus, each with specific functions. Refer to the quick

reference flowcharts for these menus included with this manual when programming

the charger.

MENU STRUCTURE

CHARGER CONTROLS

OUTPUT BATTERY CONNECTIONS

6

1. The MAIN MENU is where selecting the battery type, charge currents and

voltages, discharge currents and voltages, and cycling parameters are found.

Adjusting and starting any such function is also performed in this menu. The battery

memory storage locations are also in the MAIN MENU where setup parameters for 10

batteries can be stored for easy re-call and charger setup.

2. The SETUP MENU is where many different features that support the charge,

discharge, and cycle functions can be found and adjusted. Safety features, time

delays, cycle counts, peak detection sensitivity, etc. are some of the adjustable

parameters found in this menu.

3. The DATA VIEW MENU is where results of charge and discharge functions are

displayed, as well as input, output, peak, and average voltages. This is also where

Triton contains and displays data stored in the 10 cycle memories.

Note: If an LCD screen which is NOT described in this manual or shown in the

included programming flowcharts becomes accessed accidentally, do NOT attempt to

adjust any values whatsoever. Simply remove and then re-connect power on Triton’s

input. If the same problem repeats itself, or if values in any such unlisted screens are

adjusted by accident, call Hobby Services for further instructions at (217) 398-0007

before proceeding.

This menu is divided horizontally into five sections. All functions for NiCd batteries

are located in the left-most vertical column, followed by functions for NiMH, Pb, and

Li-Ion/Li-Po batteries, with the battery memory screens in the right-hand column.

1. BATTERY TYPE: The first and most important step is to select the proper

battery chemistry. Triton will then automatically adjust all other MAIN and SETUP

MENU screens according to which battery type has been selected. When power is

applied, Triton will default to the “NiCd charge” screen (top-left of flowchart). Press

the BATT TYPE button to scroll horizontally across the MAIN MENU to select the

proper battery type; “NiMH charge,” “Pb charge,” “Li-Ion charge,”(which should be

used for Li-Po batteries also), “Battery Memory,” or back to “NiCd charge.”

IMPORTANT: Different parameters exist for each battery type, so it is important

to select the proper battery type.

2. NiCd AND NiMH FUNCTIONS: When either the “NiCd charge” or “NiMH charge”

screen is shown, rotate the dial to scroll vertically through the “discharge,” “chargeto-

discharge” cycle, “discharge-to-charge” cycle, and back to peak “charge” functions.

3. Pb AND Li-Ion/Li-Po FUNCTIONS: When the “Pb charge” or “Li-Ion charge”

screen is shown, rotate the dial to scroll vertically through the full “charge” and

“discharge” functions. Cycling functions are not available for Pb or Li-Ion/Li-Po

batteries.

MAIN MENU

7

4. BATTERY MEMORIES: Triton includes memory locations for storing specific

parameters for up to 10 different batteries. When the “Memory (10) NiCd” screen is

shown, press the dial briefly to cause the memory number within the parentheses to

flash, then rotate the dial to scroll through other battery memory locations. When the

desired memory is found, re-press the dial to confirm the selection. Next, rotate the

dial to scroll vertically through the following screens for the selected memory: battery

type, number of cells, battery capacity, charge current, discharge current, and

discharge volts/cell. Adjust any such parameter as needed to match the battery type.

When the desired battery memory has been properly adjusted / selected, press MENU

and Triton will automatically return to the appropriate “charge” screen for the battery

type selected. Starting any function cannot be accomplished in the battery memory

screens. Triton must be in one of the screens described in points 2 and 3 above to

start any function. Note: It is not necessary to program batteries into memory. This

is merely a convenience if you do not wish to re-configure the charger each time you

change batteries.

5. ADJUSTING VALUES: To adjust a value in any screen, briefly press the dial and

the adjustable parameter will flash. Rotate the dial to adjust the parameter to the

desired value. Re-press the dial to confirm the selection (will stop flashing). If two

adjustable parameters show on a single screen, repeatedly press the dial to select the

appropriate parameter to be adjusted.

6. STARTING A FUNCTION: To start the function which is displayed on-screen

(except while in the “Battery Memory” screens), press and hold the dial (do not rotate)

for 2 seconds. Triton will perform a brief “Battery Check” to ensure the battery is in

suitable condition before proceeding.

Carefully read the following sections for detailed descriptions for all functions within

the MAIN MENU. Pressing both the MENU and BATT TYPE buttons simultaneously

at any time while in the MAIN MENU will jump to the DATA VIEW MENU.

“NiCd charge” and “NiMH charge:” Triton utilizes the “zero deltaV” peak detection

method to charge NiCd and NiMH batteries with linear current. This method can

result in a battery safely reaching 95 to 98% full charge, after which time Triton will

automatically switch to a gentle trickle charge current. Trickle charge will help the

battery safely reach its 100% full charge potential.

Triton will supply trickle charge current to NiCd and NiMH batteries only after an

individual peak charge – not after discharge or cycle. Trickle charge rates vary from

0 – 250mA, and are automatically set by Triton (not user adjustable). The trickle

charge rate is based on the fast charge current setting and the condition of the

battery being charged, and should be as follows:

CHARGING BATTERIES

8

It’s a good idea to properly discharge NiCd batteries before charging. If a NiCd battery

is only partially discharged on a regular basis it can develop a so-called “memory

effect,” where it will only be capable of storing part of its maximum rated capacity. It

is difficult to reverse the memory effect and battery replacement is usually necessary.

NiMH batteries do not exhibit the memory effect and typically have a high selfdischarge

rate, so discharging before charging is not necessary.

Sub-C NiCd and NiMH cells used for powering DC motors can withstand peak charge

currents up to 5.0 amps with little heat generation. “A” or “AA” cells typically used for

radios should not be subjected to such high currents. Many chargers are designed to

safely peak charge “A” and “AA” size radio batteries at currents of 2.0 amps or less.

Exceeding this rate is not typically recommended. “AAA” and smaller cells (such as

“N” size) should be charged at even lower rates to avoid permanent damage from

overheating. Consult your battery supplier for proper charge current information.

In either the “NiCd charge” or “NiMH charge” screens, press the dial to select the

current level, then rotate the dial to adjust this level from 0.1 – 5.0 amps. Re-press

the dial to confirm the selection. Low charge currents are more gentle on batteries

and tend to result in more accurate, full charges but take longer to fully charge

batteries. High charge currents result in much quicker charge times, but are more

stressful on batteries and can shorten their overall lifespan. Press and hold the dial

for 2 seconds to start peak charge. Note: When charging NiCd or NiMH packs

containing greater than 20 cells, or charging lead-acid batteries rated at 12V or

greater, the actual amount of current delivered to the battery might not exceed 3.5A.

This is normal, and can be attributed to a variety of different circumstances such as

the condition of the input power supply, battery being charged, charge

connector/connection, etc.

Auto-Mode: If pre-set charge currents are not entered in the menu before attempting

to charge a battery, Triton’s circuitry will automatically set the appropriate charge

current to match the battery. Once the battery is connected and the charge process

has been started, Triton will monitor and evaluate the condition of the battery and

automatically set a charge current. Because the effectiveness of the auto-mode is

dependent on many variables relative to the battery being charged (how much charge

currently exists, age and quality of the cells, quality of the charge leads, etc.), Triton

will likely produce better results when programmed manually. This, and learning how

to specifically care for your batteries will ultimately lead to better performance.

Because of their small size (which is directly proportional to their high internal

impedance and natural tendency to overheat easily), it is recommended NOT to use

the auto-mode for charging small park-flyer type batteries (cells smaller than “AA”).

Using the auto-mode for NiCds with a rated capacity of 600-2400mAh, or NiMHs with

a rated capacity of 1000-3000mAh is acceptable.

9

“Pb charge” and “Li-Ion charge:” Triton utilizes the “constant current / constant

voltage” method (cc/cv) to fully charge lead-acid, lithium-ion and lithium-polymer

batteries. Constant current will be delivered during the initial stages of fast charge.

When the voltage of the Li-Ion/Li-Po battery has reached approximately 4.0V per cell,

Triton will then change its output to apply a constant-voltage to the battery. Lithium

batteries naturally resist charge current as they approach full charge. The constantvoltage

application simply allows the battery itself to dictate how much current the

charger will deliver for safe, full charges. When current to the battery drops below

approx. 100mA, Triton will halt the charge process as the battery will be at full charge.

In the “Pb charge” screen, press then rotate the dial to select and adjust charge

current from 0.1 – 5.0 amps. It is also necessary to set the total voltage rating of the

battery to be charged. Again press the dial to select the voltage level, rotating the dial

to set the proper battery voltage of either 6, 12 or 24 volts (see battery label or

specifications). Re-press the dial to confirm both settings. Press and hold the dial to

start the charge process.

In the “Li-Ion charge” screen, press then rotate the dial to select and adjust this

charge current from 0.1 – 2.5 amps. It is also necessary to set the total voltage rating

for the Li-Ion/Li-Po battery which is to be charged. Press the dial to transfer to the

voltage setting, rotating the dial to select the proper battery voltage from 3.6 – 14.8V

(see battery label or specs). Re-press the dial to confirm both settings. Press and hold

the dial to start the charge process.

Having very low self-discharge rates, Pb and Li-Ion/Li-Po batteries do not need trickle

charge and therefore no such feature exists. No Auto feature exists for Pb or Li-

Ion/Li-Po batteries.

WARNING! Lithium-ion cells are VERY sensitive and volatile. Do NOT attempt to

charge Li-Ion/Li-Po cells at excessive currents or temperatures. Failure to do so

could result in bodily harm and/or permanent damage to the cells as the

lithium-ion chemistry can be very explosive. Lithium-Polymer cells are

sensitive as well. Overcharging can cause Li-Po cells to overheat and swell and

possibly catch on fire. Disconnect all batteries from the charger IMMEDIATELY

if they become very warm to the touch.

THERMAL DETECTION (optional): Pressure builds inside cells as they approach full

charge which also results in an increase in the battery’s temperature. Monitoring a

battery’s temperature in addition to its voltage can result in the most accurate peak

detection method. This feature is optional and requires a thermal probe which is

available separately (GPMM3151), but recommended especially when charging NiMH

and Li-Ion/Li-Po batteries as they can be very sensitive to heat. Refer to the

“Temperature Cut-Off” section in the SETUP MENU (on page 13) for using this

feature.

WARNING! It is normal for batteries to become warm during charge or discharge.

Disconnect batteries IMMEDIATELY if they become hot at any time! Extra

caution must be observed with NiMH batteries as any heating will reduce the

lifespan of the battery. In such case, it may be necessary to reduce the fast

charge current to lower the possibility of heating. Never attempt to charge

batteries at excessive rates, as permanent damage could result.

10

Triton is capable of discharging batteries at 0.1 – 3.0 amps (2.5A maximum. for

Li-Ion/Li-Po), adjustable in 0.1A increments. However, other settings are required for

using the discharge function for the different battery types. Do NOT attempt to

discharge batteries at rates exceeding recommendations.

The amount of current which can be discharged from a battery is also relative to its

physical size. Sub-C size NiCd and NiMH cells can typically provide higher discharge

currents than “A,” “AA” or “AAA” cells. “AAA” and smaller cells should be subjected to

even lower discharge rates. Do NOT attempt to discharge batteries at excessive

currents as permanent damage could result. Setting a discharge rate of 0.2-0.3A. will

simulate the typical discharge current as seen when used for powering radio

transmitters and receiver batteries.

NiCd and NiMH cell manufacturers recommend discharging batteries down to a pre-set

voltage level PER CELL in the pack, typically being 0.9 volts per cell. This is called the

"discharge cutoff voltage". To determine the proper discharge cutoff voltage, multiply

the number of cells in the pack by 0.9 and enter this total voltage in the "NiCd

discharge" or "NiMH discharge" screen. For example, to discharge a 7-cell battery the

cutoff voltage would be (7 x 0.9) 6.3 volts. Note: When discharging Tx and Rx radio

batteries, the discharge cutoff voltage should be set at 1.1 volts per cell. A 4-cell Rx

battery would therefore have a discharge cutoff voltage of (1.1 x 4) 4.4 volts. Do NOT

attempt to discharge cells to voltages lower than recommended.

“NiCd discharge” and “NiMH discharge:” In either screen, press then rotate the dial

to select and adjust this level from 0.1 – 3.0 amps. Next, press the dial to transfer to

the discharge voltage setting, rotating the dial to select the proper cutoff voltage for

the battery to be discharged, ranging from from 0.4 – 28.9V. Press the dial to confirm

the selection. Press and HOLD the dial to start discharge. Note: Some transmitters

may contain a diode in their charge circuitry which will not allow its internal battery

to be discharged. In this case, the Triton charger might not be able to start the

discharge process. The best option is to remove the battery from the transmitter and

connect it directly to the charger using one of Great Planes’ pre-assembled charge

leads (see rear of manual for a complete list).

“Pb discharge:” Press then rotate the dial to select and adjust discharge current from

0.1 – 3.0 amps. Press the dial to transfer to the voltage setting, rotating the dial to

select the proper cutoff voltage of either 5.4V (for batteries rated at 6.0 volts), 10.8V

(for 12.0V batteries), or 21.6V (for 24.0V batteries). Press the dial to confirm the

selection. Press and hold the dial to start discharge.

“Li-Ion discharge:” Press then rotate the dial to select and adjust discharge current

level from 0.1 – 2.5 amps. It is also necessary to set the discharge cutoff voltage

setting. Press the dial to transfer to the voltage setting, rotating the dial to select the

proper cutoff voltage of either 3.0V (single cells), 6.0V (2 cells), 9.0V (3 cells), or 12.0V

(4 cells). Press the dial to confirm the selection. Press and hold the dial to start

discharge.

DISCHARGE CURRENT & CUTOFF VOLTAGE

11

Battery “cycling” is the function of subjecting a battery to full charge and full

discharge processes in succession. Cycling is available for NiCd and NiMH batteries

only, and NOT recommended for Pb or Li-Ion/Li-Po batteries. Cell manufacturers

note three main benefits of battery cycling:

A. Battery maintenance: NiCd batteries benefit the most from regular cycling

(recommended once monthly) to help reduce the threat of the so-called memory effect.

NiMH batteries benefit little from regular cycling as they typically do not suffer from

symptoms of memory effect.

B. Determining battery condition: Rechargeable batteries are rated by how much

charge “capacity” they can store. A function of how much current a battery can

deliver over a given amount of time, capacity is rated in “mAh”or milli-amp hours

(large batteries might be rated in “Ah,” or amp-hours). If a battery can only supply a

small fraction of its rated capacity, it’s likely reaching the end of its useful life.

C. Breaking-in a new or unused battery: New batteries often require a short

break-in period before they will perform to their rated capacity. Older batteries which

have been unused for an extended length of time might require the same treatment

to regain their usefulness. Repeated cycling is the best way to revive such batteries.

During charge, Triton will monitor and calculate the amount of capacity or charge

energy that is delivered to the battery. During discharge, Triton will monitor capacity

that was delivered from the battery. Discharge capacity measurements can then be

compared to the capacity rating specified on the battery itself to determine its overall

condition. If a battery provides less than 70% of its rated capacity it may not be safe

to use. Additional charge-to-discharge cycles can be attempted to try and revive the

battery, but if repeated attempts fail to improve performance the batteries should be

replaced.

The “chg-to-dsch” feature charges NiCd or NiMH batteries to peak, then automatically

changes to a brief cool-off period, then to discharge mode. This process is often used

for evaluating a battery’s ability to hold capacity.

The “dsch-to-chg” feature will discharge batteries first, followed by a cool-off period,

then by a full peak charge. This method can be used just prior to using the battery

in application to ensure the battery is fully charged.

For NiCd and NiMH “Chg to Dsch” and “Dsch to Chg” screens, briefly press then

rotate the dial to select the proper charge and discharge currents. Note: During cycle

mode, the discharge cutoff voltage for either battery type is FIXED at 0.8V per cell.

This is not adjustable.

Triton offers the options to set a cool-off time delay between charge and discharge

functions, and to cycle a battery up to 10 times in a row. See “Delay Between Charge

/ Discharge” and “Number of Cycles” in the SETUP MENU (on page 14).

CHARGE TO DISCHARGE &

DISCHARGE-TO-CHARGE CYCLING

12

Press the MENU pushbutton to access the SETUP MENU, which is divided

horizontally into four sections for NiCd, NiMH, Pb, and Li-Ion/Li-Po batteries

(changing battery types can ONLY be done through the MAIN MENU). Miscellaneous

settings for charge, discharge, and cycling functions are selected in the SETUP

MENU. Scrolling through all screens is accomplished by rotating the dial.

1. BUZZER: Sounded at various times during operation to indicate different

activities, ten different audible melodies from “Melody 1” to “Melody 10” can be

selected by briefly pressing and rotating the dial. Re-press the dial to confirm the

selection. “Melody Off” effectively silences the buzzer.

2. SAFETY TIMER: If peak or full charge is not detected, the user-selected safety

timer will automatically terminate fast charge to prevent damage to the battery from

overcharge. Select a safety time which ranges from "No time limit" to 990 minutes.

Recommendations for the safety timer are as follows: NiMH or NiCd: batteries having

1000mAh or less – 60 minutes; 1001 to 2000mAh battery – 120 minutes; 2001 to

3000mAh battery – 180 minutes maximum. Li-Ion/Li-Po: 60 minutes maximum.

Lead Acid: 360 minutes maximum. Note: These suggested times are just an

example based on a charge rate of 1A. Safety timer settings will need to be

based on the battery's capacity and the charge rate. If charge current is set to a

low value, the safety timer can be set to a higher value. If charge current is set to a

high value, the safety timer should be set to a shorter value. If this time limit is

reached before the battery reaches peak/full charge, “Time limit over” will show on

the display and you should NOT assume the battery has reached full charge. It may

be necessary to increase this time delay setting to allow the battery to properly reach

full charge in the future.

3. TEMPERATURE CUT-OFF: An optional

feature, the temperature cut-off is highly

recommended for use especially when charging

NiMH and Li-Ion/Li-Po batteries. Using this

feature requires the purchase of ElectriFly’s Triton

Thermal Probe – GPMM3151. Connect the black

plug of the thermal probe to the jack on

Triton’s right side panel. Slide the white end of

the probe onto the battery in parallel with the

cells – straddling the area where two cells

touch side-by-side. An adjustment screw in the

center of the white plug can allow the prongs to

be widened or narrowed to snugly fit the

battery. Ranging from 60–130ºF, set the

maximum temperature at which Triton should

allow batteries to reach during charge. Once a

battery reaches this set temperature during

charge, Triton will terminate the charge process to protect the battery. Recommended

battery temperature settings are as follows: NiCd and NiMH: 125° F; Li-Ion/Li-Po and

SETUP MENU

13

Lead Acid – Set for 10° F above room (or field) temperature. Note: Failure to make

adequate contact between the black tip on the white probe to the battery will prevent

this feature from functioning properly. Do not connect the thermal probe to the

charger if temperature monitoring will not be used.

The following functions are applicable to NiCd and NiMH batteries only:

4. PEAK DELAY AT START: During the early moments of fast charge a battery’s

voltage can temporarily be unstable which can cause some peak chargers to prematurely

terminate fast charge. Delaying the time at which Triton’s peak detection

circuitry is activated at the beginning of fast charge can help to avoid this situation.

Select a peak delay time, which ranges from 0 to 60 minutes. Typically, a delay of no

longer than 3 to 5 minutes is necessary. A delay time of 0 minutes effectively disables

this function.

5. NUMBER OF CYCLES: Select from 0 to 10 the number of complete charge-todischarge

cycles the battery should be subjected to in succession. Note: All batteries

have a “lifecycle” rating, indicating how many cycles a battery can usefully withstand

over the course of its life. Periodic cycling of batteries can be beneficial to help keep

them in useful condition. Excessive cycling, however, can unnecessarily reduce the

useful lifespan of the battery.

6. DELAY BETWEEN CHARGE/DISCHARGE: A battery can often become warm

after a charge or discharge period. Triton can insert a user-selected time delay to

occur after each charge and discharge period to allow the battery adequate time to

cool before being subjected to the next step. Set the charge/discharge delay time,

which ranges from 1 to 60 minutes. “DLY” will be displayed any time Triton is in this

delay mode.

7. PEAK SENSITIVITY / THRESHOLD: As NiCd and NiMH batteries are being

charged their voltage will increase. After their maximum or “peak” charge capacity

has been reached the battery’s voltage will begin to decrease. The point at which

Triton will terminate fast charge after peak is called the “peak sensitivity” –

sometimes referred to as “threshold.” This point can be adjusted by the user, and is

set in milli-volts per cell in the pack. Using the dial, set the peak sensitivity level. A

lower mV sensitivity value can result in more precise peak detections, and higher mV

sensitivity value can result in less precise detections. For NiCd batteries, the peak

sensitivity ranges from 5mV to 20mV per cell – an initial setting of 10mV is

recommended. For NiMH batteries, the peak sensitivity ranges from 3mV to 15mV per

cell – an initial setting of 5mV is recommended. Adjust the sensitivity setting as

needed to achieve the maximum capacity for the battery.

The following features apply only to NiMH batteries:

8. NiMH MAXIMUM. CHARGE INPUT: This feature sets the maximum charge

capacity that will be delivered to the battery during charge. NiMHs deteriorate when

subjected to excessive heat which can occur if overcharged. If peak charge is not

detected by the charger nor has the safety timer expired, this feature will

automatically cease fast charge at the user-selected charge input capacity selection.

This is also useful when preparing a NiMH battery for long-term storage, as many cell

manufacturers recommend to place a partial charge charge on the battery

14

beforehand. Set the NiMH maximum charge input capacity, which ranges from 0 to

9900mAh. Setting a value of 9900mAh will effectively disable this feature.

9. TOP-OFF CHARGE: When fast charge has terminated the charger will supply

the selected amount of “top-off charge” current to help NiMH batteries achieve full

charge without overheating. Select the top-off charge rate, from 0 to 1000mA, which

should be approximately 7% of the fast charge current setting. For example, if fast

charge current is set at 2.5 amps, the top-off charge rate should be set at (2.5A x

0.07) 0.175A or 175mA. If fast charge is 1.0 amps, top-off charge rate should be set

at (1.0A x 0.07) 0.70A or 70mA. Triton will automatically terminate the top-off charge

after 20 minutes.

Triton stores various charge / discharge / cycle data which can be recalled for

viewing in the DATA VIEW MENU. This menu can be accessed from the MAIN MENU

by pressing the MENU and BATT TYPE buttons simultaneously. Or, this menu can

be accessed while Triton is performing a function by pressing only the BATT TYPE

button (pressing the MENU button returns the display back to the DATA VIEW

MENU). Rotate the dial to scroll through all screens in this menu. All data shown is

read-only and cannot be adjusted by the user.

“Input – Output:” The actual voltage being applied to the charger’s input will be

shown on the left, and the voltage measured at its output will be shown at right.

“Peak – Average:” The highest measured voltage or “peak voltage” recorded during

an entire charge period will be shown at left, and the average voltage calculated

during the entire charge period will be shown at right. Keeping track of both of these

measurements every time a battery is charged can help to evaluate its overall

condition as the battery ages. Typically, a battery’s peak and average voltage levels

will gradually decrease as the battery reaches the end of its usefulness.

“Chg/Dschg (01):” The amount of capacity delivered to the battery during any single

charge function will be shown at left, while the capacity delivered from the battery

during the discharge function will be shown at right (both measured in mAh). This

charger stores data for up to 10 cycles. Data for any particular cycle can be retrieved

by briefly pressing the dial, causing the cycle number in parentheses to blink. Rotate

the dial to select the actual cycle number which is to be displayed. Re-press the dial

to confirm the selection.

“Bat. Temperature:” This screen displays the actual temperature of the battery

under charge, measured in degrees Fahrenheit (F). An optional feature, it requires the

Triton Thermal Probe (GPMM3151) which is available separately. “No sensor” will be

displayed if the thermal probe is not connected.

DATA VIEW MENU

15

Data pertaining to a function being performed by Triton can be viewed on the LCD

while the function is in progress. Data in these screens is active and being updated

constantly until the end of the function has been reached. Different screens exist for

charge, discharge, charge-to-discharge cycles, and discharge-to-charge cycles.

CHARGE DATA: This screen (right) will

constantly update and show the battery type in

the upper-left, input charge capacity in the upper

right (in mAh), and output voltage, charge

current, and elapsed charge time (in minutes)

along the bottom.

DISCHARGE DATA: This screen (similar to above) will constantly update, showing

battery type in the upper-left, discharge capacity upper-right (in mAh), output

voltage, discharge current, and elapsed discharge time along the bottom.

CHARGE > DISCHARGE DATA: This screen (right) will show the cycle number topcenter,

amount of capacity which was discharged FROM the battery top-right (in

mAh), output voltage, discharge current, and elapsed discharge time (in minutes)

along the bottom.

DISCHARGE > CHARGE DATA: This screen

(similar as above) will show the cycle number topcenter,

amount of capacity – or charge energy –

which was delivered TO the battery top-right (in

mAh), output voltage, charge current, and peak

charge time along the bottom.

Triton allows for the adjustment of current levels WHILE performing a charge,

discharge, or cycle function (no need to stop a function and return to another menu).

When the LCD is showing any of the displays in this section, briefly press the dial,

causing the current value to flash. Then, rotate the dial to the desired current level,

and re-press the dial to confirm the new current level. Triton will proceed to complete

the function as signaled by the current value changing to show “END.” Note: For

NiMH batteries, when Triton has reached peak charge it will change to “top-off”

charge, where the current value on-screen will change to show “TOP.” When top-off

charge is complete Triton will proceed to show “END.”

CHARGE / DISCHARGE DISPLAYS

16

A built-in miniature fan helps to keep all internal components cool during operation.

This will help extend the service life of the charger, as well as allow the charger to

function more accurately and efficiently. The fan will operate during the following

conditions:

A. During discharge.

B. During charge, if the internal temperature exceeds 122°F, if output power

exceeds 30W, if output current exceeds 2.5A, or if charging a single cell or packs

containing 2 or 3 cells.

C. Anytime the internal temperature exceeds 212°F the charger will stop all charge

or discharge functions until the temperature drops below 158°F. The fan will

continue to run until the temperature of the charger drops below 113°F.

D. Anytime the fan turns on it will operate until the charge or discharge function is

finished unless the internal temperature still exceeds 113°F.

CAUTION: Do not block the vent holes for the cooling fan as an overheating

condition could result, possibly causing permanent damage to the charger.

The ElectriFly Triton Charger uses solid-state circuitry to protect against potential

damage which could be caused by short-circuit or reverse polarity conditions.

REVERSE INPUT POLARITY: If input power to the charger is connected in reverse

polarity, the charger will be protected from damage but will not function. Re-check all

input connections and the power source to ensure the proper power and polarities

are observed.

BATTERY CONDITION PRE-CHECK: Any time a battery is connected to the output

the charger will instantly check the condition of the battery and determine if it is

suitable for conditioning. In all cases, check the connection between the battery and

the charger to ensure a solid physical and electrical connection is made, observing

proper polarities at all times.

1. Battery error: If a problem exists with the battery, the display will read “Output

battery – connect polarity error.” Check the battery for possible problems with its

connector or lead. If repeated attempts to use the same battery result in errors, the

battery may need to be replaced.

2. Polarity error: If a battery is connected in reverse to the output, the display will

show “Output battery – reverse polarity.” Re-check the output connections to ensure

proper polarities are observed.

SOLID-STATE CURRENT OVERLOAD &

REVERSE POLARITY PROTECTION

COOLING FAN

17

OVERHEATING: If Triton’s internal temperature exceeds 212°F (100ºC) at any time,

the charger will automatically pause operations and display “Overheating.” This is to

protect Triton from damage due to excess heat. Triton will return to normal operation

after cooling down to an acceptable level.

PROBLEM: Display does not work when unit is connected.

CAUSE AND CURES:

1) Check power supply for improper power.

2) Check input connections for proper contact.

PROBLEM: Charger doesn’t recognize battery.

CAUSES AND CURES:

1) Battery may be connected backwards. Connect battery leads properly.

2) Faulty connection or wiring. Correct or replace charge lead.

3) Defective cell in the pack. Replace battery pack or cell.

4) Safety timer and/or temperature cutoff settings too low.

PROBLEM: Does not automatically terminate peak charge after the programmed

“safety timer” setting.

CAUSE AND CURES:

Internal problem with Triton Peak Charger. Disconnect battery immediately and

contact Hobby Services for further details.

PROBLEM: Battery voltage low after peak charge (below 1.2V per cell).

CAUSES AND CURES:

1) Charge rate setting too low. See “Charging Batteries.”

2) Battery connected in reverse. Connect battery leads properly.

3) Defective battery, needs to be replaced.

PROBLEM: Will not lock into discharge mode.

CAUSES AND CURES:

1) Battery connected in reverse. Connect battery leads properly.

2) Cell selector in wrong position. Adjust cell selector to match the number of cells in

the pack.

3) Tx has diode in charge circuit. Remove battery and connect directly to Triton Peak

Charger, or contact your radio manufacturer for details.

4) Defective cell in pack. Replace battery.

5) Battery already discharged.

PROBLEM: Low mAh/time readings after discharge.

CAUSES AND CURES:

1) Batteries not fully charged prior to discharge. Fully charge batteries prior to

discharge.

2) Old or unused batteries. Cycle again to see if capacity improves.

3) Defective battery, needs to be replaced.

4) Discharge rate too high. Change discharge rate to 250mAh for better accuracy.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

18

5) Possible internal problem with Triton Peak Charger. Contact Hobby Services for

further details

PROBLEM: LEDs and controls do not function properly.

CAUSES AND CURES:

Battery possibly connected backwards. Connect battery leads properly, or contact

Hobby Services for further details.

Great Planes offers a variety of charge leads to match any radio system you may have.

These items may be purchased through your local hobby shop.

Part # Item Description

HCAP0101 Futaba J Tx and Rx charge leads, except 9VAP

HCAP0102 Futaba J Tx and Rx charge leads, 9VAP only

HCAP0104 Airtronics/Sanwa Tx and Rx charge leads

HCAP0105 JR Tx and Rx charge leads

HCAP0106 Hitec Tx and Rx charge leads

HCAP0108 Charge leads, banana plugs to alligator clips

HCAP0110 9V-style Tx connector, Futaba-J Rx charge lead

HCAP0310 Banana Plugs (3 pair)

HCAP0320 Heavy Duty Banana Plugs (2 pair)

GPMM3105 2-PIN/Banana Plug Charge Adapter

CHARGE LEADS OPTIONAL TRANSMITTER

CHARGE ADAPTERS

19

Great Planes warrants this product to be free from defects in materials and

workmanship for a period of one (1) years from the date of purchase. During that

period, Great Planes will, at its option, repair or replace without service charge any

product deemed defective due to those causes. You will be required to provide proof

of purchase (invoice or receipt). This warranty does not cover damage caused by

abuse, misuse, alteration or accident. If there is damage stemming from these causes

within the stated warranty period, Great Planes will, at its option, repair or replace it

for a service charge not greater than 50% of its then current retail list price. Be sure

to include your daytime telephone number in case we need to contact you about your

repair. This warranty gives you specific rights. You may also have other rights, which

vary from state to state.

For service on your Great Planes product, warranty or non-warranty, send it postpaid

and insured to:

HOBBY SERVICES

3002 N. Apollo Drive, Suite 1

Champaign, IL 61822

(217) 398-0007

www.hobbyservices.com

*For warranty and service information if purchased outside the USA or Canada, see

the additional warranty information insert (if applicable) or ask your retailer for more

information.

www.greatplanes.com

www.electrifly.com

1-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY

*USA and Canada Only






ELECTRIFLY TRITON COMPUTERIZED CHARGER

R/C BATTERY CHARGE/DISCHARGE CHART

BATTERY SPECS CHARGING DISCHARGING

Break-in Standard Peak

charge rate charge Quick Detection Discharge Discharge

Type Size Capacity 0.1C rate minutes rate at 1C charge rate Sensitivity current cutoff voltage

NiCd N/AAA 50mAh 0.1A 30 0.1A 0.1A (2C)

110mAh 0.1A 66 0.1A 0.2A (2C)

150mAh 0.1A 90 0.2A 0.3A (2C)

250mAh 0.1A 150 0.3A 0.5A (2C)

300mAh 0.1A 180 0.3A 0.6A (2C)

AA 500mAh 0.1A 300 0.5A 1.0A (2C)

600mAh 0.1A 360 0.6A 1.2A (2C)

700mAh 0.1A 420 0.7A 1.4A (2C)

800mAh 0.1A 480 0.8A 1.6A (2C)

A 1000mAh 0.1A 600 1.0A 2.0A (2C)

1100mAh 0.2A 330 1.1A 2.2A (2C)

1200mAh 0.2A 360 1.2A 2.4A (2C)

1300mAh 0.2A 390 1.3A 2.6A (2C)

1400mAh 0.2A 420 1.4A 2.8A (2C)

Sub-C 1400mAh 0.2A 420 1.4A 4.2A (3C)

1500mAh 0.2A 450 1.5A 4.5A (3C)

1800mAh 0.2A 540 1.8A 5.0A

1900mAh 0.2A 570 1.9A 5.0A

2000mAh 0.2A 600 2.0A 5.0A

2400mAh 0.3A 480 2.4A 5.0A

NiMH N/AAA 300mAh 0.1A 180 0.3A 0.6A (2C)

500mAh 0.1A 300 0.5A 1.0A (2C)

600mAh 0.1A 360 0.6A 1.2A (2C)

700mAh 0.1A 420 0.7A 1.4A (2C)

AA 1200mAh 0.1A 720 1.2A 2.4A (2C)

1300mAh 0.1A 780 1.3A 2.6A (2C)

1400mAh 0.1A 840 1.4A 2.8A (2C)

1500mAh 0.2A 450 1.5A 3.0A (2C)

1600mAh 0.2A 480 1.6A 3.2A (2C)

A 1500mAh 0.2A 480 1.6A 3.2A (2C)

1700mAh 0.2A 510 1.7A 3.4A (2C)

1800mAh 0.2A 540 1.8A 3.6A (2C)

1900mAh 0.2A 570 1.9A 3.8A (2C)

2000mAh 0.2A 600 2.0A 4.0A (2C)

Sub-C 3000mAh 0.3A 600 3.0A 5.0A

3300mAh 0.3A 660 3.3A 5.0A

C÷5 when checking

the battery’s ability

to hold it’s rated

capacity.

2C for quick

discharges.

(0.2-0.3A when

testing Rx and Tx

batteries for useful

flight time)

same as above same as above 3-5mV per cell

(1.1 volts per cell

when testing Rx

and Tx

batteries for useful

flight time)

0.9 volts per cell

8-10mV per cell

BATTERY SPECS CHARGING DISCHARGING

Standard Maximum

charge rate Quick charge voltage Discharge Discharge

Type Capacity at 0.3C rate at 0.7C per cell current (C÷5) cutoff voltage

Lithium-Ion 600mAh 0.2A 0.4A 0.1A

or Lithium- 1200mAh 0.4A 0.8A 4.2 volts 0.2A 3.0 volts per cell

Polymer 1800mAh 0.6A 1.3A 0.4A

C÷5 discharge current to compare battery to manufacturer

specs - 2C max. for speed

BATTERY SPECS CHARGING DISCHARGING

Standard Maximum

charge rate Quick charge voltage Discharge Discharge

Type Capacity at 0.1C rate at 0.3C per cell current (C÷20) cutoff voltage

Lead-acid 4.5Ah 0.5A 1.5A 0.3A

7Ah 0.7A 2.3A 2.5 volts 0.4A 1.75 volts per cell

10Ah 1.0A 3.3A 0.5A

C÷20 discharge current to compare battery to manufacturer

specs - 1C max. for speed

For a 500mAh battery: “1C” = 500mA or 0.5 amps

For a 1300mAh battery: “1C” = 1300mA or 1.3 amps

“2C” = 1000mA or 1.0 amps (500x2)

“2C” = 2600mA or 2.6 amps (1300x2)

“C/5” = 100mA or 0.1 amps (500÷5)

“4C” = 5200mA or 5.2 amps (1300x4)

“C” equals the capacity rating of a battery as printed on it’s label.

IMPORTANT - Manufacturers rate batteries in terms of “capacity” or “C,” which is usually listed in mAh

(milli-amp-hours). A battery’s capacity or “C” rating should be printed on its label. Charge and discharge

currents are expressed as a function of this “C” rating. For example, a 500mAh battery has a “1C” rating of

500mA. To charge this battery at, say, 2C means the charge current should be (500 x 2) 1000mA or 1.0 amps.

To discharge this battery at C/5 means the discharge current should be (500 ÷ 5) 100mA. It is important to know

your battery’s capacity rating, because charge and discharge rates are typically expressed as a function of this

“C” value.

FOR LEAD-ACID AND LITHIUM-ION / LITHIUM-POLYMER BATTERIES, ALWAYS CONSULT YOUR BATTERY

SUPPLIER FOR EXACT CHARGE AND DISCHARGE SPECIFICATIONS AS PERFORMANCE VARIES BETWEEN

CELL MANUFACTURERS!

NiCd (nickel-cadmium) and NiMH (nickel-metal hydride) batteries:

Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) and Lithium-Polymer 9Li-Po) batteries

CHARGING:

1. Slow charge to break-in batteries that are new or

have been in storage for some time: set charge

current at 0.1C (C x 0.1), and set the “Safety timer” at

960 minutes.

2. Quick charges:

a. N, AAA, AA and A size cells can safely be charged

at charge currents of 2C. A 600mA battery would

be charged at (600 x 2) 1200mA or 1.2A.

b. Most sub-C size cells can safely be charged at 3C.

c. Lower charge rates are less stressful on cells and

will extend service life. Reduce charge current if

battery overheats.

d. Set peak sensitivity to 8-10mV per cell for NiCd

batteries, and 3-5mV per cell for NiMH batteries.

Reduce peak sensitivity values if battery overheats

during charge. Read through the “Setup Menu”

section of Triton’s manual completely to

properly set all other charge parameters.

DISCHARGING:

1. Discharge cutoff voltage: Set by multiplying the

number of cells in the pack by 0.9. Cutoff for a 7-cell

battery would be (7 x 0.9) 6.3 volts.

2. To determine if a battery can deliver its rated

capacity: Set discharge current at C/5. A 1000mA

battery would be discharged at (1000 ÷ 5) 200mA

or 0.2A.

3. To determine a motor/power battery’s ability to

provide high currents: Set discharge current to 4C

max. A 1200mA battery would be discharged at

(1200 x 4) 4800mA or 4.8A. Larger capacity batteries

can be discharged at 5.0A maximum.

4. To determine the useful flight time of Rx and Tx

batteries: Set discharge current to 0.2 or 0.3A, AND

set the discharge cutoff voltage to 1.1 multiplied by

the number of cells in the pack. For example, a 4-cell

Rx pack would be set to (1.1 x 4) 4.4 volts.

Pb batteries (lead-acid):

CHARGING - Read Triton’s manual to properly set the

safety timer in the SETUP MENU:

1. Battery voltage: Set “Pb charge” voltage to match the

voltage rating printed on the battery.

2. Slow charge: Set “Pb charge” current at C/10. For a

7Ah (7000mAh) battery, current would be (7000 ÷ 10)

700mA or 0.7A.

3. Fast charge: Set “Pb charge” current at C/3. For a

7Ah battery, this current would be (7000 ÷ 3) 333mA

or 2.3 amps.

DISCHARGING:

1. Discharge cutoff voltage: Set “Pb discharge” voltage

to 1.75 multiplied by the number of cells in the

battery.

2. To determine if a battery can deliver its rated

capacity: Set “Pb discharge” current at C÷20. A 7Ah

(7000mAh) lead-acid battery would be discharged at

(7000 ÷ 20) 350mA or roughly 0.4A.

CHARGING - Read Triton’s manual to properly set the

safety timer in the SETUP MENU:

1. Battery voltage: Set “Li-Ion charge” voltage to be 3.6

multiplied by the number of cells in the battery.

2. Slow charge: Set “Li-Ion charge” current at 0.3C.

3. Quick charge: Set charge current at 0.7C. Some cell

brands may allow for a quick charge of up to 1C.

ALWAYS consult the cell supplier to confirm what is

an acceptable fast charge rate. NEVER overcharge

lithium batteries!!

DISCHARGING:

1. Discharge cutoff voltage: Set “Li-Ion discharge”

voltage to 3.0 multiplied by the number of cells in the

battery.

2. To determine if a battery can deliver its rated

capacity: Set “Li-Ion discharge” current at C/5 (C÷5).

3. For quick discharges: Set discharge current to no

higher than 2C maximum.

R/C BATTERY CHARGE/DISCHARGE RECOMMENDATIONS

Zenoah G260 Instruction Manual

Zenoah G260 Service Manual

Jr Propo Voyager E Electric Heli